US20200121801A1 - Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using - Google Patents

Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20200121801A1
US20200121801A1 US16/549,247 US201916549247A US2020121801A1 US 20200121801 A1 US20200121801 A1 US 20200121801A1 US 201916549247 A US201916549247 A US 201916549247A US 2020121801 A1 US2020121801 A1 US 2020121801A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
compound
salt
group
linker
amino acids
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US16/549,247
Inventor
Iontcho Radoslavov Vlahov
Christopher Paul Leamon
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Endocyte Inc
Original Assignee
Endocyte Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Endocyte Inc filed Critical Endocyte Inc
Priority to US16/549,247 priority Critical patent/US20200121801A1/en
Publication of US20200121801A1 publication Critical patent/US20200121801A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
    • A61K47/64—Drug-peptide, drug-protein or drug-polyamino acid conjugates, i.e. the modifying agent being a peptide, protein or polyamino acid which is covalently bonded or complexed to a therapeutically active agent
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/549—Sugars, nucleosides, nucleotides or nucleic acids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/55—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound the modifying agent being also a pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent, i.e. the entire conjugate being a codrug, i.e. a dimer, oligomer or polymer of pharmacologically or therapeutically active compounds
    • A61K47/551—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound the modifying agent being also a pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent, i.e. the entire conjugate being a codrug, i.e. a dimer, oligomer or polymer of pharmacologically or therapeutically active compounds one of the codrug's components being a vitamin, e.g. niacinamide, vitamin B3, cobalamin, vitamin B12, folate, vitamin A or retinoic acid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K7/00—Peptides having 5 to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K7/04—Linear peptides containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K7/06—Linear peptides containing only normal peptide links having 5 to 11 amino acids

Definitions

  • the invention described herein pertains to drug delivery conjugates for targeted therapy.
  • the invention described herein pertains to drug delivery conjugates that include polyvalent linkers comprising one or more unnatural amino acids.
  • the mammalian immune system provides a means for the recognition and elimination of pathogenic cells, such as tumor cells, and other invading foreign pathogens. While the immune system normally provides a strong line of defense, there are many instances where pathogenic cells, such as cancer cells, and other infectious agents evade a host immune response and proliferate or persist with concomitant host pathogenicity.
  • Chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapies have been developed to eliminate, for example, replicating neoplasms.
  • many of the currently available chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapy regimens have adverse side effects because they lack sufficient selectivity to preferentially destroy pathogenic cells, and therefore, may also harm normal host cells, such as cells of the hematopoietic system, and other non-pathogenic cells.
  • the adverse side effects of these anticancer drugs highlight the need for the development of new therapies selective for pathogenic cell populations and with reduced host toxicity.
  • drug delivery conjugates that include polyvalent linkers formed from one or more unnatural amino acids are efficacious in treating pathogenic cell populations, and exhibit low host animal toxicity.
  • compositions containing one or more of the compounds are also described herein.
  • the compositions include a therapeutically effective amount of the one or more compounds for treating a patient with cancer, inflammation, and the like.
  • the compositions may include other components and/or ingredients, including, but not limited to, other therapeutically active compounds, and/or one or more carriers, diluents, excipients, and the like, and combinations thereof.
  • methods for using the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for treating patients or host animals with cancer, inflammation, and the like are also described herein.
  • the methods include the step of administering one or more of the compounds and/or compositions described herein to a patient with cancer, inflammation, and the like.
  • the methods include administering a therapeutically effective amount of the one or more compounds and/or compositions described herein for treating patients with cancer, inflammation, and the like.
  • uses of the compounds and compositions in the manufacture of a medicament for treating patients with cancer, inflammation, and the like are also described herein.
  • the medicaments include a therapeutically effective amount of the one or more compounds and/or compositions for treating a patient with cancer, inflammation, and the like.
  • FIG. 1A shows the relative affinity of EC1669 in KB cells, 1 h at 37° C.
  • FIG. 1B shows the relative affinity of EC1669 in CHO- ⁇ cells, 1 h at 37° C.
  • FIG. 2 shows the cytostatic effect of EC1669 on RAW264.7 cells, as determined by XTT cell viability at 2 h and 72 h.
  • FIG. 3A shows in vivo activity of EC1456 against KB tumors in nu/nu mice dosed at 1 ⁇ mol/kg three times per week (M/W/F) (TIW) for two consecutive weeks ( ⁇ ), compared to EC1456 co-dosed with EC0923 at 100 ⁇ mol/kg ( ⁇ ), and untreated (PBS) controls ( ⁇ ).
  • the dotted vertical line represents the day of the final dose.
  • FIG. 3B shows that EC1456 did not result in any observable whole animal toxicity as determined by animal body weight.
  • FIG. 4A shows 4/4 PRs in test animals.
  • FIG. 4B shows that EC1663 did not exhibit significant host animal toxicity.
  • FIG. 5A shows the activity of EC1456 against established subcutaneous MDA-MB-231 tumors.
  • Animals bearing s.c. MDA-MB-231 tumors (94-145 mm 3 ) were treated i.v. starting on Day 17 with 2 ⁇ mol/kg (panel A) of EC1456 ( ⁇ ), three times per week (M/W/F) for a 2 week period, and compared to untreated animals ( ⁇ ), as shown in FIG. 5A .
  • N 5 animals per cohort.
  • Dotted vertical line day of final dose.
  • FIG. 5B shows that EC1456 did not cause gross whole animal toxicity as determined by % weight change.
  • FIG. 6B shows that EC1456 did not exhibit significant host animal toxicity. In contrast, cisplatin treatment resulted in substantial host animal toxicity during the dosing period.
  • FIG. 7 shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against adjuvant-induced arthritis.
  • the arrows indicate the treatment days.
  • FIG. 8A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against arthritis, (a) healthy control, (a) untreated control, (b) EC1669 (375 nmol/kg), (c) EC1669+500x EC0923.
  • FIG. 8B shows that EC1669 does not exhibit whole animal toxicity, (a) untreated control, (b) EC1669 (375 nmol/kg), (c) EC1669+500x EC0923, (d) healthy control.
  • FIG. 9A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against arthritis, as determined by paw swelling.
  • FIG. 9B shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against arthritis, as determined by bone radiography.
  • FIG. 10A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 alone, and EC1669 plus CellCept combination co-therapy in AIA rats, where day 0 is 9 days post induction, and the arrows indicate treatment days, (a) healthy control, (b) untreated control, (c) EC1669 (1000 nmol/kg, siw, sc), (d) CellCeptTM (30 mg/kg, po, qdx5), (e) EC1669+CellCeptTM.
  • FIG. 10B shows the whole animal toxicity compared to control for each of the administration protocols.
  • FIG. 11 shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 alone, and EC1669 plus CellCept combination co-therapy in AIA rats, as determined by paw swelling.
  • FIG. 12A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against EAU (total uveitis scores for both eyes). Animals are treated with EC1669 ( ⁇ ), EC1669 plus EC0923 ( ⁇ ), and MTX ( ⁇ ) every other day starting on day 8 after EAU induction or from untreated animals ( ⁇ ). Day 0 is 8 days post induction, and the arrows indicate treatment days.
  • FIG. 12B shows that EC1669 does not cause whole animal toxicity.
  • FIG. 13A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against EAU (total uveitis scores for both eyes), (a) uveitis untreated control, (b) EC1496 (375 nmol/kg), (c) EC1496+excess EC0923.
  • FIG. 13B shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against EAU, as determined by histology.
  • FIG. 14A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against EAE, (a) untreated EAE control, (b) EC1669 (250 nmol/kg), (c) EC1669+excess EC0923. Animals are treated every other day (as indicated by arrows) starting on day 8 after EAE induction, and compared to untreated control.
  • FIG. 14B shows the percent changes in body weight (B), averaged for each group.
  • FIG. 15 shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against EAE. Individual EAE scores from untreated animals and animals treated with EC1496 and EC1496 plus EC0923 every other day starting on day 8 after EAE induction are shown, and compared to untreated control.
  • FIG. 16A shows the pharmacokinetics of EC1496 (500 nmol/kg, s.c.), and in vivo production of aminopterin and aminopterin hydrazide.
  • FIG. 16B shows the pharmacokinetics of EC0746 (comparator compound, 500 nmol/kg, s.c.), and in vivo production of aminopterin and aminopterin hydrazide.
  • FIGS. 17A, 17C, and 17E the pharmacokinetic biodistribution of 3 H-EC1669; and FIGS. 17B, 17D, and 17F show 3 H-methotrexate in mice. Test compounds were administered to Balb/c mice at 500 nmol/kg, s.c.
  • FIG. 18 shows the comparison of RBC uptake of 3 H-EC1669 ( ⁇ ) and 3 H-MTX ( ⁇ ) in mice, as a measure of radioactivity over time.
  • FIG. 19 shows the relative whole animal toxicity between (b) EC1496 (3 ⁇ mol/kg) and (c) EC0746 (comparator compound, 3 ⁇ mol/kg)), and compared to vehicle control (a) when dosed BIW for 2 weeks in folate deficient rats.
  • FIG. 20 shows the maximum tolerated dose (MTD) of EC1456 compared to vehicle controls.
  • a compound of the formula B-L(D) X or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein B is a radical of a cell surface receptor binding and/or targeting ligand, D is in each instance a radical of an independently selected drug, x is an integer selected from 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5; and L is a polyvalent releasable linker comprising one or more unnatural amino acids; and where B is covalently attached to L, and L is covalently attached to each D; and
  • the present invention also provides a ligand-agent conjugate capable of binding to a folate recognition site, comprising a diagnostic or therapeutic agent in association with a non-peptide folic acid analog of general formula:
  • X, Y, U, V, W, T, A 1 , A 2 , R 6 , R 7 , L, n, p, r and s are as defined herein;
  • q is an integer 1;
  • D is a diagnostic agent or a therapeutic agent.
  • the ligand is a folate comprising D-glutamyl, also referred to herein as D-folate, or pteroyl-D-glutamic acid. It is to be understood herein that when B is a radical of D-folate, the included D-glutamyl portion of B is not part of the linker L.
  • At least one unnatural amino acid is selected from D-alanine, D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-phenylalanine, D-histidine, D-isoleucine, D-lysine, D-leucine, D-methionine, D-proline, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-valine, D-tryptophan, D-tyrosine, and D-ornithine, and any amino acid derivatives thereof.
  • At least one unnatural amino acid is selected from D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-histidine, D-lysine, D-methionine, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-tryptophan, D-tyrosine, and D-ornithine, and any amino acid derivatives thereof.
  • At least one unnatural amino acid is selected from D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-histidine, D-lysine, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-tryptophan, and D-omithine, and any amino acid derivatives thereof.
  • L further comprises one or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • L further comprises two or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • L further comprises three or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • L further comprises four or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • L further comprises one or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • L further comprises two or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • L further comprises three or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • L further comprises four or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • L further comprises one or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • L further comprises two or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • L further comprises three or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • L further comprises four or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • n is selected from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
  • n is selected from 1, 2, 3, and 4.
  • n is selected from 3 and 4.
  • L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least one glutamic acid forms an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least two glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least three glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least four glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least one glutamic acid forms an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least two glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least three glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least four glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • L comprises a divalent radical of the formula (K-L) d , where K is a divalent D-glutamic acid radical, L is a divalent L-glutamic acid radical that forms an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical, and d is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • m is selected from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
  • m is selected from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6; and R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of the preceding clauses in combination with one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • a unit dose or unit dosage form composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses, optionally in combination with one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • compositions for treating cancer or inflammation in a host animal comprising comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses; or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses, optionally further comprising one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • a method for treating cancer or inflammation in a host animal comprising the step of administering to the host animal a composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses; or a pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses, optionally further comprising one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • cancer is a platinum resistant ovarian cancer, such as NCl/ADR-RES or NCl/ADR-RES related ovarian cancer.
  • cancer is a platinum resistant ovarian cancer, such as IGROVCDDP or IGROVCDDP related ovarian cancer.
  • cancer is a triple negative breast cancer, such as MDA-MB-231 or MDA-MB-231 related breast cancer.
  • the compounds described herein can be internalized into the targeted pathogenic cells by binding to the corresponding cell surface receptor.
  • vitamin receptors such as folate receptors
  • internalization can occur, for example, through receptor-mediated endocytosis.
  • the releasable linker included in the compounds described herein allows for the delivery of the drug cargo to the interior of the target cell, thus decreasing toxicity against non-target tissues because the releasable linker remains substantially or completely intact until the compounds described herein are delivered to the target cells.
  • the compounds described herein act intracellularly by delivering the drug to an intracellular biochemical process, a decrease the amount of unconjugated drug exposure to the host animal's healthy cells and tissues.
  • compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand exhibit greater specificity for the folate receptor compared to the corresponding compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid.
  • compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand show high activity for folate receptor expressing cells.
  • compounds described herein exhibit potent in vitro and in vivo activity against pathogenic cells, such as KB cells, including cisplatin resistant KB cells, NCUADR-RES-Cl 2 cells, IGROV1 cells, and MDA-MB-231 cells.
  • compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand do not show significant binding to folate receptor negative cells.
  • compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand enter cells preferentially or exclusively via the high affinity folate receptors, such as folate receptor alpha ( ⁇ ) and/or folate receptor beta ( ⁇ ).
  • compounds described herein generally do not substantially enter cells via passive transport, such as via the reduced folate carrier (RFC).
  • RFC reduced folate carrier
  • compounds described herein exhibit lower host animal toxicity compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid.
  • compounds described herein exhibit greater serum stability compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid.
  • compounds described herein are cleared rapidly compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid.
  • compounds described herein are cleared primarily via renal clearance compared to hepatic clearance.
  • the compounds described herein can be used for both human clinical medicine and veterinary applications.
  • the host animal harboring the population of pathogenic cells and treated with the compounds described herein can be human or, in the case of veterinary applications, can be a laboratory, agricultural, domestic, or wild animal.
  • the present invention can be applied to host animals including, but not limited to, humans, laboratory animals such rodents (e.g., mice, rats, hamsters, etc.), rabbits, monkeys, chimpanzees, domestic animals such as dogs, cats, and rabbits, agricultural animals such as cows, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, and wild animals in captivity such as bears, pandas, lions, tigers, leopards, elephants, zebras, giraffes, gorillas, dolphins, and whales.
  • rodents e.g., mice, rats, hamsters, etc.
  • rabbits, monkeys, chimpanzees domestic animals
  • domestic animals such as dogs, cats
  • rabbits agricultural animals
  • cows, horses, pigs, sheep, goats and wild animals in captivity
  • pathogenic cells means cancer cells, infectious agents such as bacteria and viruses, bacteria- or virus-infected cells, activated macrophages capable of causing a disease state, other pathogenic cells causing inflammation, any other type of pathogenic cells that uniquely express, preferentially express, or overexpress vitamin receptors or receptors that bind vitamins and/or vitamin receptor binding ligands, and any other type of pathogenic cells that uniquely express, preferentially express, or overexpress high affinity folate receptors or receptors that bind folates and/or folate receptor binding ligands.
  • Pathogenic cells can also include any cells causing a disease state for which treatment with the compounds described herein results in reduction of the symptoms of the disease.
  • the pathogenic cells can be host cells that are pathogenic under some circumstances such as cells of the immune system that are responsible for graft versus host disease, but not pathogenic under other circumstances.
  • the population of pathogenic cells can be a cancer cell population that is tumorigenic, including benign tumors and malignant tumors, or it can be non-tumorigenic.
  • the cancer cell population can arise spontaneously or by such processes as mutations present in the germline of the host animal or somatic mutations, or it can be chemically-, virally-, or radiation-induced.
  • the invention can be utilized to treat such cancers as carcinomas, sarcomas, lymphomas, Hodgekin's disease, melanomas, mesotheliomas, Burkitt's lymphoma, nasopharyngeal carcinomas, leukemias, and myelomas.
  • the cancer cell population can include, but is not limited to, oral, thyroid, endocrine, skin, gastric, esophageal, laryngeal, pancreatic, colon, bladder, bone, ovarian, cervical, uterine, breast, testicular, prostate, rectal, kidney, liver, and lung cancers.
  • arthritis including rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, glomerulonephritis, proliferative retinopathy, restenosis, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, fibromyalgia, psoriasis and other inflammations of the skin, osteomyelitis, Sjögren
  • the drug can be any molecule capable of modulating or otherwise modifying cell function, including pharmaceutically active compounds.
  • Illustrative drugs include, but are not limited to, peptides, oligopeptides, retro-inverso oligopeptides, proteins, protein analogs in which at least one non-peptide linkage replaces a peptide linkage, apoproteins, glycoproteins, enzymes, coenzymes, enzyme inhibitors, amino acids and their derivatives, receptors and other membrane proteins; antigens and antibodies thereto; haptens and antibodies thereto; hormones, lipids, phospholipids, liposomes; toxins; antibiotics; analgesics; bronchodilators; beta-blockers; antimicrobial agents; antihypertensive agents; cardiovascular agents including antiarrhythmics, cardiac glycosides, antianginals and vasodilators; central nervous system agents including stimulants, psychotropics, antimanics, and depressants; antiviral agents; antihistamines;
  • the drug can be one that is cytotoxic, enhances tumor permeability, inhibits tumor cell proliferation, promotes apoptosis, decreases anti-apoptotic activity in target cells, is used to treat diseases caused by infectious agents, enhances an endogenous immune response directed to the pathogenic cells, or is useful for treating a disease state caused by any type of pathogenic cell.
  • Additional illustrative drugs include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone, hydroxyurea, teniposide, mitomycins, discodermolides, microtubule inhibitors, epothilones, tubulysins, cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, seco-cyclopropy
  • rapamycins such as sirolimus or everolimus, penicillins, cephalosporins, vancomycin, erythromycin, clindamycin, rifampin, chloramphenicol, aminoglycoside antibiotics, gentamicin, amphotericin B, acyclovir, trifluridine, ganciclovir, zidovudine, amantadine, ribavirin, and any other antimicrobial compound.
  • rapamycins such as sirolimus or everolimus, penicillins, cephalosporins, vancomycin, erythromycin, clindamycin, rifampin, chloramphenicol, aminoglycoside antibiotics, gentamicin, amphotericin B, acyclovir, trifluridine, ganciclovir, zidovudine, amantadine, ribavirin, and any other antimicrobial compound.
  • the drug is selected from cryptophycins, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, tubulysins, aminopterin, rapamycins, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, everolimus, ⁇ -amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, epothilones, maytansines, and tyrosine kinase inhibitors, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing.
  • the compounds described herein include at least two drugs (D), which are illustratively selected from vinca alkaloids, cryptophycins, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, tubulysins, aminopterin, rapamycins, such as everolimus and sirolimus, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, ⁇ -amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, epothilones, maytansines, and tyrosine kinase inhibitors, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing.
  • the drugs (D) are the same. In another variation, the drugs (D) are different.
  • additional drugs include, but are not limited to, peptides, oligopeptides, retro-inverso oligopeptides, proteins, protein analogs in which at least one non-peptide linkage replaces a peptide linkage, apoproteins, glycoproteins, enzymes, coenzymes, enzyme inhibitors, amino acids and their derivatives, receptors and other membrane proteins, antigens and antibodies thereto, haptens and antibodies thereto, hormones, lipids, phospholipids, liposomes, toxins, antibiotics, analgesics, bronchodilators, beta-blockers, antimicrobial agents, antihypertensive agents, cardiovascular agents including antiarrhythmics, cardiac glycosides, antianginals, vasodilators, central nervous system agents including stimulants, psychotropics, antimanics, and depressants, antiviral agents, anti
  • At least one additional composition comprising a therapeutic factor can be administered to the host in combination or as an adjuvant to the above-detailed methodology, to enhance the drug delivery conjugate-mediated elimination of the population of pathogenic cells, or more than one additional therapeutic factor can be administered.
  • the therapeutic factor can be selected from a compound capable of stimulating an endogenous immune response, a chemotherapeutic agent, or another therapeutic factor capable of complementing the efficacy of the administered drug delivery conjugate.
  • the method of the invention can be performed by administering to the host, in addition to the above-described conjugates, compounds or compositions capable of stimulating an endogenous immune response (e.g.
  • a cytokine including, but not limited to, cytokines or immune cell growth factors such as interleukins 1-18, stem cell factor, basic FGF, EGF, G-CSF, GM-CSF, FLK-2 ligand, HILDA, MIP-1 ⁇ , TGF- ⁇ , TGF- ⁇ , M-CSF, IFN- ⁇ , IFN- ⁇ , IFN- ⁇ , soluble CD23, LIF, and combinations thereof.
  • cytokine including, but not limited to, cytokines or immune cell growth factors such as interleukins 1-18, stem cell factor, basic FGF, EGF, G-CSF, GM-CSF, FLK-2 ligand, HILDA, MIP-1 ⁇ , TGF- ⁇ , TGF- ⁇ , M-CSF, IFN- ⁇ , IFN- ⁇ , IFN- ⁇ , soluble CD23, LIF, and combinations thereof.
  • therapeutically effective combinations of these factors can be used.
  • therapeutically effective amounts of IL-2 for example, in amounts ranging from about 0.1 MIU/m 2 /dose/day to about 15 MIU/m 2 /dose/day in a multiple dose daily regimen
  • IFN- ⁇ for example, in amounts ranging from about 0.1 MIU/m 2 /dose/day to about 7.5 MIU/m 2 /dose/day in a multiple dose daily regimen
  • MIU million international units
  • m 2 approximate body surface area of an average human
  • IL-12 and IFN- ⁇ are used in the above-described therapeutically effective amounts for interleukins and interferons
  • IL-15 and IFN- ⁇ are used in the above described therapeutically effective amounts for interleukins and interferons.
  • IL-2, IFN- ⁇ or IFN- ⁇ , and GM-CSF are used in combination in the above described therapeutically effective amounts.
  • the invention also contemplates the use of any other effective combination of cytokines including combinations of other interleukins and interferons and colony stimulating factors.
  • Chemotherapeutic agents which are, for example, cytotoxic themselves or can work to enhance tumor permeability, are also suitable for use in the method of the invention in combination with the drug delivery conjugate compounds.
  • Such chemotherapeutic agents include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone, hydroxyurea, teniposide, mitomycins, discoder
  • linker includes is a chain of atoms that connects two or more functional parts of a molecule to form a conjugate.
  • the chain of atoms is selected from C, N, O, S, Si, and P, or C, N, O, S, and P, C, N, O, and S.
  • the chain of atoms covalently connects different functional capabilities of the conjugate, such as binding ligands, drugs, diagnostic agents, imaging agents, and the like.
  • the linker may have a wide variety of lengths, such as in the range from about 2 to about 100 atoms in the contiguous backbone.
  • the atoms used in forming the linker may be combined in all chemically relevant ways, such as chains of carbon atoms forming alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups, and the like; chains of carbon and oxygen atoms forming ethers, polyoxyalkylene groups, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming esters and carbonates, and the like; chains of carbon and nitrogen atoms forming amines, imines, polyamines, hydrazines, hydrazones, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming amides, ureas, semicarbazides, carbazides, and the like; chains of carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen atoms forming alkoxyamines, alkoxylamines, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming urethanes, amino acids, acyloxylamines, hydroxamic acids, and the like; and many others.
  • the atoms forming the chain in each of the foregoing illustrative embodiments may be either saturated or unsaturated, thus forming single, double, or triple bonds, such that for example, alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, imines, and the like may be radicals that are included in the linker.
  • the atoms forming the linker may also be cyclized upon each other or be part of cyclic structure to form divalent cyclic structures that form the linker, including cyclo alkanes, cyclic ethers, cyclic amines, and other heterocycles, arylenes, heteroarylenes, and the like in the linker.
  • the linker length may be defined by any pathway through the one or more cyclic structures.
  • the linker length is defined by the shortest pathway through the each one of the cyclic structures.
  • the linkers may be optionally substituted at any one or more of the open valences along the chain of atoms, such as optional substituents on any of the carbon, nitrogen, silicon, or phosphorus atoms.
  • the linker may connect the two or more functional parts of a molecule to form a conjugate at any open valence, and it is not necessary that any of the two or more functional parts of a molecule forming the conjugate are attached at any apparent end of the linker.
  • a folate-linker radical having the following formula
  • m, n, and q are integers that are independently selected from the range of 0 to about 8; AA is an amino acid, R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a nitrogen protecting group, and drugs are optionally attached at the (*) atoms.
  • AA is a naturally occurring amino acid of either the natural or unnatural configuration.
  • one or more of AA is a hydrophilic amino acid.
  • one or more of AA is Asp and/or Arg.
  • the integer n is 1 or greater.
  • the integer n is 2 or greater.
  • the integer n is 3 or greater.
  • the integer n is 4 or greater.
  • the integer n is 5 or greater.
  • the integer q is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer q is 1. In another aspect, the integer m is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer m is 1. In another aspect, R 1 is hydrogen.
  • the drugs and optionally additional linkers and additional receptor-binding ligands may be connected to the above formula at the free NH side chains of the 2, ⁇ -diaminoalkanoic acid fragments, or at the terminal carboxylate as indicated by the free valences therein. It is to be understood that every combination of the foregoing aspects is described herein as further illustrative embodiments of the invention. For example, in another embodiment, n is 1 or greater, and m is one or greater; or n is 1 or greater, m is 1, and q is 1; and so forth.
  • a folate-linker radical having the following formula
  • m, n, q, and p are integers that are independently selected from the range of 0 to about 8;
  • AA is an amino acid, R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a nitrogen protecting group, and drugs are optionally attached at the (*) atoms.
  • AA is as a naturally occurring amino acid of either the natural or unnatural configuration.
  • one or more of AA is a hydrophilic amino acid.
  • one or more of AA is Asp and/or Arg.
  • the integer n is 1 or greater.
  • the integer n is 2 or greater.
  • the integer n is 3 or greater.
  • the integer n is 4 or greater.
  • the integer n is 5 or greater. In another aspect, the integers q and/or p are 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer integers q and/or p are 1. In another aspect, the integer m is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer m is 1. In another aspect, R 1 is hydrogen.
  • the drugs and optionally additional linkers and additional receptor-binding ligands may be connected to the above formula at the free NH side chains of the 2, ⁇ -diaminoalkanoic acid fragments, at the cysteinyl thiol groups, or at the terminal carboxylate, as indicated by the free valences therein.
  • n is 1 or greater, and m is one or greater; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, and q is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, and p is 1; and so forth.
  • a folate-linker radical having the following formula
  • m, n, q, p, and r are integers that are independently selected from the range of 0 to about 8;
  • AA is an amino acid, R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a nitrogen protecting group, and drugs are optionally attached at the (*) atoms.
  • AA is as a naturally occurring amino acid of either the natural or unnatural configuration.
  • one or more of AA is a hydrophilic amino acid.
  • one or more of AA is Asp and/or Arg.
  • the integer n is 1 or greater.
  • the integer n is 2 or greater.
  • the integer n is 3 or greater.
  • the integer n is 4 or greater.
  • the integer n is 5 or greater. In another aspect, the integers q and/or p and/or r are 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integers q and/or p and/or r are 1. In another aspect, the integer m is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer m is 1. In another aspect, R 1 is hydrogen.
  • the drugs and optionally additional linkers and additional receptor-binding ligands may be connected to the above formula at the free NH side chains of the 2, ⁇ -diaminoalkanoic acid fragments, at the cyteinyl thiol groups, at the serinyl hydroxy groups, or at the terminal carboxylate, as indicated by the free valences therein.
  • n is 1 or greater, and m is one or greater; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, and q is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, and p is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, and r is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, p is 1, and r is 1; and so forth.
  • the polyvalent linker includes one or more divalent hydrophilic radicals, as described herein, also called linkers or spacer linkers. It is appreciated that the arrangement and/or orientation of the various hydrophilic linkers may be in a linear or branched fashion, or both.
  • the hydrophilic linkers may form the backbone of the linker forming the conjugate between the ligand and the one or more drugs.
  • the hydrophilic portion of the linker may be pendant to or attached to the backbone of the chain of atoms connecting the binding ligand B to the one or more drugs D. In this latter arrangement, the hydrophilic portion may be proximal or distal to the backbone chain of atoms.
  • the linker is more or less linear, and the hydrophilic groups are arranged largely in a series to form a chain-like linker in the conjugate. Said another way, the hydrophilic groups form some or all of the backbone of the linker in this linear embodiment.
  • the linker is branched with hydrophilic groups.
  • the hydrophilic groups may be proximal to the backbone or distal to the backbone.
  • the linker is more spherical or cylindrical in shape.
  • the linker is shaped like a bottle-brush.
  • the backbone of the linker is formed by a linear series of amides
  • the hydrophilic portion of the linker is formed by a parallel arrangement of branching side chains, such as by connecting monosaccharides, sulfonates, and the like, and derivatives and analogs thereof.
  • the linker may be neutral or ionizable under certain conditions, such as physiological conditions encountered in vivo.
  • the linker may deprotonate to form a negative ion, or alternatively become protonated to form a positive ion. It is appreciated that more than one deprotonation or protonation event may occur.
  • the same linker may deprotonate and protonate to form inner salts or zwitterionic compounds.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers are neutral, an in particular neutral under physiological conditions, the linkers do not significantly protonate nor deprotonate.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that the protonation capability is condition dependent. In one aspect, the conditions are physiological conditions, and the linker is protonated in vivo.
  • the spacers include both regions that are neutral and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. In another embodiment, the spacers include both regions that may be deprotonated to carry one or more negative charges and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that in this latter embodiment that zwitterions or inner salts may be formed.
  • the regions of the linkers that may be deprotonated to carry a negative charge include carboxylic acids, such as aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and longer chain carboxylic acid groups, and sulfuric acid esters, such as alkyl esters of sulfuric acid.
  • the regions of the linkers that may be protonated to carry a positive charge include amino groups, such as polyaminoalkylenes including ethylene diamines, propylene diamines, butylene diamines and the like, and/or heterocycles including pyrollidines, piperidines, piperazines, and other amino groups, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • the regions of the linkers that are neutral include poly hydroxyl groups, such as sugars, carbohydrates, saccharides, inositols, and the like, and/or polyether groups, such as polyoxyalkylene groups including polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene, and the like.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and have a carbon/oxygen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less.
  • the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of ether functional groups.
  • the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups.
  • Illustrative fragments and radicals that may be used to form such linkers include polyhydroxyl compounds such as carbohydrates, polyether compounds such as polyethylene glycol units, and acid groups such as carboxyl and alkyl sulfuric acids.
  • oligoamide spacers, and the like may also be included in the linker.
  • Illustrative divalent hydrophilic linkers include carbohydrates such as saccharopeptides as described herein that include both a peptide feature and sugar feature; glucuronides, which may be incorporated via [2+3] Huisgen cyclization, also known as click chemistry; ⁇ -alkyl glycosides, such as of 2-deoxyhexapyranoses (2-deoxyglucose, 2-deoxyglucuronide, and the like), and ⁇ -alkyl mannopyranosides.
  • Illustrative PEG groups include those of a specific length range from about 4 to about 20 PEG groups.
  • Illustrative alkyl sulfuric acid esters may also be introduced with click chemistry directly into the backbone.
  • Illustrative oligoamide spacers include EDTA and DTPA spacers, ⁇ -amino acids, and the like.
  • the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more polyethers, such as the linkers of the following formulae:
  • m is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 8; p is an integer selected 1 to about 10; and n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3.
  • m is independently in each instance 1 to about 3.
  • n is 1 in each instance.
  • p is independently in each instance about 4 to about 6.
  • the corresponding polypropylene polyethers corresponding to the foregoing are contemplated herein and may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • mixed polyethylene and polypropylene polyethers may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • cyclic variations of the foregoing polyether compounds such as those that include tetrahydrofuranyl, 1,3-dioxanes, 1,4-dioxanes, and the like are contemplated herein.
  • the polyvalent linker L comprises a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups, such as linkers that incorporate monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, polysaccharides, and the like. It is to be understood that the polyhydroxyl containing spacer linkers comprises a plurality of —(CROH)— groups, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 5, or from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 1.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 5, or from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 1.
  • the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following cyclic polyhydroxyl groups:
  • n is an integer from 2 to about 5
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer from 1 to about 4.
  • the integer n is 3 or 4.
  • the integer p is 3 or 4.
  • the integer r is 2 or 3.
  • n is equal to or less than r, such as when r is 2 or 3, n is 1 or 2, or 1, 2, or 3, respectively.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more polyhydroxyl radicals of the following formula:
  • the linker includes one or more polyhydroxyl compounds of the following formulae:
  • the section may be derived from ribose, xylose, glucose, mannose, galactose, or other sugar and retain the stereochemical arrangements of pendant hydroxyl and alkyl groups present on those molecules.
  • the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more polyhydroxyl groups that are spaced away from the backbone of the linker.
  • such carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups are connected to the back bone by a triazole group, forming triazole-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • the linker includes fragments of the following formulae:
  • n, m, and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5.
  • m is independently 2 or 3 in each instance.
  • r is 1 in each instance.
  • n is 1 in each instance.
  • the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different heteroaryl group, including but not limited to, pyrrole, pyrazole, 1,2,4-triazole, furan, oxazole, isoxazole, thienyl, thiazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, and the like.
  • divalent 6-membered ring heteroaryl groups are contemplated.
  • Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups connected to the back bone by an amide group, forming amide-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • linkers include fragments of the following formulae:
  • n is an integer selected from 1 to about 3, and m is an integer selected from 1 to about 22.
  • n is 1 or 2.
  • m is selected from about 6 to about 10, illustratively 8.
  • the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different functional group, including but not limited to, esters, ureas, carbamates, acylhydrazones, and the like.
  • cyclic variations are contemplated.
  • Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 2 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • n is an integer from 1 to about 6
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3.
  • the integer n is 3 or 4.
  • the integer p is 3 or 4.
  • the integer r is 1.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • n is an integer from 2 to about 6
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3.
  • the integer n is 3 or 4.
  • the integer p is 3 or 4.
  • the integer r is 1.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • n is an integer from 1 to about 6
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3.
  • the integer n is 3 or 4.
  • the integer p is 3 or 4.
  • the integer r is 1.
  • the polyvalent linker L comprises a combination of backbone and branching side motifs such as is illustrated by the following formulae
  • n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 0 to about 3.
  • the above formula are intended to represent 4, 5, 6, and even larger membered cyclic sugars.
  • the above formula may be modified to represent deoxy sugars, where one or more of the hydroxy groups present on the formulae are replaced by hydrogen, alkyl, or amino.
  • the corresponding carbonyl compounds are contemplated by the above formulae, where one or more of the hydroxyl groups is oxidized to the corresponding carbonyl.
  • the pyranose includes both carboxyl and amino functional groups and (a) can be inserted into the backbone and (b) can provide synthetic handles for branching side chains in variations of this embodiment. Any of the pendant hydroxyl groups may be used to attach other chemical fragments, including additional sugars to prepare the corresponding oligosaccharides.
  • Other variations of this embodiment are also contemplated, including inserting the pyranose or other sugar into the backbone at a single carbon, i.e. a spiro arrangement, at a geminal pair of carbons, and like arrangements.
  • one or two ends of the linker, or the drug D, or the binding ligand B may be connected to the sugar to be inserted into the backbone in a 1,1; 1,2; 1,3; 1,4; 2,3, or other arrangement.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen, and have a carbon/nitrogen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less. In one aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of amino functional groups.
  • polyvalent linker L comprises one or more amino groups of the following formulae:
  • n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance. In another aspect, the integer n is 1 in each instance.
  • the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more sulfuric acid esters, such as an alkyl ester of sulfuric acid.
  • the linker includes the following formula(e):
  • n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3.
  • n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises one or more of the following divalent radicals:
  • n is an integer from 2 to about 5
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer from 1 to about 4, as described above.
  • open positions such as (*) atoms are locations for attachment of the binding ligand (B) or any drug (D) to be delivered.
  • attachment of either or both of B and any D may be direct or through an intervening linker comprising one or more of the radicals described herein.
  • (*) atoms may form releasable linkers with any drug D, or other portion of the linker L.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises at least three carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more aspartic acids. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more glutamic acids.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, one or more glutamic acids, one or more aspartic acids, and one or more beta amino alanines.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • the polyvalent linker L includes a hydrophilic spacer linker comprising one or more divalent 1,4-piperazines that are included in the chain of atoms connecting at least one of the binding ligands (L) with at least one of the drugs (D).
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more aspartic acids.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more glutamic acids.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines. In another series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more oligoamide hydrophilic spacers, such as but not limited to aminoethylpiperazinylacetamide.
  • the polyvalent linker L includes a hydrophilic spacer linker comprising one or more triazole linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more amide linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more PEG groups and one or more cysteines.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more EDTE derivatives.
  • the polyvalent linker L includes a divalent radical of the formula
  • the polyvalent linker L includes a trivalent radical of the formula
  • *, **, *** each indicate points of attachment to the folate receptor binding moiety B, and the one or more drugs D. It is to be understood that when there are fewer drugs, *, **, *** are substituted with hydrogen or a heteroatom.
  • F and G are each independently 1, 2, 3 or 4; and W 1 is NH or O is described. In another aspect, ml is 0 or 1.
  • heteroatom linkers can also be included in the polyvalent linker L, such as —NR 1 R 2 —, oxygen, sulfur, and the formulae-(NHR 1 NHR 2 )—, —SO—, —(SO 2 )—, and —N(R 3 )O—, wherein R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and alkoxyalkyl.
  • heteroatom linkers may be used to covalently attach any of the radicals described herein, including drug radicals D to the polyvalent linker, ligand radicals B to the polyvalent linker, or various di and polyvalent radicals that from the polyvalent linker L.
  • the polyvalent linker L is a releasable linker.
  • releasable linker refers to a linker that includes at least one bond that can be broken under physiological conditions when the compounds described herein are delivered to or inside of the target cell. Accordingly, the term releasable linker does not generally refer simply to a bond that is labile in vivo, such as in serum, plasma, the gastrointestinal tract, or liver, unless those systems are the target for the cell surface receptor binding ligand.
  • releasable linkers may be cleaved by any process that includes at least one bond being broken in the linker or at the covalent attachment of the linker to B or any D under physiological conditions, such as by having one or more pH-labile, acid-labile, base-labile, oxidatively labile, metabolically labile, biochemically labile, and/or enzyme-labile bonds.
  • physiological conditions resulting in bond breaking do not necessarily include a biological or metabolic process, and instead may include a standard chemical reaction, such as a hydrolysis reaction, for example, at physiological pH, or as a result of compartmentalization into a cellular organelle such as an endosome having a lower pH than cytosolic pH.
  • a standard chemical reaction such as a hydrolysis reaction, for example, at physiological pH, or as a result of compartmentalization into a cellular organelle such as an endosome having a lower pH than cytosolic pH.
  • a cleavable bond can connect two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker, and/or connect other linkers with B, and/or any D, as described herein, at any ends of the releasable linker.
  • a cleavable bond connects two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker, following breakage of the bond, the releasable linker is broken into two or more fragments.
  • the releasable linker is separated from the other moiety.
  • Illustrative radicals that themselves include a cleavable bond, or form a cleavable bond with B and/or any D hemiacetals and sulfur variations thereof, acetals and sulfur variations thereof, hemiaminals, aminals, and the like, or which can be formed from methylene fragments substituted with at least one heteroatom, such as 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, and the like.
  • Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, haloalkylenecarbonyl, and the like.
  • Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, (diarylsilyl)aryl, and the like.
  • Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include oxycarbonyloxy, oxycarbonyloxyalkyl, sulfonyloxy, oxysulfonylalkyl, and the like.
  • Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, carbonylcycloalkylideniminyl, and the like.
  • Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include alkylenethio, alkylenearylthio, and carbonylalkylthio, and the like. Each of the foregoing fragments is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined herein.
  • the substituents X 2 can be alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R 4 -carbonyl, R 5 -carbonylalkyl, R 6 -acylamino, and R 7 -acylaminoalkyl, wherein R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides.
  • the heterocycles can be pyrrolidines, piperidines, oxazolidines, isoxazolidines, thiazolidines, isothiazolidines, pyrrolidinones, piperidinones, oxazolidinones, isoxazolidinones, thiazolidinones, isothiazolidinones, and succinimides.
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, and 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl to form an acetal or ketal, wherein each of the fragments is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined herein.
  • the methylene or alkylene is substituted with an optionally-substituted aryl.
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to sulfonylalkyl to form an alkylsulfonate.
  • the releasable linker may include nitrogen bonded to iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, and carbonylcycloalkylideniminyl to form an hydrazone, each of which is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined herein.
  • the hydrazone may be acylated with a carboxylic acid derivative, an orthoformate derivative, or a carbamoyl derivative to form releasable linkers containing various acylhydrazones.
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, and (diarylsilyl)aryl to form a silanol, each of which is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined herein.
  • the releasable linker may include nitrogen bonded to carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl to form an amide, or alternatively an amide with a drug nitrogen.
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl to form an ester, or alternatively an ester with drug oxygen.
  • the bivalent spacer linkers may be combined in any chemically relevant way, either directly or via an intervening heteroatom to construct the releasable linkers described herein. It is further understood that the nature of the arrangement of spacer and heteroatom linkers defines where the releasable linker will cleave in vivo. For example, two spacer linkers that terminate in a sulfur atom when combined form a disulfide, which is the cleavable bond in the releasable linker formed thereby.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxymethyloxy moiety, where the methyl is optionally substituted with alkyl or substituted aryl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms an acylaziridine with the drug.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 1-alkoxycycloalkylenoxy moiety.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an alkyleneaminocarbonyl(dicarboxylarylene)carboxylate.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a dithioalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with the drug.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms a hydrazone with the drug.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thioalkylsulfonylalkyl(disubstituted silyl)oxy, where the disubstituted silyl is substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a plurality of spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids and stereoisomers thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the drug.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the drug and the aryl is optionally substituted.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 4-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the drug, and the aryl is optionally substituted.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxyalkyloxyalkylidene, where the alkylidene forms an hydrazone with the drug, each alkyl is independently selected, and the oxyalkyloxy is optionally substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkyloxycarbonylhydrazide.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2- or 3-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the drug.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the drug, and the alkyl is ethyl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2- or 3-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the drug.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the drug.
  • the alkyl is ethyl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the drug.
  • the alkyl is ethyl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate or a carbamoylaziridine with the drug.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a 4-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate or a carbamoylaziridine with the drug.
  • polyvalent linkers described herein comprise divalent radicals of formulae (II)
  • n is an integer selected from 1 to about 4;
  • R a and R b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl, including lower alkyl such as C 1 -C 4 alkyl that are optionally branched; or R a and R b are taken together with the attached carbon atom to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other bivalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • polyvalent linkers described herein comprise divalent radicals of formulae (III)
  • R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other bivalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • polyvalent linkers described herein comprise divalent radicals of formulae (IV)
  • R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other divalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • the compounds described herein comprise one or more radicals selected from the formulae:
  • X is NH, O, or S.
  • polyvalent linkers herein described comprise a radical having the formula:
  • polyvalent linkers described herein comprise a radical of having the formula:
  • X is an heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur
  • n is an integer selected from 0, 1, 2, and 3
  • R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy, and the like, and the symbol (*) indicates points of attachment.
  • substituents may be present on the aryl ring, the benzyl carbon, the alkanoic acid, or the methylene bridge, including but not limited to hydroxy, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, and the like.
  • the polyvalent linkers described herein comprise radicals selected from carbonyl, thionocarbonyl, alkylene, cycloalkylene, alkylenecycloalkyl, alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, alkylenesulfoxyl, sulfonylalkyl, alkylenesulfoxylalkyl, alkylenesulfonylalkyl, carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl, 1-(carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl)succinimid-3-yl, and 1-(carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of said spacer linkers is optionally substituted with one or more substituents X
  • each substituent X 1 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R 4 -carbonyl, R 5 -carbonylalkyl, R 6 -acylamino, and R 7 -acylaminoalkyl, wherein R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an amino acid, an amino acid derivative, and a peptide, and wherein R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from the group
  • the compounds described herein may contain one or more chiral centers, or may otherwise be capable of existing as multiple stereoisomers. It is to be understood that in one embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular sterochemical requirement, except where specifically indicated, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be optically pure, or may be any of a variety of stereoisomeric mixtures, including racemic and other mixtures of enantiomers, other mixtures of diastereomers, and the like. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of stereoisomers may include a single stereochemical configuration at one or more chiral centers, while including mixtures of stereochemical configuration at one or more other chiral centers.
  • the compounds described herein may include geometric centers, such as cis, trans, E, and Z double bonds. It is to be understood that in another embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular geometric isomer requirement, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be pure, or may be any of a variety of geometric isomer mixtures. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of geometric isomers may include a single configuration at one or more double bonds, while including mixtures of geometry at one or more other double bonds.
  • cell surface receptor binding or targeting ligand generally refers to compounds that bind to and/or target receptors that are found on cell surfaces, and in particular those that are found on, over-expressed by, and/or preferentially expressed on the surface of pathogenic cells.
  • Illustrative ligands include, but are not limited to, vitamins and vitamin receptor binding compounds.
  • Illustrative vitamin moieties include carnitine, inositol, lipoic acid, pyridoxal, ascorbic acid, niacin, pantothenic acid, folic acid, riboflavin, thiamine, biotin, vitamin B 12 , and the lipid soluble vitamins A, D, E and K. These vitamins, and their receptor-binding analogs and derivatives, constitute the targeting entity from which a radical can be formed for covalent attachment to the polyvalent linker L.
  • Illustrative biotin analogs that bind to biotin receptors include, but are not limited to, biocytin, biotin sulfoxide, oxybiotin, and the like.
  • Illustrative folic acid analogs that bind to folate receptors include, but are not limited to folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, tetrahydrofolates, and their deaza and dideaza analogs.
  • the terms “deaza” and “dideaza” analogs refer to the art-recognized analogs having a carbon atom substituted for one or two nitrogen atoms in the naturally occurring folic acid structure, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the deaza analogs include the 1-deaza, 3-deaza, 5-deaza, 8-deaza, and 10-deaza analogs of folate, folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, and tetrahydrofolates.
  • the dideaza analogs include, for example, 1,5-dideaza, 5,10-dideaza, 8,10-dideaza, and 5,8-dideaza analogs of folate, folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, and tetrahydrofolates.
  • folates useful as complex forming ligands for this invention are the folate receptor-binding analogs aminopterin, amethopterin (also known as methotrexate), N 10 -methylfolate, 2-deamino-hydroxyfolate, deaza analogs such as 1-deazamethopterin or 3-deazamethopterin, and 3′,5′-dichloro-4-amino-4-deoxy-N 10 -methylpteroylglutamic acid (dichloromethotrexate).
  • folic acid analogs and/or derivatives are conventionally termed “folates,” reflecting their ability to bind with folate-receptors, and such ligands when conjugated with exogenous molecules are effective to enhance transmembrane transport, such as via folate-mediated endocytosis as described herein.
  • X and Y are each-independently selected from the group consisting of halo, R 2 , OR 2 , SR 3 , and NR 4 R 5 ;
  • U, V, and W represent divalent moieties each independently selected from the group consisting of —(R 6a )C ⁇ , —N ⁇ , —(R 6a )C(R 7a )—, and —N(R 4a )—;
  • Q is selected from the group consisting of C and CH;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of S, O, N, and —C ⁇ C—;
  • a 1 and A 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, —C(Z)—, —C(Z)O—, —OC(Z)—, —N(R 4b )—, —C(Z)N(R 4b )—, —N(R 4b )C(Z)—, —OC(Z)N(R 4b )—, —N(R 4b )C(Z)O—, —N(R 4b )C(Z)N(R 5b )—, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, —N(R 4a )S(O) 2 —, —C(R 6b )(R 7b )—, —N(CCH)—, —N(CH 2 C ⁇ CH)—, C 1 -C 12 alkylene, and C 1 -C12 alkyeneoxy, where Z is oxygen or sulfur;
  • R 1 is selected-from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, and C 1 -C 12 alkoxy;
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 4a , R 4b , R 5 , R 5b , R 6b , and R 7b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 1 -C 12 alkoxy, C 1 -C 12 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 12 alkenyl, C 1 -C 12 alkynyl, (C 1 -C 12 alkoxy)carbonyl, and (C 1 -C 12 alkylamino)carbonyl;
  • R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, and C 1 -C 12 alkoxy; or, R 6 and R 7 are taken together to form a carbonyl group;
  • R 6a and R 7a are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, and C 1 -C 12 alkoxy; or R 6a and R 7a are taken together to form a carbonyl group;
  • L is a divalent linker as described herein;
  • n, p, r, s and t are each independently either 0 or 1.
  • amino acid refers generally to beta, gamma, and longer amino acids, such as amino acids of the formula:
  • R is hydrogen, alkyl, acyl, or a suitable nitrogen protecting group
  • R′ and R′′ are hydrogen or a substituent, each of which is independently selected in each occurrence, and q is an integer such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
  • R′ and/or R′′ independently correspond to, but are not limited to, hydrogen or the side chains present on naturally occurring amino acids, such as methyl, benzyl, hydroxymethyl, thiomethyl, carboxyl, carboxylmethyl, guanidinopropyl, and the like, and derivatives and protected derivatives thereof.
  • the above described formula includes all stereoisomeric variations.
  • the amino acid may be selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, threonine, and the like.
  • amino acid derivative generally refers to an amino acid as defined herein where either, or both, the amino group and/or the side chain is substituted.
  • Illustrative amino acid derivatives include prodrugs and protecting groups of the amino group and/or the side chain, such as amine, amide, hydroxy, carboxylic acid, and thio prodrugs and protecting groups.
  • Additional Illustrative amino acid derivatives include substituted variations of the amino acid as described herein, such as, but not limited to, ethers and esters of hydroxy groups, amides, carbamates, and ureas of amino groups, esters, amides, and cyano derivatives of carboxylic acid groups, and the like.
  • Diagnostic agents useful in the present invention include compounds capable of labeling a cell or tissue with a contrast agent for the generation or modulation of signal intensity in biomedical imaging.
  • Such contrast agents may be used for imaging such cells and tissues using techniques such as Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), radio-imaging, radio-diagnosis, and the like.
  • MRI Magnetic Resonance Imaging
  • Such labeling of the cell or tissue is illustratively accomplished by incorporation of superparamagnetic, paramagnetic, ferrimagnetic, or ferromagnetic metals, radioactive gamma-emitting, positron-emitting or photon-emitting metals, radionuclides, other radioactive elements such as certain halogen isotopes (radiohalogens), and the like, in the agent.
  • the diagnostic agent may be a chelating agent capable of binding such metals described above, or a radio-pharmaceutical possessing an organic fragment, such as an aromatic ring, possessing a radiohalogen. Such chelating
  • Metals useful in the invention employing such chelating agents for MRI include certain ions of chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, copper, praseodymium, neodymium, samarium, gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, ytterbium, and the like, such as Cr(III), Mn(II), Fe(II), Fe(III), and Ni(II).
  • Metals useful in the invention employing such chelating agents for radio-imaging include certain isotopes of gallium, indium, copper, technetium, rhenium, and the like, such as 99m Tc, 51 Cr, 67 Ga, 68 Ga, 103 Ru, 211 Bi, 64 Cu and 111 In.
  • Radiobalogens useful in the invention employing radio-pharmaceuticals include certain isotopes of fluorine, iodine, astatine, and the like, such as 18 F, 123 I, and 131 I.
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • planar or SPECT imaging gamma cameras
  • scintillation and the like.
  • One embodiment of the invention is a ligand-therapeutic agent conjugate wherein the therapeutic agent targets pathogenic cells or tissues, such as tumors, bacteria, and the like.
  • therapeutic agents include chemotherapeutic agents, antimicrobial agents, or other cytotoxic agents associated with the targeting ligand. Such cytotoxic agents, may lead to the destruction of the pathogenic cell or tissue.
  • the therapeutic agent may be a radiotherapeutic agent.
  • These agents like the related diagnostic agents above, may possess a chelating functionality capable of sequestering a radionuclide, such as a radioactive metal or a radioactive alpha or beta-emitting metal suitable for nuclear medicine, or alternatively a suitable functionality bearing a radiohalogen, such as an aryl group.
  • the metal or halogen is used for radiotherapy rather than for radiodiagnosis.
  • Metals appropriate for such radiotherapeutic agents are known in the art, including certain isotopes of gadolinium, technetium, chromium, gallium, indium, ytterbium, lanthanum, yttrium, samarium, holmium, dysprosium, copper, ruthenium, rhenium, lead, bismuth, and the like, such as 157 Gd, 64 Cu, 67 Cu, 186 Re, 188 Re, 90 Y, 111 In, and 177 Lu.
  • Radiohalogens are also useful in the invention for radiotherapeutic agents, including certain isotopes of iodine, astatine, and the like, such as 125 I, 131 I, and 211 At.
  • the therapeutic may be a species suitable for neutron capture therapy, such as an organoborane moiety, comprising 10 B.
  • tubulysin and “tubulysins” refer generally to tetrapeptide compounds of the formula
  • n 1-3;
  • V is H, OR 2 , or halo
  • W is H, OR 2 , or alkyl, where R 2 is independently selected in each instance from H, alkyl, and C(O)R 3 , where R 3 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; providing that R 2 is not H when both V and W are OR 2 ; or V and W are taken together with the attached carbon to form a carbonyl;
  • X ⁇ H, C 1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or CH 2 QR 9 ; where Q is —O—, or —S—; R 9 ⁇ H, C 1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or C(O)R 10 ; and R 10 ⁇ C 1-6 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • Z is alkyl and Y is O; or Z is alkyl or C(O)R 4 , and Y is absent, where R 4 is alkyl, CF 3 , or aryl;
  • R 1 is H, or R 1 represents 1 to 3 substituents selected from halo, nitro, carboxylate or a derivative thereof, cyano, hydroxyl, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, and OR 6 , where R 6 is hydrogen or optionally substituted aryl, a phenol protecting group, a prodrug moiety, alkyl, arylalkyl, C(O)R 7 , P(O)(OR 8 ) 2 , or SO 3 R 8 , where R 7 and R 8 are independently selected in each instance from H, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or R 8 is a metal cation; and
  • R is OH or a leaving group, or R forms a carboxylic acid derivative, such as an acylhydrazide.
  • Z is methyl.
  • R 1 is H.
  • R 1 is OR 6 at C(4), where R 6 is H, alkyl, or COR 7 .
  • V is H, and W is OC(O)R 3 .
  • X ⁇ CH 2 QR 9 is alkyl or alkenyl.
  • R 9 is C(O)R 10 .
  • R 10 optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl.
  • R forms an acylhydrazide.
  • R 1 is H
  • R 1 is OR 6 at C(4)
  • R 6 is H
  • Z is methyl
  • R 1 is OR 6 at C(4)
  • R 6 is H
  • X ⁇ CH 2 OR 9 X ⁇ CH 2 OR 9
  • Natural tubulysins are generally linear tetrapeptides consisting of N-methyl pipecolic acid (Mep), isoleucine (Ile), an unnatural aminoacid called tubuvaline (Tuv), and either an unnatural aminoacid called tubutyrosine (Tut, an analog of tyrosine) or an unnatural aminoacid called tubuphenylalanine (Tup, an analog of phenylalanine).
  • Mep N-methyl pipecolic acid
  • Ile isoleucine
  • Tuv an unnatural aminoacid called tubuvaline
  • Tyrosine an unnatural aminoacid called tubuphenylalanine
  • Tubup an analog of phenylalanine
  • compounds are described herein where the conjugate is formed at the terminal carboxylic acid group or the terminal acylhydrazine group of each of the tybulysins described herein.
  • a rapamycin is understood to include sirolimus (rapamycin), temsirolimus, everolimus, and ridaforolimus, and related compounds, and compounds of the formula
  • Y A is OR C or OCH 2 CH 2 OR C ;
  • R A , R B , or R C is a bond connected to L;
  • R A , R B , and R C are independently selected in each case from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted heteroalkyl, prodrug forming group, and C(O)R D , where R D is in each instance independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, and alkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted is described.
  • alkyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched.
  • alkenyl and alkynyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond or triple bond, respectively. It is to be understood that alkynyl may also include one or more double bonds. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments, alkyl is advantageously of limited length, including C 1 -C 24 , C 1 -C 12 , C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 , and C 1 -C 4 .
  • alkenyl and/or alkynyl may each be advantageously of limited length, including C 2 -C 24 , C 2 -C 12 , C 2 -C 8 , C 2 -C 6 , and C 2 -C 4 .
  • alkenyl and/or alkynyl groups including C 2 -C 8 , C 2 -C 6 , and C 2 -C 4 may be referred to as lower alkenyl and/or alkynyl.
  • alkyl refers to alkyl as defined herein, and optionally lower alkyl.
  • alkenyl refers to alkenyl as defined herein, and optionally lower alkenyl.
  • alkynyl refers to alkynyl as defined herein, and optionally lower alkynyl.
  • Illustrative alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups are, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, 3-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, and the like, and the corresponding groups containing one or more double and/or triple bonds, or a combination thereof.
  • alkylene includes a divalent chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched.
  • alkenylene and alkynylene includes a divalent chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond or triple bond, respectively. It is to be understood that alkynylene may also include one or more double bonds. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments, alkylene is advantageously of limited length, including C 1 -C 24 , C 1 -C 12 , C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 , and C 1 -C 4 .
  • alkenylene and/or alkynylene may each be advantageously of limited length, including C 2 -C 24 , C 2 -C 12 , C 2 -C 8 , C 2 -C 6 , and C 2 -C 4 .
  • alkenylene and/or alkynylene groups including C 2 -C 8 , C 2 -C 6 , and C 2 -C 4 may be referred to as lower alkenylene and/or alkynylene.
  • alkylene, alkenylene, and/or alkynylene groups may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior.
  • alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene refers to alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene as defined herein, and optionally lower alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene.
  • Illustrative alkyl groups are, but not limited to, methylene, ethylene, n-propylene, isopropylene, n-butylene, isobutylene, sec-butylene, pentylene, 1,2-pentylene, 1,3-pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, and the like.
  • cycloalkyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain is cyclic. It is to be understood that cycloalkylalkyl is a subset of cycloalkyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic. Illustrative cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 2-methylcyclopropyl, cyclopentyleth-2-yl, adamantyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkenyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond, where at least a portion of the chain in cyclic. It is to be understood that the one or more double bonds may be in the cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl and/or the non-cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkenylalkyl and cycloalkylalkenyl are each subsets of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic.
  • Illustrative cycloalkenyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexylethen-2-yl, cycloheptenylpropenyl, and the like. It is to be further understood that chain forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl is advantageously of limited length, including C 3 -C 24 , C 3 -C 12 , C 3 -C 8 , C 3 -C 6 , and C 5 -C 6 . It is appreciated herein that shorter alkyl and/or alkenyl chains forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl, respectively, may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior.
  • heteroalkyl includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, and is optionally branched.
  • Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium.
  • cycloheteroalkyl including heterocyclyl and heterocycle, includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, such as heteroalkyl, and is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain is cyclic.
  • Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium.
  • Illustrative cycloheteroalkyl include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and the like.
  • aryl includes monocyclic and polycyclic aromatic carbocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Illustrative aromatic carbocyclic groups described herein include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, and the like.
  • heteroaryl includes aromatic heterocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Illustrative aromatic heterocyclic groups include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl, quinolinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, thienyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, and the like.
  • amino includes the group NH 2 , alkylamino, and dialkylamino, where the two alkyl groups in dialkylamino may be the same or different, i.e. alkylalkylamino.
  • amino includes methylamino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, methylethylamino, and the like.
  • amino modifies or is modified by another term, such as aminoalkyl, or acylamino the above variations of the term amino are included therein.
  • aminoalkyl includes H 2 N-alkyl, methylaminoalkyl, ethylaminoalkyl, dimethylaminoalkyl, methylethylaminoalkyl, and the like.
  • acylamino includes acylmethylamino, acylethylamino, and the like.
  • amino and derivatives thereof includes amino as described herein, and alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, heteroalkylamino, heteroalkenylamino, heteroalkynylamino, cycloalkylamino, cycloalkenylamino, cycloheteroalkylamino, cycloheteroalkenylamino, arylamino, arylalkylamino, arylalkenylamino, arylalkynylamino, heteroarylamino, heteroarylalkylamino, heteroarylalkenylamino, heteroarylalkynylamino, acylamino, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • amino derivative also includes urea, carbamate, and the like.
  • hydroxy and derivatives thereof includes OH, and alkyloxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, heteroalkyloxy, heteroalkenyloxy, heteroalkynyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, cycloalkenyloxy, cycloheteroalkyloxy, cycloheteroalkenyloxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, arylalkenyloxy, arylalkynyloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroarylalkyloxy, heteroarylalkenyloxy, heteroarylalkynyloxy, acyloxy, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • hydroxy derivative also includes carbamate, and the like.
  • thio and derivatives thereof includes SH, and alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, heteroalkylthio, heteroalkenylthio, heteroalkynylthio, cycloalkylthio, cycloalkenylthio, cycloheteroalkylthio, cycloheteroalkenylthio, arylthio, arylalkylthio, arylalkenylthio, arylalkynylthio, heteroarylthio, heteroarylalkylthio, heteroarylalkenylthio, heteroarylalkynylthio, acylthio, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • thio derivative also includes thiocarbamate, and the like.
  • acyl includes formyl, and alkylcarbonyl, alkenylcarbonyl, alkynylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroalkenylcarbonyl, heteroalkynylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, cycloalkenylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkenylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl, arylalkenylcarbonyl, arylalkynylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, heteroarylalkylcarbonyl, heteroarylalkenylcarbonyl, heteroarylalkynylcarbonyl, acylcarbonyl, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • carbonyl and derivatives thereof includes the group C(O), C(S), C(NH) and substituted amino derivatives thereof.
  • carboxylic acid and derivatives thereof includes the group CO 2 H and salts thereof, and esters and amides thereof, and CN.
  • optionally substituted includes the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the radical that is optionally substituted.
  • Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxyl, halo, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like.
  • any of amino, hydroxyl, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
  • the terms “optionally substituted aryl” and “optionally substituted heteroaryl” include the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the aryl or heteroaryl that is optionally substituted.
  • Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxy, halo, thio, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like.
  • any of amino, hydroxy, thio, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
  • Illustrative substituents include, but are not limited to, a radical —(CH 2 ) x Z X , where x is an integer from 0-6 and Z X is selected from halogen, hydroxy, alkanoyloxy, including C 1 -C 6 alkanoyloxy, optionally substituted aroyloxy, alkyl, including C 1 -C 6 alkyl, alkoxy, including C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, cycloalkyl, including C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, including C 3 -C 8 cycloalkoxy, alkenyl, including C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, alkynyl, including C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, haloalkyl, including C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, including C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, halocycloalkyl, including C 3 -C 8
  • the term “radical” with reference to, for example, the cell surface receptor binding and/or targeting ligand, and/or the independently selected drug refers to a cell surface receptor binding and/or targeting ligand, and/or an independently selected drug, as described herein, where one or more atoms or groups, such as a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group on a heteroatom, and the like, is removed to provide a radical for conjugation to the polyvalent linker L.
  • ligand radicals and drug radicals may also be referred herein as ligand analogs and drug analogs, respectively.
  • leaving group refers to a reactive functional group that generates an electrophilic site on the atom to which it is attached such that nucleophiles may be added to the electrophilic site on the atom.
  • Illustrative leaving groups include, but are not limited to, halogens, optionally substituted phenols, acyloxy groups, sulfonoxy groups, and the like. It is to be understood that such leaving groups may be on alkyl, acyl, and the like. Such leaving groups may also be referred to herein as activating groups, such as when the leaving group is present on acyl.
  • conventional peptide, amide, and ester coupling agents such as but not limited to PyBop, BOP-Cl, BOP, pentafluorophenol, isobutylchloroformate, and the like, form various intermediates that include a leaving group, as defined herein, on a carbonyl group.
  • n is an integer from 0 to 8
  • the individual and selectable values of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 such as n is 0, or n is 1, or n is 2, etc.
  • the recitation that n is an integer from 0 to 8 also describes each and every subrange, each of which may for the basis of a further embodiment, such as n is an integer from 1 to 8, from 1 to 7, from 1 to 6, from 2 to 8, from 2 to 7, from 1 to 3, from 2 to 4, etc.
  • composition generally refers to any product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combinations of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. It is to be understood that the compositions described herein may be prepared from isolated compounds described herein or from salts, solutions, hydrates, solvates, and other forms of the compounds described herein. It is appreciated that certain functional groups, such as the hydroxy, amino, and like groups form complexes and/or coordination compounds with water and/or various solvents, in the various physical forms of the compounds. It is also to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various amorphous, non-amorphous, partially crystalline, crystalline, and/or other morphological forms of the compounds described herein.
  • compositions may be prepared from various hydrates and/or solvates of the compounds described herein. Accordingly, such pharmaceutical compositions that recite compounds described herein are to be understood to include each of, or any combination of, the various morphological forms and/or solvate or hydrate forms of the compounds described herein. In addition, it is to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various co-crystals of the compounds described herein.
  • compositions may include one or more carriers, diluents, and/or excipients.
  • the compounds described herein, or compositions containing them may be formulated in a therapeutically effective amount in any conventional dosage forms appropriate for the methods described herein.
  • the compounds described herein, or compositions containing them, including such formulations may be administered by a wide variety of conventional routes for the methods described herein, and in a wide variety of dosage formats, utilizing known procedures (see generally, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, (21 st ed., 2005)).
  • therapeutically effective amount refers to that amount of active compound or pharmaceutical agent that elicits the biological or medicinal response in a tissue system, animal or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician, which includes alleviation of the symptoms of the disease or disorder being treated.
  • the therapeutically effective amount is that which may treat or alleviate the disease or symptoms of the disease at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
  • the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions described herein may be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment.
  • the specific therapeutically-effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, gender and diet of the patient: the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidentally with the specific compound employed; and like factors well known to the researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician of ordinary skill.
  • administering includes all means of introducing the compounds and compositions described herein to the patient, including, but are not limited to, oral (po), intravenous (iv), intramuscular (im), subcutaneous (sc), transdermal, inhalation, buccal, ocular, sublingual, vaginal, rectal, and the like.
  • the compounds and compositions described herein may be administered in unit dosage forms and/or formulations containing conventional nontoxic pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, adjuvants, and vehicles.
  • Illustrative formats for oral administration include tablets, capsules, elixirs, syrups, and the like.
  • Illustrative routes for parenteral administration include intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, epidurial, intraurethral, intrasternal, intramuscular and subcutaneous, as well as any other art recognized route of parenteral administration.
  • a wide range of permissible dosages are contemplated herein, including doses falling in the range from about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 1 g/kg.
  • the dosages may be single or divided, and may administered according to a wide variety of protocols, including q.d., b.i.d., t.i.d., or even every other day, once a week, once a month, once a quarter, and the like.
  • the therapeutically effective amounts described herein correspond to the instance of administration, or alternatively to the total daily, weekly, month, or quarterly dose, as determined by the dosing protocol.
  • prodrug generally refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates a biologically active compound as a result of one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a combination thereof.
  • the prodrug is typically acted upon by an enzyme (such as esterases, amidases, phosphatases, and the like), simple biological chemistry, or other process in vivo to liberate or regenerate the more pharmacologically active drug. This activation may occur through the action of an endogenous host enzyme or a non-endogenous enzyme that is administered to the host preceding, following, or during administration of the prodrug.
  • prodrug use is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,627,165; and Pathalk et al., Enzymic protecting group techniques in organic synthesis, Stereosel. Biocatal. 775-797 (2000). It is appreciated that the prodrug is advantageously converted to the original drug as soon as the goal, such as targeted delivery, safety, stability, and the like is achieved, followed by the subsequent rapid elimination of the released remains of the group forming the prodrug.
  • Prodrugs may be prepared from the compounds described herein by attaching groups that ultimately cleave in vivo to one or more functional groups present on the compound, such as —OH—, —SH, —CO 2 H, —NR 2 .
  • Illustrative prodrugs include but are not limited to carboxylate esters where the group is alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl as well as esters of hydroxyl, thiol and amines where the group attached is an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, phosphate or sulfate.
  • esters also referred to as active esters, include but are not limited to 1-indanyl, N-oxysuccinimide; acyloxyalkyl groups such as acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl, ⁇ -acetoxyethyl, ⁇ -pivaloyloxyethyl, 1-(cyclohexylcarbonyloxy)prop-1-yl, (1 -aminoethyl)carbonyloxymethyl, and the like; alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl groups, such as ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl, ⁇ -ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, ⁇ -ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, and the like; dialkylaminoalkyl groups, including di-lower alkylamino alkyl groups, such as dimethylaminomethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, diethylaminomethyl, diethylaminoethyl, and the like; 2-(alkyl groups such
  • Further illustrative prodrugs contain a chemical moiety, such as an amide or phosphorus group functioning to increase solubility and/or stability of the compounds described herein.
  • Further illustrative prodrugs for amino groups include, but are not limited to, (C 3 -C 20 )alkanoyl; halo-(C 3 -C 20 )alkanoyl; (C 3 -C 20 )alkenoyl; (C 4 -C 7 )cycloalkanoyl; (C 3 -C 6 )-cycloalkyl(C 2 -C 16 )alkanoyl; optionally substituted aroyl, such as unsubstituted aroyl or aroyl substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy, (C 1 -C 3 )alkyl and (C 1 -C 3 )alkoxy, each of which is
  • prodrugs themselves may not possess significant biological activity, but instead undergo one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a combination thereof after administration in vivo to produce the compound described herein that is biologically active or is a precursor of the biologically active compound.
  • the prodrug is biologically active.
  • prodrugs may often serves to improve drug efficacy or safety through improved oral bioavailability, pharmacodynamic half-life, and the like.
  • Prodrugs also refer to derivatives of the compounds described herein that include groups that simply mask undesirable drug properties or improve drug delivery.
  • one or more compounds described herein may exhibit an undesirable property that is advantageously blocked or minimized may become pharmacological, pharmaceutical, or pharmacokinetic barriers in clinical drug application, such as low oral drug absorption, lack of site specificity, chemical instability, toxicity, and poor patient acceptance (bad taste, odor, pain at injection site, and the like), and others. It is appreciated herein that a prodrug, or other strategy using reversible derivatives, can be useful in the optimization of the clinical application of a drug.
  • the compounds described herein may be prepared using the process and syntheses described herein, as well as using general organic synthetic methods. In particular, methods for preparing the compounds are described in U.S. patent application publication 2005/0002942, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • EXAMPLE General formation of folate-peptides.
  • the folate-containing peptidyl fragment Pte-Glu-(AA) n -NH(CHR 2 )CO 2 H (3) is prepared by a polymer-supported sequential approach using standard methods, such as the Fmoc-strategy on an acid-sensitive Fmoc-AA-Wang resin (1), as shown in the following Scheme:
  • R 1 is Fmoc
  • R 2 is the desired appropriately-protected amino acid side chain
  • DIPEA is diisopropylethylamine.
  • Standard coupling procedures such as PyBOP and others described herein or known in the art are used, where the coupling agent is illustratively applied as the activating reagent to ensure efficient coupling.
  • Fmoc protecting groups are removed after each coupling step under standard conditions, such as upon treatment with piperidine, tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF), and the like.
  • amino acid building blocks such as Fmoc-Glu-OtBu, Fmoc-D-Glu-OtBu, N 10 -TFA-Pte-OH, and the like, are used, as described in the Scheme, and represented in step (b) by Fmoc-AA-OH.
  • AA refers to any amino acid starting material, that is appropriately protected.
  • amino acid as used herein is intended to refer to any reagent having both an amine and a carboxylic acid functional group separated by one or more carbons, and includes the naturally occurring alpha and beta amino acids, as well as amino acid derivatives and analogs of these amino acids.
  • amino acids having side chains that are protected such as protected serine, threonine, cysteine, aspartate, and the like may also be used in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • gamma, delta, or longer homologous amino acids may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • amino acid analogs having homologous side chains, or alternate branching structures, such as norleucine, isovaline, ⁇ -methyl threonine, ⁇ -methyl cysteine, ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethyl cysteine, and the like, may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • step (a) & (b) The coupling sequence (steps (a) & (b)) involving Fmoc-AA-OH is performed “n” times to prepare solid-support peptide (2), where n is an integer and may equal 0 to about 100.
  • step (a) the remaining Fmoc group is removed (step (a)), and the peptide is sequentially coupled to a glutamate derivative (step (c)), deprotected, and coupled to TFA-protected pteroic acid (step (d)).
  • step (e) the peptide is cleaved from the polymeric support upon treatment with trifluoroacetic acid, ethanedithiol, and triisopropylsilane.
  • reaction conditions result in the simultaneous removal of the t-Bu, t-Boc, and Trt protecting groups that may form part of the appropriately-protected amino acid side chain.
  • the TFA protecting group is removed upon treatment with base (step (f)) to provide the folate-containing peptidyl fragment (3).
  • EXAMPLE Preparation of tubulysin hydrazides. Illustrated by preparing EC0347 (TubB-H).
  • N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA, 6.1 ⁇ L) and isobutyl chloroformate (3.0 ⁇ L) were added with via syringe in tandem into a solution of tubulysin B (0.15 mg) in anhydrous EtOAc (2.0 mL) at ⁇ 15° C. After stirring for 45 minutes at ⁇ 15° C. under argon, the reaction mixture was cooled down to ⁇ 20° C. and to which was added anhydrous hydrazine (5.0 ⁇ L). The reaction mixture was stirred under argon at ⁇ 20° C.
  • Tubulysin B pyridyldisulfide is prepared as described herein.
  • pyridinyl disulfide derivatives of certain naturally occurring tubulysins where R 1 is H or OH, and R 10 , is alkyl or alkenyl.
  • a binding ligand-linker intermediate containing a thiol group is taken in deionized water (ca. 20 mg/mL, bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the suspension was adjusted by saturated NaHCO 3 (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) to about 6.9 (the suspension may become a solution when the pH increased). Additional deionized water is added (ca. 20-25%) to the solution as needed, and to the aqueous solution is added immediately a solution of EC0312 in THF (ca.
  • reaction mixture becomes homogenous quickly. After stirring under argon, e.g. for 45 minutes, the reaction mixture is diluted with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, ca 150 volume percent) and the THF is removed by evacuation. The resulting suspension is filtered and the filtrate may be purified by preparative HPLC (as described herein). Fraction are lyophilized to isolate the conjugates.
  • the foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin conjugates by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1426 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1456 is prepared according to the following process.
  • N 10 -TFA Protected EC1454 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1454 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1004 is prepared according to the following process.
  • the organics are washed with a saturated solution of sodium chloride (brine), the aqueous layer is back extracted once with methylene chloride, and the combined organic layers are washed with brine.
  • the organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated on a rotary evaporator.
  • the residue is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF) and cooled to approximately ⁇ 45° C.
  • a solution of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (KHMDS) in toluene is added drop wise. With stirring, chloromethyl butyrate is added and the reaction is monitored. The reaction is quenched with methanol and then ethyl acetate and brine are added.
  • the aqueous layer is discarded and the organics are washed once with brine.
  • the organic layer is concentrated on a rotary evaporator and the oily residue is passed through a short plug of silica gel. The plug is washed with a 20% solution of ethyl acetate in petroleum ether. The combined organics are concentrated on a rotary evaporator until distillation ceases.
  • the crude EC1004 oil is analyzed by LC and NMR and stored in a freezer until use.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1005 is prepared according to the following process.
  • the celite is washed with ethyl acetate and the combined organics are washed three times with a 1% sodium bicarbonate/10% sodium chloride solution.
  • the organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated on a rotary evaporator.
  • the residue is dissolved in DCM and purified by silica gel chromatography using ethyl acetate and petroleum ether as eluents. Fractions are collected, checked for purity, combined and dried on a rotary evaporator.
  • the EC1005 oil is assayed by LC and stored in a freezer until use.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1008 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EC1005 is dissolved in 1,2-dichloroethane (DCE) and trimethyltin hydroxide is added.
  • DCE 1,2-dichloroethane
  • the reaction mixture is heated and reaction is monitored by LC. On completion, the mixture is cooled with an ice bath and filtered. The solids are then washed with DCE. The organic layer is washed once with water and dried over sodium sulfate. The solution is concentrated on a rotary evaporator and the residue dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF).
  • Triethylamine trihydrofluoride is added and the mixture stirred while monitoring with LC. Pyridine, dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP), and acetic anhydride are added. The reaction is stirred and monitored by LC.
  • the reaction mixture is concentrated to a residue and the product is purified by C18 column chromatography with acetonitrile and water as eluents. Product fractions are collected, concentrated, and
  • EXAMPLE. EC1426 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EC1422 is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF) and (Benzotriazol-1-yloxy)tripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBop) and diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) are added. Once all the solids have dissolved hydrazine is added and the reaction is stirred and monitored for completion. EC0607 is added and the mixture stirred and monitored for completion by LC. Ethyl acetate is added and the organics are washed once with saturated ammonium chloride, twice with saturated sodium bicarbonate, and once with saturated sodium chloride. The organics are dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated on a rotary evaporator.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
  • the crude EC1426 is purified by silica column chromatography with dichloromethane and methanol as eluents. Fractions are collected and the combined product fractions are concentrated on a rotary evaporator to yield a yellow solid.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1428 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EC1008 is dissolved in dichloromethane and pentafluorophenol dissolved in DCM along with N-cyclohexylcarbodiimide,N′-methyl polystyrene (DCC-resin) are added. The mixture is stirred and reaction completion is monitord by LC. The mixture is filtered to remove the resin and the organic layer is concentrated on a rotary evaporator to yield activated EC1008.
  • EC1426 is dissolved in dichloromethane and trifluoroacetic acid is added. The reaction mixture is stirred and monitored for completion by LC. The reaction mixture is concentrated on a rotary evaporator to yield deprotected EC1426.
  • the activated EC1008 is dissolved in DMF and diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) is added.
  • DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
  • the deprotected EC1426 is dissolved in DMF and added to the reaction mixture.
  • the reaction is stirred and monitored for completion by LC.
  • Ethyl acetate is added and the organics are washed three times with saturated aqueous sodium chloride.
  • the organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate and the volatiles removed by rotary evaporation.
  • the crude EC1428 is purified by silica column chromatography using dichloromethane and methanol as eluents. Fractions are collected, checked for purity, and the combined product fractions are concentrated by rotary evaporation to yield a yellow solid.
  • the EC1428 is stored in a freezer.
  • tubulsyins and tubulysin intermediates may be prepared according to the processes described in WO 2012/019123, WO 2009/055562, PCT
  • tubulysins are as follows:
  • 100a-c Compound 100a 100b 100c Tub B R allyl n-butyl n-pentyl IC50 1.2 0.7 0.8 1.2 on FR+ KB cell (nM)
  • EXAMPLE. EC1454 is prepared according to the following process.
  • the solid phase synthesis of N 10 -TFA protected EC1454 starts with resin bound trityl protected D-cysteine.
  • the resin is suspended in dimethylformamide (DMF) and washed twice with DMF.
  • EC0475 glucamine modified L-glutamic acid
  • PyBOP Benzotriazol-1-yloxy
  • DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
  • a Kaiser test is performed to ensure the coupling is complete.
  • the resin is washed three times with DMF, three times with IPA, and three times with DMF.
  • the resin is slowly washed three times with piperidine in DMF, three times with DMF, and three times with IPA. A Kaiser test is performed to confirm deprotection.
  • the resin is washed three times with DMF and the next amino acid in the sequence is coupled following the same process.
  • Monomers are coupled in the following order: 1) EC0475, 2) Fmoc-D-Glu(OtBu)-OH, 3) EC0475, 4) Fmoc-D-Glu(OtBu)-OH, 5) EC0475, 6) Fmoc-D-Glu-OtBu, and 7) N 10 -TFA-Pte-OH.
  • the resin is washed three times with methanol and dried by passing argon through the resin at room temperature.
  • the dried resin is suspended in a mixture of TFA, water, ethanedithiol, and triisopropylsilane. After 1 hour the resin is removed by filtration and washed with TFA.
  • the product is precipitated by addition to cold ethyl ether, filtered, and washed with ether. The solids are dried under vacuum at room temperature and stored in a freezer.
  • N 10 -TFA EC1454 is dissolved in argon sparged water.
  • Sodium carbonate (1M in water, argon sparged) is added to achieve a pH of 9.4-10.1.
  • the reaction mixture is stirred for at least 20 minutes. Once the reaction is complete as determined by LC, it is quenched by adjusting the pH to 1.9-2.3 with 2M HCl.
  • the product is purified by C18 column chromatography using acetonitrile and pH 5 ammonium acetate buffer as eluents. Fractions are collected and checked for purity by HPLC. The combined product fractions are concentrated on a rotary evaporator and then lyophilized to yield EC1454 as a yellow solid.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1456 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EC1428 is dissolved in acetonitrile and a solution of EC1454 in pH 7.4 Sodium phosphate buffer is added. The solutions are sparged with argon before and after addition. The reaction mixture is stirred for at least 15 minutes and then checked for completion. The desired product is purified by C18 column chromatography using acetonitrile and pH 7.4 phosphate buffer as eluents. The product fractions are collected, checked for purity, combined and concentrated by ultra-filtration to yield an aqueous solution that is 10-20 mg/mL EC1456. The final product solution is sampled for assay and then stored in a freezer.
  • the positive electrospray mass spectrum of EC1456 was obtained on a high resolution Waters Acquity UPLC Xevo Gs-S QTOF mass spectrometer. The spectrum was obtained following separation of the major component on a UPLC inlet system, the resolving power was approximately 35,000. The accurate mass measurement of the M+H monoisotopic peak was 2625.0598, which is 1.1 ppm error difference from the theoretical value of 2625.0570 for an ion of formula C 110 H 166 N 23 O 45 S 3 . The isotopic distribution is also consistent with that formula.
  • the 1 H peaks in the spectrum that are not listed in the table include a broad HOD peak at 3.75 ppm, and a DMSO peak at 2.50 ppm.
  • the HOD peak does not obscure any resonances, but elevates the integrations for nearby resonances at 4.2 and 3.4-3.7 ppm due to the broad baseline rise.
  • the DMSO peak obscures the resonance for H129, which is not integrated for this reason.
  • the 13 C peaks in spectrum not listed in the table include the very large DMSO solvent at 39.50 ppm. The DMSO peak obscures both the signals from C91 and C93.
  • the C116 peak is not observable in the 13 C spectrum due to extensive broadening due to conformational changes around the nearby amide group. All three chemical shifts (C91, C93, C116) are visible in and measured in the proton detected 2D correlation spectra.
  • the IR spectrum of EC1456 was acquired on a Nexus 6700® Fourier transform infrared (FT-IR) spectrophotometer (Thermo Nicolet) equipped with an Ever-Glo mid/far IR source, an extended range potassium bromide (KBr) beam splitter, and a deuterated triglycine sulfate (DTGS) detector.
  • An attenuated total reflectance (ATR) accessory (ThunderdomeTM, Thermo Spectra-Tech), with a germanium (Ge) crystal was used for data acquisition.
  • the spectrum represents 256 co-added scans collected at a spectral resolution of 4 cm-1.
  • a background data set was acquired with a clean Ge crystal.
  • the ultraviolet spectrum EC1456 acquired on a Perkin-Elmer Lambda 25 UV/Vis spectrometer. The spectrum was recorded at 40.7 uM in 0.1M NaOH solvent on a 1 cm path-length cell at 25 deg. C.
  • the local maxima at 366 nm, 288 nm and 243 nm are due primarily to the Pteroic acid, benzamide/phenol and thiazole-amide substructures, respectively, although the molecule contains dozens of chromaphores with overlapping absorption in the UV region.
  • N 10 -TFA Protected EC1579 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1579 is prepared according to the following process.
  • EXAMPLE. EC0948 is made by the processes described herein.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1669 is prepared according to the processes described herein from EC1579 and EC0469 as follows:
  • EC1454 (5.5 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20mM phosphate pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1662 (3.6 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1664 (4.6 mg, 54%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) Predicted 1313.05, Found 1313.37.
  • EC1454 (16.1 mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM phosphate pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1661 (8.7 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1663 (15.8 mg, 76%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) Predicted 1306.04, Found 1306.82.
  • the thiophilic agent in organic solvent (MeOH, ACN, THF or DMSO) is then added.
  • the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature with argon purging.
  • EC1579 200 mg, 1.0 eq was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (4.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of crude EC0469 (80 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1669 (132 mg, 49%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 0-30% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) Predicted 1118.39, Found 1119.52. Partial 1 H NMR (DMSO w/10% D 2 O) d(ppm) 8.67 (s), 8.59 (2), 7.61 (d), 7.56 (d), 6.71 (d), 6.61 (d), 3.34-3.39 (m).
  • EC1579 (15 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC0564 (10.5 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1665 (13.4 mg, 55%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/10 mM NH 4 OAc pH5 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) Predicted 1368.09, Found 1368.30
  • EC1454 (21.1 mg, 1.3 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1716 (10.8 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1751 (8.5 mg, 33%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) Predicted 1320.05, Found 1320.72.
  • EC1454 (31.1 mg, 1.3 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1715 (15.3 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1750 (18.0 mg, 97%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) Predicted 1299.03, Found 1299.19.
  • EC1454 (8.5 mg, 1.5 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1717 (3.8 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1739 (5.3 mg, 59%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) predicted 1327.06, Found 1327.73
  • EC1454 (5.5 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1662 (3.6 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1664 (4.6 mg, 54%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized.
  • EC1454 (16.1 mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1661 (8.7 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1663 (15.8 mg, 76%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H] 2+ ) Predicted 1306.04, Found 1306.82
  • EC1454 (8.3 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC0564 (5.8 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1653 (6.3 mg, 46%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/10 mM NH 4 OAc pH5 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, ((M ⁇ 2)/2)) Predicted 1368.09, Found 1368.74
  • EC1454 (324 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO 4 pH7 buffer (4.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of crude EC0469 (142 mg, 1.1 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1496 (221 mg, 51%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 0-30% acetonitrile/50 mM NH 4 HCO 3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, ((M+2)/2)) Predicted 1118.39, Found 1119.02
  • FR-positive KB cells are heavily seeded into 24-well cell culture plates and allowed to adhere to the plastic for 18 h. Spent incubation media is replaced in designated wells with folate-free RPMI (FFRPMI) supplemented with 100 nM 3 H-folic acid in the absence and presence of increasing concentrations of test article or folic acid. Cells are incubated for 60 min at 37° C.
  • FFRPMI folate-free RPMI
  • Negative control tubes contain only the 3 H-folic acid in FFRPMI (no competitor). Positive control tubes contain a final concentration of 1 mM folic acid, and CPMs measured in these samples (representing non-specific binding of label) are subtracted from all samples. Relative affinities are defined as the inverse molar ratio of compound required to displace 50% of 3 H-folic acid bound to the FR on KB cells, where the relative affinity of folic acid for the FR is set to 1.
  • EC1669 shows high binding affinities towards folate receptors as determined by an in vitro competitive binding assay that measures the ability of the ligand to compete against 3 H-folic acid for binding to cell surface folate receptors (FR).
  • EC1669 ().
  • the relative affinity values of EC1669 (normalized against folic acid, which is set to (1) are determined to be 0.53 and 0.13 on KB and CHO-FR ⁇ cells, respectively (see, FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B ).
  • methotrexate (MTX) showed poor binding to the cell surface FRs.
  • MTX methotrexate
  • the compounds described herein are evaluated using an in vitro cytotoxicity assay that predicts the ability of the drug to inhibit the growth of folate receptor-positive cells, such as KB cells, RAW264.7 macrophages, and the like. It is to be understood that the choice of cell type can made on the basis of the susceptibility of those selected cells to the drug that forms the conjugate.
  • the test compounds are comprised of folate linked to a respective chemotherapeutic drug, as prepared according to the processes described herein.
  • the test cells are exposed to varying concentrations of folate-drug conjugate, and also in the absence or presence of at least a 100-fold excess of folic acid to assess activity as being specific to folate receptor mediation.
  • EXAMPLE Conjugates of cytotoxic drugs described herein are active against KB cells. The activity is mediated by the folate receptor as indicated by competition experiments using co-administered folic acid. KB cells are exposed for up to 7 h at 37° C. to the indicated concentrations of folate-drug conjugate in the absence or presence of at least a 100-fold excess of folic acid. The cells are then rinsed once with fresh culture medium and incubated in fresh culture medium for 72 hours at 37° C. Cell viability was assessed using a 3 H-thymidine incorporation assay.
  • cytotoxicity is generally measurable, and in most cases, the IC 50 values (concentration of drug conjugate required to reduce 3 H-thymidine incorporation into newly synthesized DNA by 50%) are in the low nanomolar range.
  • IC 50 values concentration of drug conjugate required to reduce 3 H-thymidine incorporation into newly synthesized DNA by 50%
  • EXAMPLE shows a potent cytostatic effect against murine RAW264.7 macrophages.
  • the anti-proliferative activity of EC1669 is measured in a XTT cell viability assay ( FIG. 2 ) on RAW264.7 cells after a 2-h exposure and a total of 72 h incubation.
  • RAW264.7 macrophages are susceptible to the drug forming the EC1669 conjugate, aminopterin.
  • the cell viability is assessed by adding XTT (2,3-bis(2-methoxy-4-nitro-5-sulfo-phenyl)-2H-tetrazolium-5-carboxanilide) following the manufacturer's instructions.
  • EC1669 showed a dose-dependent inhibition of cell proliferation with a relative IC 50 value of ⁇ 1.2 nM.
  • the observed anti-proliferative effect was 100% competable in the presence of 100-fold excess folic acid (FA), indicating a FR-specific mode of action for EC1669.
  • each well receives 1 mL of medium containing increasing concentrations of test compound (4 wells per sample) in the presence or absence of 100 ⁇ M free folic acid as indicated.
  • Treated cells are pulsed for 2 h at 37° C., rinsed 4 times with 0.5 mL of media, and then chased in 1 mL of fresh medium up to 70 h. Spent medium is aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh medium containing 5 ⁇ Ci/mL 3 H-thymidine.
  • EXAMPLE Compounds described herein exhibit potent in vitro activity against pathogenic cells, such as KB cells. Compounds described herein exhibit greater specificity for the folate receptor compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid.
  • EXAMPLE Selectivity for folate receptor expressing cells.
  • Compounds described herein show high activity for folate receptor expressing cells.
  • Compounds described herein do not show significant binding to folate receptor negative cells.
  • EC1456 show high competable binding to low and high FR expressing cells (FR+), and does not show binding to cells that do not express FR (FR ⁇ ).
  • mice Four to seven week-old mice (Balb/c or nu/nu strains) are purchased from Harlan Sprague Dawley, Inc. (Indianapolis, Ind.). Normal rodent chow contains a high concentration of folic acid (6 mg/kg chow); accordingly, test animals are maintained on a folate-free diet (Harlan diet # TD00434) for about 1 week before tumor implantation to achieve serum folate concentrations close to the range of normal human serum, and during the Method.
  • a folate-free diet Harlan diet # TD00434
  • M109 cells a syngeneic lung carcinoma
  • Log cell kill (LCK) and treated over control (T/C) values are then calculated according to published procedures (see, e.g., Lee et al., “BMS-247550: a novel epothilone analog with a mode of action similar to paclitaxel but possessing superior antitumor efficacy” Clin Cancer Res 7:1429-1437 (2001); Rose, “Taxol-based combination chemotherapy and other in vivo preclinical antitumor studies” J Natl Cancer Inst Monogr 47-53 (1993)).
  • Dosing is initiated when the s.c. tumors have an average volume between 50-100 mm 3 (t 0 ), typically 8 days post tumor inoculation (PTI) for KB tumors, and 11 days PTI for M109 tumors.
  • Test animals (5/group) are injected i.v., generally three times a week (TIW), for 3 weeks with varying doses, such as with 1 ⁇ mol/kg to 5 ⁇ mol/kg, of the drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control), unless otherwise indicated.
  • Dosing solutions are prepared fresh each day in PBS and administered through the lateral tail vein of the mice.
  • mice Female Balb/c strain
  • Harlan, Inc. Female Balb/c strain
  • Harlan's folate-free chow for a total of three weeks prior to the onset of and during the method.
  • Folate receptor-negative 4T-1 tumor cells (1 ⁇ 10 6 cells per animal) are inoculated in the subcutis of the right axilla. Approximately 5 days post tumor inoculation when the 4T-1 tumor average volume is ⁇ 100 mm 3 (t 0 ), mice (5/group) are injected i.v.
  • METHOD Drug Toxicity. Persistent drug toxicity is assessed by collecting blood via cardiac puncture and submitting the serum for independent analysis of blood urea nitrogen (BUN), creatinine, total protein, AST-SGOT, ALT-SGPT plus a standard hematological cell panel at Ani-Lytics, Inc. (Gaithersburg, Md.). In addition, histopathologic evaluation of formalin-fixed heart, lungs, liver, spleen, kidney, intestine, skeletal muscle and bone (tibia/fibula) is conducted by board-certified pathologists at Animal Reference Pathology Laboratories (ARUP; Salt Lake City, Utah).
  • BUN blood urea nitrogen
  • ARUP Animal Reference Pathology Laboratories
  • METHOD Toxicity as Measured by Weight Loss. The percentage weight change of the test animals is determined on selected days post-tumor inoculation (PTI), and during dosing. The results are graphed.
  • EXAMPLE In vivo activity against tumors. Compounds described herein show high potency and efficacy against KB tumors in nu/nu mice. Compounds described herein show specific activity against folate receptor expressing tumors, with low host animal toxicity.
  • EC1456 shows a complete response in 4/4 test animals when administered intravenously at 1 ⁇ mol/kg TIW, 2 wk.
  • EC1456 also shows specific activity mediated by the folate receptor as evidenced by being competable with excess comparator compound EC0923 (50 or 100 ⁇ mol/kg), as shown in FIG. 3A .
  • EC1456 does not show any evidence of whole animal toxicity, as shown in FIG. 3B .
  • EXAMPLE The therapeutic performance of EC1663 was evaluated against the human KB tumors.
  • the data in FIG. 4A show 4/4 partial responses where the tumor volume was significantly decreased compared to control, but did not go to zero, and the tumor began to regrow after dosing ended. It is believed herein that a higher dose may result in a complete response and/or cure.
  • the data in FIG. 4B show that at the administered efficacious dose, whole animal toxicity was not observed.
  • TNBC Tumor Assay Triple negative breast cancer (TNBC) is a subtype characterized by lack of gene expression for estrogen, progesterone and Her2/neu. TNBC is difficult to treat, and the resulting death rate in patients is reportedly disproportionately higher than for any other subtype of breast cancer.
  • a TNBC xenograft model was generated in an analogous way to the KB and M109 models described herein by implanting MDA-MB-231 breast cancer cells in nu/nu mice. Dosing is initiated when the s.c. tumors have an average volume between 110-150 (generally 130) mm 3 (t 0 ), typically 17 days post tumor inoculation (PTI).
  • Test animals (5/group) are injected i.v., generally three times a week (TIW), for 2-3 weeks with varying doses, such as with 1 ⁇ mol/kg to 5 ⁇ mol/kg, of the drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control), unless otherwise indicated.
  • Dosing solutions are prepared fresh each day in PBS and administered through the lateral tail vein of the mice.
  • EXAMPLE When tested against an established triple negative FR-positive subcutaneous MDA-MB-231 breast cancer xenografts, EC1456 is found to be highly active at 2 ⁇ mol/kg intravenous dose administered on a three times per week, 2 consecutive week schedule. The treatment produced 4 of 5 complete responses, where tumor volume was reduced to zero, and regrowth did not occur during the observation window over nearly 135 days. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the test animals were cured of the triple negative breast cancer. The results for EC1456 are shown in FIG. 5A . The anti-tumor activity was not accompanied by significant weight loss in the test animals, as shown in FIG. 5B .
  • a human cisplatin-resistant cell line is created by culturing FR-positive KB cells in the presence of increasing cisplatin concentrations (100 ⁇ 2000 nM; over a >12 month period).
  • the cisplatin-resistant cells labeled as KB-CR2000 cells, are found to be tumorigenic, and are found to retain their FR expression status in vivo.
  • KB-CR2000 tumors are confirmed to be resistant to cisplatin therapy.
  • Treatment with a high, toxic dose of cisplatin (average weight loss of 10.3%, as shown in FIG. 6B ), did not produce even a single partial response (PR), as shown in FIG. 6A .
  • EC1456 is found to be very active against KB-CR tumors, where 5/5 CRs are observed. In addition, regrowth of the tumor was only observed in 1/5 test animals. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that 4/5 test animals were cured of the cisplatin-resistant cancer, where regrowth did not occur during the nearly 70 day observation period. Furthermore, unlike cisplatin, EC1456 did not cause any weight loss in this cohort of mice, and therefore did not display any evidence of gross animal toxicity during the dosing period.
  • EXAMPLE Comparison of conjugated and unconjugated drugs.
  • the therapeutic performance of unconjugated tubulysin B and unconjugated TubB-H (EC0347) drugs is evaluated in vivo against human KB tumors in mice.
  • the anti-tumor efficacy and gross toxicity, as determined by body weight changes, of each unconjugated drug are compared to the EC1456 conjugate.
  • EC1456 produced dose responsive anti-tumor activity in this model. Complete responses were observed under treatment conditions that produced little to no weight loss.
  • both unconjugated tubulysin-based drugs failed to yield any anti-tumor response, even when very toxic doses were administered to the mice. The results are shown in the following table.
  • tubulysin B and TubBH being highly cytotoxic to cells in culture (typical IC 50 ⁇ 1 nM)
  • both agents yielded dose-limiting toxicities in mice at levels that did not produce measurable anti-tumor effect.
  • the unconjugated compounds do not exhibit a therapeutic window.
  • conjugated forms of the drugs such as conjugated TubBH (EC1456) produce anti-tumor responses without significant toxicity to mice bearing well-established human tumor xenografts. Conjugation as described herein provides a therapeutic window to highly toxic drugs.
  • AIA Adjuvant-Induced Arthritis
  • Female Lewis rats are fed a folate-deficient diet (Harlan Teklad, Indianapolis, Ind.) for 9-10 days prior to arthritis induction.
  • the adjuvant-induced arthritis (AIA) is induced by intradermal inoculation (at the base of tail) of 0.4-0.5 mg of heat-killed Mycobacteria butyricum (BD Diagnostic Systems, Sparks, Md.) in 100 ⁇ L light mineral oil (Sigma).
  • a total score for each rat is calculated by summarizing the scores for each of the four paws, giving a maximum score of 16 for each rat.
  • EXAMPLE Compounds described herein are potent in treating inflammatory diseases, such as inflammation and bone damage accompanying arthritis.
  • EC1496 is potent and efficacious in the reducing paw inflammation in a rat model of adjuvant-induced arthritis, as shown in FIG. 7 .
  • FIG. 7 shows that EC1496 is efficacious in preventing the development of arthritis based on the evaluation of paw edema.
  • EC1496 (trace (d)) is significantly different from untreated control (trace (b)).
  • the data indicate that the effect is folate receptor mediated because EC1496 (trace (d)) is also significantly different from the competition control group where EC1496 is co-administered with excess folic acid (trace (d)).
  • EXAMPLE Compounds described herein are potent in treating inflammatory diseases, such as inflammation and bone damage accompanying arthritis.
  • EC1496 is potent and efficacious in reducing and/or preventing bone damage in a rat model of adjuvant-induced arthritis, as determined by radiographic analysis. The radiography shows that the treated animals do not exhibit the bone damage seen in the untreated control animals, based on visual scoring. Instead, the treated animals and the healthy animals show similar bone structure.
  • the animals in the EC1669 plus EC0923 group are given twice-a-week subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 375 nmol/kg in conjunction to EC0923 at a dosage of 187.5 ⁇ mol/kg.
  • the study endpoints are shown in FIG. 8A , FIG. 8B , FIG. 9A , and FIG. 9B are: (a) arthritis score; (b) change in body weight; and (c) paw swelling, assessed by percent increase in paw weight (collected 4 days after the last dose), and (d) bone radiography.
  • EC1669 is found to be highly effective in alleviating paw swelling (by ⁇ 80% compared to control) and bone damage (by ⁇ 80% compared to control).
  • the anti-arthritic activity of EC1669 is competable (blocked) with the folate competitor (EC0923).
  • EXAMPLE In a subsequent dosing study, various EC1669 dosing regiments were evaluated including once-a-week at 1000 nmol/kg, twice-a-week at 250 nmol/kg, and twice-a-week at 500 nmol/kg. Surprisingly, twice-a-week dosing at 250 nmol/kg was superior to once-a-week dosing at 1000 nmol/kg, a two-fold decrease in total dose. EC1669 was found more efficacious when dosed biweekly than once weekly in reducing paw swelling at 81% reduction at 500 nmol/kg, biw, and 64% reduction at 250 nmol/kg, biw, compared to a 44% reduction at 1000 nmol/kg, siw.
  • EXAMPLE EXAMPLE.
  • EC1669 plus CellCept is more effective than either agent alone against adjuvant-induced arthritis.
  • CellCept is a prodrug of mycophenolic acid, an immunosuppressant drug used to prevent organ rejection in transplantation.
  • CellCept is activated in vivo and releases its active product that can inhibit T cell proliferation and interfere with leukocyte adhesion to endothelial cells.
  • the animals in the AIA control group are untreated.
  • the animals in the EC1669 treatment group are given weekly subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 1000 nmol/kg.
  • the animals in the CellCept treatment group are given daily oral doses of CellCept at a dosage of 30 mg/kg, 5 days per week.
  • the animals in the EC1669 and CellCept combination treatment group are given weekly subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 1000 nmol/kg and daily oral doses of CellCept at a dosage of 30 mg/kg, 5 days per week.
  • the EC1669 and CellCept combination therapy is more effective than either agent alone in reducing arthritis scores, paw swelling, and weight loss due to disease progression.
  • FIG. 10B shows that the EC1669 and CellCept combination therapy causes lower toxicity than either drug given alone.
  • CIA Collagen-Induced Arthritis
  • bovine collagen Type II Chondrex, Redmond, Wash.
  • Freund's complete adjuvant A booster immunization is given on Day 7 with 250 ⁇ g of the bovine collagen formulated with Freund's incomplete adjuvant.
  • rats are distributed evenly (according to the arthritis score) across the control and treatment groups.
  • the CIA rats are given ten consecutive subcutaneous doses of test compound on days 10-19.
  • an induction dose for example, 500 nmol/kg
  • a maintenance dose for example, 100 nmol/kg
  • the animals in the arthritis control group are left untreated.
  • the arthritis score and animal body weight are recorded five times a week.
  • EAU Experimental autoimmune uveitis
  • PT pertussis toxin
  • EXAMPLE Compounds described herein are potent in treating autoimmune uveitis.
  • EC1669 displays folate receptor-specific activity against autoimmune uveitis.
  • the animals in the EC1669 treatment group are given five subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day (q2d).
  • the animals in the EC1669 plus EC0923 treatment group are given five subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day plus a 500-fold excess of EC0923 at a dosage of 125 ⁇ mol/kg as the folate competitor.
  • the animals in the MTX treatment group are given five subcutaneous doses of MTX at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day.
  • the uveitis score and animal body weight are recorded for each animal at predetermined frequencies.
  • EAU The clinical severity of EAU is monitored on a daily basis using an ophthalmoscope and graded on a scale of 0 to 4 per eye with a maximum possible score of 8 per animal.
  • the animals are euthanized and rat eye balls are fixed in formalin for histology.
  • FIG. 12A EC1669 treatment at disease on-set effectively reduces the symptoms of EAU in a FR-dependent manner and its activity is competitive with subcutaneous MTX.
  • Treatment-related weight loss was not observed with the conjugate compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, as shown in FIG. 12B .
  • EXAMPLE. EC1496 is potent and efficacious against folate receptor specific autoimmune uveitis, as shown in FIG. 13A . Tissues are evaluated by histology as shown in FIG. 13B .
  • EAE Autoimmune Encephalomyelitis
  • MBP guinea pig myelin basic protein
  • Pertussis toxin is given intraperitoneally (1 ⁇ g/rat) to enhance the organ-specific autoimmunity.
  • the animals in the test compound treatment group are given four subcutaneous doses of test compound at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day (q2d).
  • the animals in the test compound plus competitor compound treatment group are given four subcutaneous doses of test compound at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day plus a 500-fold excess of competitor compound, such as EC0923 at a dosage of 125 ⁇ mol/kg as an illustrative folate receptor competitor.
  • the clinical severity of EAE is monitored on a daily basis and graded on a scale of 0 to 5 per animal.
  • EXAMPLE Compounds described herein are potent in treating experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE).
  • EAE experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
  • EC1669 displays folate receptor-specific activity against EAE.
  • FIG. 14A EC1669 treatment at disease on-set effectively suppresses the neurological symptoms during the acute phase of EAE.
  • Treatment-related weight loss was not observed with EC1669 when dose alone, as shown in FIG. 14B .
  • the therapeutic effect of EC1669 is blocked by the folate receptor competitor EC0923.
  • EXAMPLE EC1496 is potent and efficacious against EAE, as shown in FIG. 15 . Treatment-related weight loss was not observed with EC1496 when dosed alone.
  • test compound is administered to the test animal, such as by subcutaneous injection.
  • the plasma concentration of the conjugate, and optionally one or more metabolites is monitored over time. The results are graphed to determine Cmax, Tmax, half-life, and AUC for the test compound and metabolites.
  • Conjugate compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid are more stable in plasma than comparator conjugate compounds that do not have a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid.
  • EC1495 and EC0746 are each administered at 500 nmol/kg by subcutaneous injection. The plasma concentration of the conjugate and the metabolites (aminopterin and aminopterin hydrazide) are monitored over time.
  • EC1496 shows a higher Cmax than EC0746, as shown in FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B , respectively.
  • FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B show that EC1496 releases substantially less drug in plasma than does EC0746.
  • free drug is released as the parent aminopterin and the hydrazide derivative (EC0470).
  • the data indicate that the compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, such as EC1496, exhibit greater plasma stability.
  • the comparative example EC0746 which does not include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, releases more than 2-fold more drug than the EC1496 after a subcutaneous dose in rats.
  • EC1496 also shows a higher Cmax than EC0746 leading to a higher effective therapeutic dose.
  • EC1496 shows a shorter half-life.
  • METHOD Plasma clearance.
  • In vivo studies include a minimum of 3 test animals, such as rats, per time point.
  • test animals such as rats, per time point.
  • female Lewis rats with jugular vein catheters (Harlan, regular rodent diet) are given a single subcutaneous injection of test compound, such as EC1669 at 500 nmol/kg.
  • Whole blood samples (300 ⁇ L) are collected at the following time points: 1 min, 10 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 3 h, 4 h, 8 h, and 12 h after injection.
  • the blood samples are placed into anti-coagulant tubes containing 1.7 mg/mL of K 3 -EDTA and 0.35 mg/mL of N-maleoyl-beta-alanine (0.35 mg/mL) in a 0.15% acetic acid solution.
  • Plasma samples are obtained by centrifugation for 3 min at ⁇ 2,000 g and stored at ⁇ 80° C.
  • the amounts of test compound in the plasma and any metabolites, such as EC1669 and its two active metabolites aminopterin (AMT) and AMT hydrazide (EC0470), respectively, are quantified by LC-MS/MS.
  • EC1669 shows fast plasma clearance after subcutaneous administration in rats.
  • EC1669 is detectable in the blood stream within minutes, with a Cmax of ⁇ 472 nM occurring at ⁇ 30 min post dose, and it maintained a plateau until 60 min after the injection.
  • the EC1669-derived AMT and EC0470 are detected at similar Cmax values of 27 nM and 21 nM, respectively, but there is a 30-min delay in comparison to the EC1669 Cmax. While EC1669 itself is cleared rapidly from the blood with an elimination half-life of ⁇ 37 min, the elimination half-lives of the two metabolites are approximately 2-3 times longer at 66 min (AMT) and 112 min (EC0470), respectively.
  • AUC area-under-the-curve
  • the fast plasma clearance observed for the compounds described herein, such as EC1669 may result in lower host animal toxicity because the duration of exposure to prematurely released drug from the conjugates described herein, compared to compounds that do not include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, will also be decreased.
  • test compound such as 3 H-EC1669 (label on the drug)
  • positive control such as 3 H-methotrexate ( 3 H-MTX)
  • SC subcutaneous
  • the blood samples are placed in BD microtainer tubes (heparin) and centrifuged (4,000 g ⁇ 3 min, 4° C.) to separate plasma (>100 ⁇ L).
  • the remaining red blood cell (RBC) mass is washed 2 ⁇ with phosphate buffered saline (PBS, pH 7.4) to obtain RBCs.
  • the collected tissues are weighed and processed to determine 3 H-EC1669 and 3 H-MTX distribution: plasma, RBC, heart, lung, liver (the smallest lobe), spleen, kidney (1), intestine (above cecum), fecal material (from colon), muscle, and brain.
  • EXAMPLE Comparison of pharmacokinetic biodistribution of 3 H-EC1669 and 3 H-methotrexate after subcutaneous administration. The comparative pharmacokinetic biodistribution results are shown in FIG. 17 (as percent injected dose per gram (% ID/g)). At 10 min post-dose, 31% ID/g of 3 H-MTX is captured by the liver. Twice as much 3 H-EC1669 is found in the plasma than 3 H-MTX (12% versus 5.2% ID/g). 3 H-MTX retention in RBCs, spleen, liver, intestine, and feces are also consistently higher than that of 3 H-EC1669 during the entire sampling period. The RBC data is also plotted in FIG.
  • mice are housed in metabolic cages with a 6-h fast before subcutaneous administration of 3 H-EC1669 or 3 H-MTX.
  • 3 H-EC1669 dosed animals At 24 h post-dose, ⁇ 14% more radioactivity is found in the pooled urine of 3 H-EC1669 dosed animals than in 3 H-MTX dosed animals.
  • twice as much radioactivity was found in the pooled feces of 3 H-MTX dosed animals than in EC1669 dosed animals.
  • MTX reportedly causes hepatotoxicity as a major side effect, especially after long-term use.
  • the preferential renal clearance of the compounds described herein will lead to fewer side effects such as hepatotoxicity.
  • EXAMPLE Compounds described herein are less toxic than compounds that do not have a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid. Test compounds are administered i.v. at equivalent doses to folate deficient rats. As shown in FIG. 19 , conjugates described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, such as EC1496, are less toxic than the corresponding conjugate that does not, such as comparative example EC0746.
  • EXAMPLE Maximum tolerated dose (MTD).
  • Conjugate compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid show high MTDs, which are improved over compounds that do not have linkers comprising one or more unnatural amino acids.
  • Test compounds are administered by i.v., BIW, 2 wks in female Sprague-Dawley rats.
  • Comparator compound EC0531 has a MTD of 0.33 ⁇ mol/kg, while EC1456 has a MTD of at least 0.51 ⁇ mol/kg, a 65% improvement, as shown in FIG. 20 . Histopathologic changes were not observed with doses of EC1456 at or below the MTD.
  • the amide-linked conjugate pteroyl-NHCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 NH-DTPA (CYK4-013), which lacks an amino acid in the linker region, was prepared by a three-step procedure from pteroic acid, 2,2′-(ethylenedioxy)-bis(ethylamine), and t-Bu-protected DTPA.
  • CY3-064 was obtained from pteroic acid (0.025 g; 0.080 mmol) and a large excess of 2,2′-(ethylenedioxy)-bis(ethylamine) (0.237 g; 1.6 mmol) using the coupling reagents.
  • Benzotriazole-1-yl-oxy-tris(pyrrolidino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP) (0.125 g; 0.24 mmol), N-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.037 g; 0.24 mmol), and N-methylmorpholine (Nmm)(0.049 g; 0.48 mmol) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) (0.8 mL) at room temperature for 22 hours under nitrogen. The excess reagent and solvent DMSO were removed under vacuum and the resulting brown residue triturated with diethylether, methanol, and water to produce 20 mg of CY3-064 as a yellow solid (57% estimated yield).
  • DMSO dry dimethylsulfoxide
  • CY3-078 was treated with 70% TFA/CH 2 Cl 2 at 0° C. for 30 minutes, and stirred at room temperature for 5 hours, to remove the three t-Bu protecting groups.
  • the resulting CYK4-013 product (6 mg) was isolated by trituration with diethylether.
  • Both CY3-078 and CYK4-013 exhibit the expected parent ion peaks in their positive and negative ion electrospray mass spectra.
  • the 111 In complex of CYK4-013 was prepared from 111 In-chloride (1.2 mCi; 44 MBq) and purified by reversed-phase HPLC. Specifically, the 111 In complex of CYK4-013 was prepared from 111 In-chloride via ligand exchange in acetate buffer. Briefly, 1.2 mCi no-carrier-added 111 In-chloride (Mallinckrodt, Inc., St. Louis) in 0.05 mL 0.05 N HCl was transferred to a small tube and 0.05 mL 0.1N ammonium acetate (pH 5.5), followed by 0.02 mL 0.5N ammonium acetate (pH 7.4) was added, producing a solution with pH 7.
  • 1.2 mCi no-carrier-added 111 In-chloride (Mallinckrodt, Inc., St. Louis) in 0.05 mL 0.05 N HCl was transferred to a small tube and 0.05 mL 0.1N am
  • the CYK4-013 ligand was weighed out and diluted in water, pH adjusted with 1N NaOH to pH 9-10. 10 ⁇ L of this ligand solution containing 95 ⁇ g CYK4-013 was added to the 111 In-acetate solution (120 ⁇ L) and mixed. The solution was protected from light and kept at room temperature.
  • the radiochemical purity of the resulting crude 111 In-CYK4-013 was evaluated by radio-HPLC using a 4.6 ⁇ 250 mm Dynamax C18 column (Varian/Rainin) eluted with an aqueous NH 4 O Ac:acetonitrile gradient.
  • HPLC analysis of this isolated peak showed it to remain stable for at least 7 days at room temperature.
  • Radio-TLC of the HPLC-purified 111 In-CYK4-013 was performed using a C18 plate eluted with 25% NH 4 OAc; 75% acetonitrile. The results confirm the absence of 111 In-species that irreversibly adsorb to C18 (i.e., there is no 111 In remaining at origin)
  • the HPLC-purified 111 In-CYK4-013 was removed from the HPLC solvents by solid-phase extraction.
  • a C18 Sep-Pak Light solid phase extraction cartridge (Millipore, Inc.) was conditioned by washing with ethanol followed by water.
  • the 111 In-CYK4-013 was loaded onto the C18 Sep-Pak after dilution with water to 5% acetonitrile, the Sep-Pak was washed with 3 mL water, and the 111 In-CYK4-013 product was recovered by fractional elution with ethanol.
  • the resulting ethanol solution of 111 In-CYK4-013 was evaporated to dryness under a stream of N 2 at room temperature, and the 111 In-CYK4-013 was reconstituted in saline for use in a biodistribution study in mice.
  • the 111 In-CYK4-013 agent is found to selectively localize in the folate-receptor-positive tumors (5.4 ⁇ 0.8 and 5.5 ⁇ 1.1 percent of the injected 111 In dose per gram of tumor at 1 hour and 4 hours post-injection, respectively) and to exhibit prolonged tumor retention of the radiolabel (3.6 ⁇ 0.6 percent of the injected 111 In dose per gram of tumor still remaining at 24 hours post-injection).
  • the tumor localization of the 111 In-radiolabel clearly appears to be mediated by the cellular folate receptor, since the tumor uptake of radiotracer drops precipitously (0.12 ⁇ 0.07 percent of the injected 111 In dose per gram at 4 hours) when 111 In-CYK4-013 is co-injected with an excess of folic acid, which will compete for folate receptor sites.
  • Urinary excretion appears to be the primary whole-body clearance pathway for the 111 In-CYK4-013.
  • the substantial retention of 111 In in the kidneys is fully consistent with the binding of 111 In-CYK4-013 to tissue folate receptors, since the renal proximal tubule is a known normal tissue site of folate receptor expression.
  • 111 In-CYK4-013 Biodistribution of 111 In-CYK4-013 is shown in Tables 1-3. Similar to 111 In-DTPA-Folate, 111 In-CYK4-013 selectively localized in the folate-receptor-positive tumor xenografts, and afforded prolonged tumor retention 111 -In (5.4 ⁇ 0.8; 5.5 ⁇ 1.1; and 3.6 ⁇ 0.6% ID/g at 1 hour, 4 hours, and 24 hours, respectively) (Table 2). The tumor localization of the 111 In-radiolabel appears to be mediated by the cellular folate receptor, since the tumor uptake dropped precipitously (0.12 ⁇ 0.07%ID/g at 4 hours) when 111 In-CYK4-013 was co-injected with an excess of folic acid (Table 2). Blockable binding was also observed in the kidneys, where the folate receptor occurs in the proximal tubules.
  • Tumor-selective drug targeting via the folate receptor remains feasible with pteroic acid conjugates lacking amino acid fragments, such as the glutamic acid moiety of folic acid.
  • a pteroic acid conjugate linked to the tetraazamacrocyclic DOTA chelating ligand was prepared for radiolabeling with radiometals such as 64 Cu 2+ and 111 In 3+ .
  • This conjugate (CY4-036) was prepared as shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the starting material for the synthesis was pteroic acid. Due to the poor solubility of pteroic acid in organic solvent, pteroic acid was protected with 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethanol to produce intermediate CY4-033 using scholarlyal procedure (M. Nomura, et al., J. Org. Chem., 2000, 65, 5016-5021) to increase its solubility in organic solvent before coupling to the DOTA derivative.
  • DOTA was coupled to 2,2′-(ethylenedioxy)bis(ethyleneamine) using PyBOP, HOBt, and NMM as coupling reagents in DMF to produce CY4-032.
  • Protected form of pteroyl-linker-DOTA was obtained through the coupling of CY4-032 and CY4-033 in DMSO using MTBD as a base, and then purified via flash chromatography eluted with gradient MeOH/CHCl 3 .
  • 64 Cu-complex of CY4-036 The 64 Cu complex of CY4-036 was prepared from 64 Cu-chloride via ligand exchange in acetate buffer. Briefly, 2.88 mCi of no-carrier-added 64 Cu-chloride (Washington University, St. Louis, Mo.) in 0.005 mL of 0.01 N HCl was transferred to a small test tube and mixed with 0.010 mL of 0.5 M ammonium acetate (pH 7.4). The CY4-036 ligand was weighed out and diluted in water and the pH adjusted with 1 N NaOH to pH 11-12. One ⁇ L of this ligand solution containing ⁇ 125 ⁇ g CY4-036 was added to the 64 Cu-acetate solution and mixed. The pH of the solution was adjusted to pH 8-9 with the addition of 1 ⁇ L of 1 N NaOH. The solution was protected from light and incubated at 65° C. for 30 minutes.
  • the resulting crude 64 Cu-CY4-036 was diluted with water and injected onto radio-HPLC using a 10 ⁇ 250 mm Dynamax C18 column (Varian/Rainin) eluted with an aqueous NH 4 OAc:acetonitrile gradient.
  • HPLC-purified 64 Cu-CY4-036 was removed from the HPLC solvents by solid-phase extraction.
  • a C18 Sep-Pak Light solid phase extraction cartridge (Millipore, Inc.) was conditioned by washing with ethanol followed by water.
  • the HPLC-purified 64 Cu-CY4-036 was loaded onto the C18 Sep-Pak after dilution with water to 5% acetonitrile, the Sep-Pak was washed with 20 mL water, and the 64 Cu-CY4-036 product recovered by fractional elution with ethanol.
  • the resulting ethanol solution of 64 Cu-CY4-036 was evaporated to dryness under a stream of N 2 at room temperature, and the 64 Cu-CY4-036 was reconstituted in water.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Nitrogen And Oxygen Or Sulfur-Condensed Heterocyclic Ring Systems (AREA)
  • Steroid Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Saccharide Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Described herein are drug delivery conjugates for targeted therapy. In particular, described herein are drug delivery conjugates that include polyvalent linkers comprising one or more unnatural amino acids that are useful for treating cancers and inflammatory diseases. The invention described herein pertains to drug delivery conjugates for targeted therapy. In particular, the invention described herein pertains to drug delivery conjugates that include polyvalent linkers comprising one or more unnatural amino acids.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/454,109 filed on Mar. 9, 2017, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/435,919 filed on Apr. 15, 2015, which is a U.S. national stage application under 35 U.S.C. § 371(b) of International Application No. PCT/US2013/065079 filed Oct. 15, 2013, and claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/714,565 filed Oct. 16, 2012, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/790,234 filed Mar. 15, 2013, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/865,382 filed Aug. 13, 2013, and U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/877,317 filed Sep. 13, 2013. The disclosures of all the above referenced applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
    • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The invention described herein pertains to drug delivery conjugates for targeted therapy. In particular, the invention described herein pertains to drug delivery conjugates that include polyvalent linkers comprising one or more unnatural amino acids.
    • BACKGROUND AND SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The mammalian immune system provides a means for the recognition and elimination of pathogenic cells, such as tumor cells, and other invading foreign pathogens. While the immune system normally provides a strong line of defense, there are many instances where pathogenic cells, such as cancer cells, and other infectious agents evade a host immune response and proliferate or persist with concomitant host pathogenicity. Chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapies have been developed to eliminate, for example, replicating neoplasms. However, many of the currently available chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapy regimens have adverse side effects because they lack sufficient selectivity to preferentially destroy pathogenic cells, and therefore, may also harm normal host cells, such as cells of the hematopoietic system, and other non-pathogenic cells. The adverse side effects of these anticancer drugs highlight the need for the development of new therapies selective for pathogenic cell populations and with reduced host toxicity.
  • It has been discovered herein that drug delivery conjugates that include polyvalent linkers formed from one or more unnatural amino acids are efficacious in treating pathogenic cell populations, and exhibit low host animal toxicity.
  • In one illustrative and non-limiting embodiment of the invention, described herein are compounds of the formula

  • B-L-Dx
  • wherein each of B, L, D, and x are as defined in the various embodiments and aspects described herein.
  • In another embodiment, pharmaceutical compositions containing one or more of the compounds are also described herein. In one aspect, the compositions include a therapeutically effective amount of the one or more compounds for treating a patient with cancer, inflammation, and the like. It is to be understood that the compositions may include other components and/or ingredients, including, but not limited to, other therapeutically active compounds, and/or one or more carriers, diluents, excipients, and the like, and combinations thereof. In another embodiment, methods for using the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for treating patients or host animals with cancer, inflammation, and the like are also described herein. In one aspect, the methods include the step of administering one or more of the compounds and/or compositions described herein to a patient with cancer, inflammation, and the like. In another aspect, the methods include administering a therapeutically effective amount of the one or more compounds and/or compositions described herein for treating patients with cancer, inflammation, and the like. In another embodiment, uses of the compounds and compositions in the manufacture of a medicament for treating patients with cancer, inflammation, and the like are also described herein. In one aspect, the medicaments include a therapeutically effective amount of the one or more compounds and/or compositions for treating a patient with cancer, inflammation, and the like.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1A shows the relative affinity of EC1669 in KB cells, 1 h at 37° C. FIG. 1B shows the relative affinity of EC1669 in CHO-β cells, 1 h at 37° C.
  • FIG. 2 shows the cytostatic effect of EC1669 on RAW264.7 cells, as determined by XTT cell viability at 2 h and 72 h.
  • FIG. 3A shows in vivo activity of EC1456 against KB tumors in nu/nu mice dosed at 1 μmol/kg three times per week (M/W/F) (TIW) for two consecutive weeks (●), compared to EC1456 co-dosed with EC0923 at 100 μmol/kg (▴), and untreated (PBS) controls (▪). The dotted vertical line represents the day of the final dose. FIG. 3B shows that EC1456 did not result in any observable whole animal toxicity as determined by animal body weight.
  • FIG. 4A shows the activity of EC1663 in nu/nu mice bearing s.c. KB tumors, where EC1663 was administered i.v. starting on Day 7 with 0.5 μmol/kg (▴), three times per week (M/W/F) for a 2 week period, and compared to untreated controls (▪), N=5 animals per cohort. Dotted vertical line=day of final dosing day. FIG. 4A shows 4/4 PRs in test animals. FIG. 4B shows that EC1663 did not exhibit significant host animal toxicity.
  • FIG. 5A shows the activity of EC1456 against established subcutaneous MDA-MB-231 tumors. Animals bearing s.c. MDA-MB-231 tumors (94-145 mm3) were treated i.v. starting on Day 17 with 2 μmol/kg (panel A) of EC1456 (●), three times per week (M/W/F) for a 2 week period, and compared to untreated animals (▪), as shown in FIG. 5A. N=5 animals per cohort. Dotted vertical line=day of final dose. FIG. 5B shows that EC1456 did not cause gross whole animal toxicity as determined by % weight change.
  • FIG. 6A shows the activity of EC1456 in animals bearing s.c. KB-CR2000 (cisplatin resistant) tumors (98-148 mm3), where EC1456 was administered i.v. starting on Day 6 with 2 μmol/kg (●), three times per week (M/W/F) for a 2 week period, or with 3 mg/kg of cisplatin (▴), twice per week (T/Th) for a 2 week period, and compared to untreated controls (▪), N=5 animals per cohort. Dotted vertical line=day of final dosing day. FIG. 6B shows that EC1456 did not exhibit significant host animal toxicity. In contrast, cisplatin treatment resulted in substantial host animal toxicity during the dosing period.
  • FIG. 7 shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against adjuvant-induced arthritis. The arrows indicate the treatment days. (a) healthy control, (b) untreated control, (c) EC1496, (d) EC1496+excess EC0923 (comparator/competition compound).
  • FIG. 8A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against arthritis, (a) healthy control, (a) untreated control, (b) EC1669 (375 nmol/kg), (c) EC1669+500x EC0923. FIG. 8B shows that EC1669 does not exhibit whole animal toxicity, (a) untreated control, (b) EC1669 (375 nmol/kg), (c) EC1669+500x EC0923, (d) healthy control.
  • FIG. 9A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against arthritis, as determined by paw swelling. FIG. 9B shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against arthritis, as determined by bone radiography.
  • FIG. 10A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 alone, and EC1669 plus CellCept combination co-therapy in AIA rats, where day 0 is 9 days post induction, and the arrows indicate treatment days, (a) healthy control, (b) untreated control, (c) EC1669 (1000 nmol/kg, siw, sc), (d) CellCept™ (30 mg/kg, po, qdx5), (e) EC1669+CellCept™. FIG. 10B shows the whole animal toxicity compared to control for each of the administration protocols.
  • FIG. 11 shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 alone, and EC1669 plus CellCept combination co-therapy in AIA rats, as determined by paw swelling.
  • FIG. 12A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against EAU (total uveitis scores for both eyes). Animals are treated with EC1669 (▪), EC1669 plus EC0923 (□), and MTX (♦) every other day starting on day 8 after EAU induction or from untreated animals (●). Day 0 is 8 days post induction, and the arrows indicate treatment days. FIG. 12B shows that EC1669 does not cause whole animal toxicity.
  • FIG. 13A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against EAU (total uveitis scores for both eyes), (a) uveitis untreated control, (b) EC1496 (375 nmol/kg), (c) EC1496+excess EC0923. FIG. 13B shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against EAU, as determined by histology.
  • FIG. 14A shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1669 against EAE, (a) untreated EAE control, (b) EC1669 (250 nmol/kg), (c) EC1669+excess EC0923. Animals are treated every other day (as indicated by arrows) starting on day 8 after EAE induction, and compared to untreated control. FIG. 14B shows the percent changes in body weight (B), averaged for each group.
  • FIG. 15 shows the in vivo efficacy of EC1496 against EAE. Individual EAE scores from untreated animals and animals treated with EC1496 and EC1496 plus EC0923 every other day starting on day 8 after EAE induction are shown, and compared to untreated control.
  • FIG. 16A shows the pharmacokinetics of EC1496 (500 nmol/kg, s.c.), and in vivo production of aminopterin and aminopterin hydrazide. FIG. 16B shows the pharmacokinetics of EC0746 (comparator compound, 500 nmol/kg, s.c.), and in vivo production of aminopterin and aminopterin hydrazide.
  • FIGS. 17A, 17C, and 17E the pharmacokinetic biodistribution of 3H-EC1669; and FIGS. 17B, 17D, and 17F show 3H-methotrexate in mice. Test compounds were administered to Balb/c mice at 500 nmol/kg, s.c.
  • FIG. 18 shows the comparison of RBC uptake of 3H-EC1669 (▪) and 3H-MTX (▾) in mice, as a measure of radioactivity over time.
  • FIG. 19 shows the relative whole animal toxicity between (b) EC1496 (3 μmol/kg) and (c) EC0746 (comparator compound, 3 μmol/kg)), and compared to vehicle control (a) when dosed BIW for 2 weeks in folate deficient rats.
  • FIG. 20 shows the maximum tolerated dose (MTD) of EC1456 compared to vehicle controls. Vehicle control (▪), EC1456 at 0.33 μmol/kg (●), EC1456 at 0.41 μmol/kg (▴), EC1456 at 0.51 μmol/kg (▾), and EC1456 at 0.67 μmol/kg(♦).
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Several illustrative embodiments of the invention are described by the following
  • A compound of the formula B-L(D)X, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein B is a radical of a cell surface receptor binding and/or targeting ligand, D is in each instance a radical of an independently selected drug, x is an integer selected from 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5; and L is a polyvalent releasable linker comprising one or more unnatural amino acids; and where B is covalently attached to L, and L is covalently attached to each D; and
  • where the compound is not any one of or any subgroup or subset of the following formulae
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00001
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00002
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00003
  • and/or where the compound is not of the following formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00004
  • and/or where the compound is not any one of or any subgroup or subset of the following formulae
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00005
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00006
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00007
  • and/or where the compound is not any one of or any subgroup or subset of the following formulae
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00008
  • and/or where the compound is not of the following formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00009
  • and/or any combination of the foregoing;
  • or any pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • The present invention also provides a ligand-agent conjugate capable of binding to a folate recognition site, comprising a diagnostic or therapeutic agent in association with a non-peptide folic acid analog of general formula:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00010
  • wherein
  • X, Y, U, V, W, T, A1, A2, R6, R7, L, n, p, r and s are as defined herein;
  • q is an integer 1; and
  • D is a diagnostic agent or a therapeutic agent.
  • The compound of the preceding clause wherein B-L(D)X is capable of binding to the cell surface receptor.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the ligand is a vitamin receptor binding ligand.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the ligand is a folate receptor binding ligand.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the ligand is a folate.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the ligand is a folate comprising D-glutamyl, also referred to herein as D-folate, or pteroyl-D-glutamic acid. It is to be understood herein that when B is a radical of D-folate, the included D-glutamyl portion of B is not part of the linker L.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein B is an unnatural folate radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00011
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the ligand is folic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein B is radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00012
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one unnatural amino acid has the D-configuration.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one unnatural amino acid is selected from D-alanine, D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-phenylalanine, D-histidine, D-isoleucine, D-lysine, D-leucine, D-methionine, D-proline, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-valine, D-tryptophan, D-tyrosine, and D-ornithine, and any amino acid derivatives thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one unnatural amino acid is selected from D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-histidine, D-lysine, D-methionine, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-tryptophan, D-tyrosine, and D-ornithine, and any amino acid derivatives thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one unnatural amino acid is selected from D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-histidine, D-lysine, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-tryptophan, and D-omithine, and any amino acid derivatives thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one unnatural amino acid is selected from D-aspartic acid, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-lysine, D-arginine, D-serine, and D-omithine, and any amino acid derivatives thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises two or more unnatural amino acids.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises three or more unnatural amino acids.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises four or more unnatural amino acids.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises one or more disulfides.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one disulfide comprises L-cysteinyl.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one disulfide comprises D-cysteinyl.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises one or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises two or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises three or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises four or more divalent hydrophilic radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises one or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises two or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises three or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises four or more divalent polyoxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises one or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises two or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises three or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L further comprises four or more divalent polyhydroxy radicals.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one unnatural amino acid comprises a polyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least two unnatural amino acids comprise a polyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least three unnatural amino acids comprise a polyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least four unnatural amino acids comprise a polyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one of the polyhydroxy radicals is of the formula

  • CH2—(CH(OH))n—CH2—OH
  • where n is selected from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein n is selected from 1, 2, 3, and 4.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein n is selected from 3 and 4.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein n is 3.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least one glutamic acid forms an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least two glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least three glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent polyglutamic acid radical, where at least four glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one of the glutamic acids is D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least two of the glutamic acids is D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least three of the glutamic acids is D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least four of the glutamic acids is D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one of the glutamic acids is unsubstituted D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least two of the glutamic acids is unsubstituted D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least three of the glutamic acids is unsubstituted D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least four of the glutamic acids is unsubstituted D-glutamic acid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least one glutamic acid forms an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least two glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least three glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent poly(D-glutamic acid) radical, where at least four glutamic acids form an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent radical of the formula (K-L)d, where K is a divalent D-glutamic acid radical, L is a divalent L-glutamic acid radical that forms an amide with an aminopolyhydroxy radical, and d is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • The compound of the preceding clause wherein d is 2, 3, or 4.
  • The compound of the preceding clause wherein d is 3 or 4.
  • The compound of the preceding clause wherein d is 3.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one of the aminopolyhydroxy radicals is of the formula

  • NH—CH2—(CH(OH))m—CH2—OH
  • where m is selected from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one of the aminopolyhydroxy radicals is of the formula

  • NH—CH2—(CH(OH))m—R
  • where m is selected from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6; and R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein m is selected from 1, 2, 3, and 4.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein m is selected from 3 and 4.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent radical of the formula

  • S—CH2CH2—O—C(O).
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L comprises a divalent radical of the formula

  • S—S—CH2CH2—O—C(O).
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L-D comprises a radical of the formula

  • S—CH2CH2—O—C(O)-D.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L-D comprises a radical of the formula

  • S—S—CH2CH2—O—C(O)-D.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein x is 3.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein x is 2.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein x is 1.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a cytotoxic agent.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a cancer treating agent.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a vinca alkaloid.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is desacetylvinblastine monohydrazide.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a tubulysin.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is tubulysin A.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is tubulysin B.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is tubulysin A hydrazide.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is tubulysin B hydrazide.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a tubulysin where the Tuv residue includes an ether aminal.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a tubulysin hydrazide where the Tuv residue includes an ether aminal.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a inflammation-treating agent.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is an anti-inflammatory agent.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a dihydrofolate reductase inhibitor.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is aminopterin or methotrexate.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is an aminopterin.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is an inhibitor of mammalian target of rapamycin (mTOR).
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is sirolimus (rapamycin), temsirolimus, everolimus, or ridaforolimus.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is not T-2 mycotoxin.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is not a duocarmycin.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is not a mitomycin.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is not desacetylvinblastine monohydrazide.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one D is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00013
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one D is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00014
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one D is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00015
  • where n=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, or alternatively, n=1, 2, or 3, or alternatively, n=2 or 3.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one D is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00016
  • where n=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, or alternatively, n=1, 2, or 3, or alternatively, n=2 or 3.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein at least one drug is a compound capable of binding to or reacting with a nucleic acid or a DNA transcription factor, or a prodrug thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein B-L is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00017
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein B-L is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00018
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein B-L is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00019
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein B-L is a radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00020
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the compound is of the formula EC1456
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00021
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the compound is not of the formula EC1456
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00022
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the compound is of the formula FC1496
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00023
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the compound is not of the formula EC1496
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00024
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the compound is of the formula EC1669
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00025
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • The compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the compound is not of the formula EC1669
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00026
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of the preceding clauses in combination with one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • A unit dose or unit dosage form composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses, optionally in combination with one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • A composition for treating cancer or inflammation in a host animal, the composition comprising comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses; or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses, optionally further comprising one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • A method for treating cancer or inflammation in a host animal, the method comprising the step of administering to the host animal a composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses; or a pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses, optionally further comprising one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof.
  • Use of one or more compounds of any one of the preceding clauses, optionally in combination with one or more carriers, diluents, or excipients, or a combination thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating a cancer or inflammation in a host animal.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is drug resistant cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a platinum resistant cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a cisplatin resistant cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is an ovarian cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a drug resistant ovarian cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a cisplatin resistant ovarian cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a platinum resistant ovarian cancer, such as NCl/ADR-RES or NCl/ADR-RES related ovarian cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a platinum resistant ovarian cancer, such as IGROVCDDP or IGROVCDDP related ovarian cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a breast cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a drug resistant breast cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a triple negative breast cancer, such as MDA-MB-231 or MDA-MB-231 related breast cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a non-small cell lung cancer.
  • The method or composition or unit dose or use of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the cancer is a hepatocellular carcinoma or cancer.
  • An intermediate for preparing a compound of any one of the preceding clauses of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00027
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L is a leaving group.
  • An intermediate for preparing a compound of any one of the preceding clauses of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00028
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein M is hydrogen or a cation.
  • An intermediate for preparing a compound of claim 1 of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00029
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L is a leaving group.
  • In another embodiment, the compounds described herein can be internalized into the targeted pathogenic cells by binding to the corresponding cell surface receptor. In particular, vitamin receptors, such as folate receptors, selectively and/or specifically bind the vitamin, and internalization can occur, for example, through receptor-mediated endocytosis. Once internalized, the releasable linker included in the compounds described herein allows for the delivery of the drug cargo to the interior of the target cell, thus decreasing toxicity against non-target tissues because the releasable linker remains substantially or completely intact until the compounds described herein are delivered to the target cells. Accordingly, the compounds described herein act intracellularly by delivering the drug to an intracellular biochemical process, a decrease the amount of unconjugated drug exposure to the host animal's healthy cells and tissues.
  • In another embodiment, compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand exhibit greater specificity for the folate receptor compared to the corresponding compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid. In another embodiment, compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand show high activity for folate receptor expressing cells. In another embodiment, compounds described herein exhibit potent in vitro and in vivo activity against pathogenic cells, such as KB cells, including cisplatin resistant KB cells, NCUADR-RES-Cl2 cells, IGROV1 cells, and MDA-MB-231 cells. In another embodiment, compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand do not show significant binding to folate receptor negative cells. In another embodiment, compounds described herein that include a folate receptor binding ligand enter cells preferentially or exclusively via the high affinity folate receptors, such as folate receptor alpha (α) and/or folate receptor beta (β). In another embodiment, compounds described herein generally do not substantially enter cells via passive transport, such as via the reduced folate carrier (RFC). In another embodiment, compounds described herein exhibit lower host animal toxicity compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid. In another embodiment, compounds described herein exhibit greater serum stability compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid. In another embodiment, compounds described herein are cleared rapidly compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid. In another embodiment, compounds described herein are cleared primarily via renal clearance compared to hepatic clearance.
  • The compounds described herein can be used for both human clinical medicine and veterinary applications. Thus, the host animal harboring the population of pathogenic cells and treated with the compounds described herein can be human or, in the case of veterinary applications, can be a laboratory, agricultural, domestic, or wild animal. The present invention can be applied to host animals including, but not limited to, humans, laboratory animals such rodents (e.g., mice, rats, hamsters, etc.), rabbits, monkeys, chimpanzees, domestic animals such as dogs, cats, and rabbits, agricultural animals such as cows, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, and wild animals in captivity such as bears, pandas, lions, tigers, leopards, elephants, zebras, giraffes, gorillas, dolphins, and whales.
  • The invention is applicable to populations of pathogenic cells that cause a variety of pathologies in these host animals. In accordance with the invention “pathogenic cells” means cancer cells, infectious agents such as bacteria and viruses, bacteria- or virus-infected cells, activated macrophages capable of causing a disease state, other pathogenic cells causing inflammation, any other type of pathogenic cells that uniquely express, preferentially express, or overexpress vitamin receptors or receptors that bind vitamins and/or vitamin receptor binding ligands, and any other type of pathogenic cells that uniquely express, preferentially express, or overexpress high affinity folate receptors or receptors that bind folates and/or folate receptor binding ligands. Pathogenic cells can also include any cells causing a disease state for which treatment with the compounds described herein results in reduction of the symptoms of the disease. For example, the pathogenic cells can be host cells that are pathogenic under some circumstances such as cells of the immune system that are responsible for graft versus host disease, but not pathogenic under other circumstances.
  • Thus, the population of pathogenic cells can be a cancer cell population that is tumorigenic, including benign tumors and malignant tumors, or it can be non-tumorigenic. The cancer cell population can arise spontaneously or by such processes as mutations present in the germline of the host animal or somatic mutations, or it can be chemically-, virally-, or radiation-induced. The invention can be utilized to treat such cancers as carcinomas, sarcomas, lymphomas, Hodgekin's disease, melanomas, mesotheliomas, Burkitt's lymphoma, nasopharyngeal carcinomas, leukemias, and myelomas. The cancer cell population can include, but is not limited to, oral, thyroid, endocrine, skin, gastric, esophageal, laryngeal, pancreatic, colon, bladder, bone, ovarian, cervical, uterine, breast, testicular, prostate, rectal, kidney, liver, and lung cancers.
  • In another embodiment, the method or pharmaceutical composition of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein the disease is selected from the group consisting of arthritis, including rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, glomerulonephritis, proliferative retinopathy, restenosis, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, fibromyalgia, psoriasis and other inflammations of the skin, osteomyelitis, Sjögren's syndrome, multiple sclerosis, diabetes, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, lupus erythematosus, sarcoidosis, systemic sclerosis, organ transplant rejection (GVHD) and chronic inflammations is described.
  • The drug can be any molecule capable of modulating or otherwise modifying cell function, including pharmaceutically active compounds. Illustrative drugs include, but are not limited to, peptides, oligopeptides, retro-inverso oligopeptides, proteins, protein analogs in which at least one non-peptide linkage replaces a peptide linkage, apoproteins, glycoproteins, enzymes, coenzymes, enzyme inhibitors, amino acids and their derivatives, receptors and other membrane proteins; antigens and antibodies thereto; haptens and antibodies thereto; hormones, lipids, phospholipids, liposomes; toxins; antibiotics; analgesics; bronchodilators; beta-blockers; antimicrobial agents; antihypertensive agents; cardiovascular agents including antiarrhythmics, cardiac glycosides, antianginals and vasodilators; central nervous system agents including stimulants, psychotropics, antimanics, and depressants; antiviral agents; antihistamines; cancer drugs including chemotherapeutic agents; tranquilizers; anti-depressants; H-2 antagonists; anticonvulsants; antinauseants; prostaglandins and prostaglandin analogs; muscle relaxants; anti-inflammatory substances; immunosuppressants, stimulants; decongestants; antiemetics; diuretics; antispasmodics; antiasthmatics; anti-Parkinson agents; expectorants; cough suppressants; mucolytics; and mineral and nutritional additives.
  • Further, the drug can be one that is cytotoxic, enhances tumor permeability, inhibits tumor cell proliferation, promotes apoptosis, decreases anti-apoptotic activity in target cells, is used to treat diseases caused by infectious agents, enhances an endogenous immune response directed to the pathogenic cells, or is useful for treating a disease state caused by any type of pathogenic cell. Additional illustrative drugs include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone, hydroxyurea, teniposide, mitomycins, discodermolides, microtubule inhibitors, epothilones, tubulysins, cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, seco-cyclopropyl benz [e]indolone, O-Ac-seco-cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, bleomycin and any other antibiotic, nitrogen mustards, nitrosureas, vinca alkaloids, such as vincristine, vinblastine, vindesine, vinorelbine and analogs and derivative thereof such as deacetylvinblastine monohydrazide (DAVLBH), colchicine, colchicine derivatives, allocolchicine, thiocolchicine, trityl cysteine, halicondrin B, dolastatins such as dolastatin 10, amanitins such as α-amanitin, camptothecin, irinotecan, and other camptothecin derivatives thereof, geldanamycin and geldanamycin derivatives, estramustine, nocodazole, MAP4, colcemid, inflammatory and proinflammatory agents, peptide and peptidomimetic signal transduction inhibitors, and any other drug or toxin. Other drugs that can be included in the conjugates described herein include rapamycins, such as sirolimus or everolimus, penicillins, cephalosporins, vancomycin, erythromycin, clindamycin, rifampin, chloramphenicol, aminoglycoside antibiotics, gentamicin, amphotericin B, acyclovir, trifluridine, ganciclovir, zidovudine, amantadine, ribavirin, and any other antimicrobial compound.
  • In another embodiment, the drug is selected from cryptophycins, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, tubulysins, aminopterin, rapamycins, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, everolimus, α-amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, epothilones, maytansines, and tyrosine kinase inhibitors, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing.
  • In another embodiment, the compounds described herein include at least two drugs (D), which are illustratively selected from vinca alkaloids, cryptophycins, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, tubulysins, aminopterin, rapamycins, such as everolimus and sirolimus, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, α-amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, epothilones, maytansines, and tyrosine kinase inhibitors, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing. In one variation, the drugs (D) are the same. In another variation, the drugs (D) are different.
  • The drug delivery conjugate compounds described herein can be administered in a combination therapy with any other known drug whether or not the additional drug is targeted. Illustrative additional drugs include, but are not limited to, peptides, oligopeptides, retro-inverso oligopeptides, proteins, protein analogs in which at least one non-peptide linkage replaces a peptide linkage, apoproteins, glycoproteins, enzymes, coenzymes, enzyme inhibitors, amino acids and their derivatives, receptors and other membrane proteins, antigens and antibodies thereto, haptens and antibodies thereto, hormones, lipids, phospholipids, liposomes, toxins, antibiotics, analgesics, bronchodilators, beta-blockers, antimicrobial agents, antihypertensive agents, cardiovascular agents including antiarrhythmics, cardiac glycosides, antianginals, vasodilators, central nervous system agents including stimulants, psychotropics, antimanics, and depressants, antiviral agents, antihistamines, cancer drugs including chemotherapeutic agents, tranquilizers, anti-depressants, H-2 antagonists, anticonvulsants, antinauseants, prostaglandins and prostaglandin analogs, muscle relaxants, anti-inflammatory substances, stimulants, decongestants, antiemetics, diuretics, antispasmodics, antiasthmatics, anti-Parkinson agents, expectorants, cough suppressants, mucolytics, and mineral and nutritional additives.
  • In another embodiment, at least one additional composition comprising a therapeutic factor can be administered to the host in combination or as an adjuvant to the above-detailed methodology, to enhance the drug delivery conjugate-mediated elimination of the population of pathogenic cells, or more than one additional therapeutic factor can be administered. The therapeutic factor can be selected from a compound capable of stimulating an endogenous immune response, a chemotherapeutic agent, or another therapeutic factor capable of complementing the efficacy of the administered drug delivery conjugate. The method of the invention can be performed by administering to the host, in addition to the above-described conjugates, compounds or compositions capable of stimulating an endogenous immune response (e.g. a cytokine) including, but not limited to, cytokines or immune cell growth factors such as interleukins 1-18, stem cell factor, basic FGF, EGF, G-CSF, GM-CSF, FLK-2 ligand, HILDA, MIP-1α, TGF-α, TGF-β, M-CSF, IFN-α, IFN-β, IFN-γ, soluble CD23, LIF, and combinations thereof.
  • Therapeutically effective combinations of these factors can be used. In one embodiment, for example, therapeutically effective amounts of IL-2, for example, in amounts ranging from about 0.1 MIU/m2/dose/day to about 15 MIU/m2/dose/day in a multiple dose daily regimen, and IFN-α, for example, in amounts ranging from about 0.1 MIU/m2/dose/day to about 7.5 MIU/m2/dose/day in a multiple dose daily regimen, can be used along with the drug delivery conjugates to eliminate, reduce, or neutralize pathogenic cells in a host animal harboring the pathogenic cells (MIU=million international units; m2=approximate body surface area of an average human). In another embodiment IL-12 and IFN-α are used in the above-described therapeutically effective amounts for interleukins and interferons, and in yet another embodiment IL-15 and IFN-α are used in the above described therapeutically effective amounts for interleukins and interferons. In an alternate embodiment IL-2, IFN-α or IFN-γ, and GM-CSF are used in combination in the above described therapeutically effective amounts. The invention also contemplates the use of any other effective combination of cytokines including combinations of other interleukins and interferons and colony stimulating factors.
  • Chemotherapeutic agents, which are, for example, cytotoxic themselves or can work to enhance tumor permeability, are also suitable for use in the method of the invention in combination with the drug delivery conjugate compounds. Such chemotherapeutic agents include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone, hydroxyurea, teniposide, mitomycins, discodermolides, microtubule inhibitors, epothilones, tubulysin, cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, seco-cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, O-Ac-seco-cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, bleomycin and any other antibiotic, nitrogen mustards, nitrosureas, vincristine, vinblastine, and analogs and derivative thereof such as deacetylvinblastine monohydrazide, colchicine, colchicine derivatives, allocolchicine, thiocolchicine, trityl cysteine, Halicondrin B, dolastatins such as dolastatin 10, amanitins such as α-amanitin, camptothecin, irinotecan, and other camptothecin derivatives thereof, geldanamycin and geldanamycin derivatives, estramustine, nocodazole, MAP4, colcemid, inflammatory and proinflammatory agents, peptide and peptidomimetic signal transduction inhibitors, and any other art-recognized drug or toxin. Other drugs that can be used in accordance with the invention include penicillins, cephalosporins, vancomycin, erythromycin, clindamycin, rifampin, chloramphenicol, aminoglycoside antibiotics, gentamicin, amphotericin B, acyclovir, trifluridine, ganciclovir, zidovudine, amantadine, ribavirin, maytansines and analogs and derivatives thereof, gemcitabine, and any other art-recognized antimicrobial compound.
  • As used herein, the term “linker” includes is a chain of atoms that connects two or more functional parts of a molecule to form a conjugate. Illustratively, the chain of atoms is selected from C, N, O, S, Si, and P, or C, N, O, S, and P, C, N, O, and S. The chain of atoms covalently connects different functional capabilities of the conjugate, such as binding ligands, drugs, diagnostic agents, imaging agents, and the like. The linker may have a wide variety of lengths, such as in the range from about 2 to about 100 atoms in the contiguous backbone. The atoms used in forming the linker may be combined in all chemically relevant ways, such as chains of carbon atoms forming alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups, and the like; chains of carbon and oxygen atoms forming ethers, polyoxyalkylene groups, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming esters and carbonates, and the like; chains of carbon and nitrogen atoms forming amines, imines, polyamines, hydrazines, hydrazones, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming amides, ureas, semicarbazides, carbazides, and the like; chains of carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen atoms forming alkoxyamines, alkoxylamines, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming urethanes, amino acids, acyloxylamines, hydroxamic acids, and the like; and many others. In addition, it is to be understood that the atoms forming the chain in each of the foregoing illustrative embodiments may be either saturated or unsaturated, thus forming single, double, or triple bonds, such that for example, alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, imines, and the like may be radicals that are included in the linker. In addition, it is to be understood that the atoms forming the linker may also be cyclized upon each other or be part of cyclic structure to form divalent cyclic structures that form the linker, including cyclo alkanes, cyclic ethers, cyclic amines, and other heterocycles, arylenes, heteroarylenes, and the like in the linker. In this latter arrangement, it is to be understood that the linker length may be defined by any pathway through the one or more cyclic structures. Illustratively, the linker length is defined by the shortest pathway through the each one of the cyclic structures. It is to be understood that the linkers may be optionally substituted at any one or more of the open valences along the chain of atoms, such as optional substituents on any of the carbon, nitrogen, silicon, or phosphorus atoms. It is also to be understood that the linker may connect the two or more functional parts of a molecule to form a conjugate at any open valence, and it is not necessary that any of the two or more functional parts of a molecule forming the conjugate are attached at any apparent end of the linker.
  • In another embodiment, a folate-linker radical is described having the following formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00030
  • wherein m, n, and q are integers that are independently selected from the range of 0 to about 8; AA is an amino acid, R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a nitrogen protecting group, and drugs are optionally attached at the (*) atoms. In one aspect, AA is a naturally occurring amino acid of either the natural or unnatural configuration. In another aspect, one or more of AA is a hydrophilic amino acid. In another aspect, one or more of AA is Asp and/or Arg. In another aspect, the integer n is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 2 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 3 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 4 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 5 or greater. In another aspect, the integer q is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer q is 1. In another aspect, the integer m is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer m is 1. In another aspect, R1 is hydrogen. The drugs and optionally additional linkers and additional receptor-binding ligands may be connected to the above formula at the free NH side chains of the 2,ω-diaminoalkanoic acid fragments, or at the terminal carboxylate as indicated by the free valences therein. It is to be understood that every combination of the foregoing aspects is described herein as further illustrative embodiments of the invention. For example, in another embodiment, n is 1 or greater, and m is one or greater; or n is 1 or greater, m is 1, and q is 1; and so forth.
  • In another embodiment, a folate-linker radical is described having the following formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00031
  • wherein m, n, q, and p are integers that are independently selected from the range of 0 to about 8; AA is an amino acid, R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a nitrogen protecting group, and drugs are optionally attached at the (*) atoms. In one aspect, AA is as a naturally occurring amino acid of either the natural or unnatural configuration. In another aspect, one or more of AA is a hydrophilic amino acid. In another aspect, one or more of AA is Asp and/or Arg. In another aspect, the integer n is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 2 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 3 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 4 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 5 or greater. In another aspect, the integers q and/or p are 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer integers q and/or p are 1. In another aspect, the integer m is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer m is 1. In another aspect, R1 is hydrogen. The drugs and optionally additional linkers and additional receptor-binding ligands may be connected to the above formula at the free NH side chains of the 2,ω-diaminoalkanoic acid fragments, at the cysteinyl thiol groups, or at the terminal carboxylate, as indicated by the free valences therein. It is to be understood that every combination of the foregoing aspects is described herein as further illustrative embodiments of the invention. For example, in another embodiment, n is 1 or greater, and m is one or greater; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, and q is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, and p is 1; and so forth.
  • In another embodiment, a folate-linker radical is described having the following formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00032
  • wherein m, n, q, p, and r are integers that are independently selected from the range of 0 to about 8; AA is an amino acid, R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a nitrogen protecting group, and drugs are optionally attached at the (*) atoms. In one aspect, AA is as a naturally occurring amino acid of either the natural or unnatural configuration. In another aspect, one or more of AA is a hydrophilic amino acid. In another aspect, one or more of AA is Asp and/or Arg. In another aspect, the integer n is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 2 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 3 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 4 or greater. In another aspect, the integer n is 5 or greater. In another aspect, the integers q and/or p and/or r are 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integers q and/or p and/or r are 1. In another aspect, the integer m is 1 or greater. In another aspect, the integer m is 1. In another aspect, R1 is hydrogen. The drugs and optionally additional linkers and additional receptor-binding ligands may be connected to the above formula at the free NH side chains of the 2,ω-diaminoalkanoic acid fragments, at the cyteinyl thiol groups, at the serinyl hydroxy groups, or at the terminal carboxylate, as indicated by the free valences therein. It is to be understood that every combination of the foregoing aspects is described herein as further illustrative embodiments of the invention. For example, in another embodiment, n is 1 or greater, and m is one or greater; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, and q is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, and p is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, and r is 1; or n is 2 or greater, m is 1, q is 1, p is 1, and r is 1; and so forth.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker includes one or more divalent hydrophilic radicals, as described herein, also called linkers or spacer linkers. It is appreciated that the arrangement and/or orientation of the various hydrophilic linkers may be in a linear or branched fashion, or both. For example, the hydrophilic linkers may form the backbone of the linker forming the conjugate between the ligand and the one or more drugs. Alternatively, the hydrophilic portion of the linker may be pendant to or attached to the backbone of the chain of atoms connecting the binding ligand B to the one or more drugs D. In this latter arrangement, the hydrophilic portion may be proximal or distal to the backbone chain of atoms.
  • In another embodiment, the linker is more or less linear, and the hydrophilic groups are arranged largely in a series to form a chain-like linker in the conjugate. Said another way, the hydrophilic groups form some or all of the backbone of the linker in this linear embodiment.
  • In another embodiment, the linker is branched with hydrophilic groups. In this branched embodiment, the hydrophilic groups may be proximal to the backbone or distal to the backbone. In each of these arrangements, the linker is more spherical or cylindrical in shape. In one variation, the linker is shaped like a bottle-brush. In one aspect, the backbone of the linker is formed by a linear series of amides, and the hydrophilic portion of the linker is formed by a parallel arrangement of branching side chains, such as by connecting monosaccharides, sulfonates, and the like, and derivatives and analogs thereof.
  • It is understood that the linker may be neutral or ionizable under certain conditions, such as physiological conditions encountered in vivo. For ionizable linkers, under the selected conditions, the linker may deprotonate to form a negative ion, or alternatively become protonated to form a positive ion. It is appreciated that more than one deprotonation or protonation event may occur. In addition, it is understood that the same linker may deprotonate and protonate to form inner salts or zwitterionic compounds.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers are neutral, an in particular neutral under physiological conditions, the linkers do not significantly protonate nor deprotonate. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that the protonation capability is condition dependent. In one aspect, the conditions are physiological conditions, and the linker is protonated in vivo. In another embodiment, the spacers include both regions that are neutral and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. In another embodiment, the spacers include both regions that may be deprotonated to carry one or more negative charges and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that in this latter embodiment that zwitterions or inner salts may be formed.
  • In one aspect, the regions of the linkers that may be deprotonated to carry a negative charge include carboxylic acids, such as aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and longer chain carboxylic acid groups, and sulfuric acid esters, such as alkyl esters of sulfuric acid. In another aspect, the regions of the linkers that may be protonated to carry a positive charge include amino groups, such as polyaminoalkylenes including ethylene diamines, propylene diamines, butylene diamines and the like, and/or heterocycles including pyrollidines, piperidines, piperazines, and other amino groups, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the regions of the linkers that are neutral include poly hydroxyl groups, such as sugars, carbohydrates, saccharides, inositols, and the like, and/or polyether groups, such as polyoxyalkylene groups including polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene, and the like.
  • In one embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and have a carbon/oxygen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less. In one aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of ether functional groups. In another aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups. Illustrative fragments and radicals that may be used to form such linkers include polyhydroxyl compounds such as carbohydrates, polyether compounds such as polyethylene glycol units, and acid groups such as carboxyl and alkyl sulfuric acids. In one variation, oligoamide spacers, and the like may also be included in the linker.
  • Illustrative divalent hydrophilic linkers include carbohydrates such as saccharopeptides as described herein that include both a peptide feature and sugar feature; glucuronides, which may be incorporated via [2+3] Huisgen cyclization, also known as click chemistry; β-alkyl glycosides, such as of 2-deoxyhexapyranoses (2-deoxyglucose, 2-deoxyglucuronide, and the like), and β-alkyl mannopyranosides. Illustrative PEG groups include those of a specific length range from about 4 to about 20 PEG groups. Illustrative alkyl sulfuric acid esters may also be introduced with click chemistry directly into the backbone. Illustrative oligoamide spacers include EDTA and DTPA spacers, β-amino acids, and the like.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more polyethers, such as the linkers of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00033
  • where m is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 8; p is an integer selected 1 to about 10; and n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, m is independently in each instance 1 to about 3. In another aspect, n is 1 in each instance. In another aspect, p is independently in each instance about 4 to about 6. Illustratively, the corresponding polypropylene polyethers corresponding to the foregoing are contemplated herein and may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers. In addition, it is appreciated that mixed polyethylene and polypropylene polyethers may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers. Further, cyclic variations of the foregoing polyether compounds, such as those that include tetrahydrofuranyl, 1,3-dioxanes, 1,4-dioxanes, and the like are contemplated herein.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups, such as linkers that incorporate monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, polysaccharides, and the like. It is to be understood that the polyhydroxyl containing spacer linkers comprises a plurality of —(CROH)— groups, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00034
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00035
  • wherein R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 5, or from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00036
  • wherein R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 5, or from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following cyclic polyhydroxyl groups:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00037
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00038
  • wherein n is an integer from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer from 1 to about 4. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 2 or 3. It is understood that all stereochemical forms of such sections of the linkers are contemplated herein. For example, in the above formula, the section may be derived from ribose, xylose, glucose, mannose, galactose, or other sugar and retain the stereochemical arrangements of pendant hydroxyl and alkyl groups present on those molecules. In addition, it is to be understood that in the foregoing formulae, various deoxy compounds are also contemplated. Illustratively, compounds of the following formulae are contemplated:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00039
  • wherein n is equal to or less than r, such as when r is 2 or 3, n is 1 or 2, or 1, 2, or 3, respectively.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more polyhydroxyl radicals of the following formula:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00040
  • wherein n and r are each an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the linker includes one or more polyhydroxyl compounds of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00041
  • It is understood that all stereochemical forms of such sections of the linkers are contemplated herein. For example, in the above formula, the section may be derived from ribose, xylose, glucose, mannose, galactose, or other sugar and retain the stereochemical arrangements of pendant hydroxyl and alkyl groups present on those molecules.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more polyhydroxyl groups that are spaced away from the backbone of the linker. In one embodiment, such carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups are connected to the back bone by a triazole group, forming triazole-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers. Illustratively, the linker includes fragments of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00042
  • wherein n, m, and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5. In one illustrative aspect, m is independently 2 or 3 in each instance. In another aspect, r is 1 in each instance. In another aspect, n is 1 in each instance. In one variation, the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different heteroaryl group, including but not limited to, pyrrole, pyrazole, 1,2,4-triazole, furan, oxazole, isoxazole, thienyl, thiazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, and the like. Similarly, divalent 6-membered ring heteroaryl groups are contemplated. Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00043
  • wherein n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups connected to the back bone by an amide group, forming amide-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers. Illustratively, such linkers include fragments of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00044
  • wherein n is an integer selected from 1 to about 3, and m is an integer selected from 1 to about 22. In one illustrative aspect, n is 1 or 2. In another illustrative aspect, m is selected from about 6 to about 10, illustratively 8. In one variation, the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different functional group, including but not limited to, esters, ureas, carbamates, acylhydrazones, and the like. Similarly, cyclic variations are contemplated. Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00045
  • wherein n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00046
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00047
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00048
  • wherein R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00049
  • wherein R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 2 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00050
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00051
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00052
  • wherein m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00053
  • wherein m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 2 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00054
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00055
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00056
  • wherein m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises a combination of backbone and branching side motifs such as is illustrated by the following formulae
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00057
  • wherein n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 0 to about 3. The above formula are intended to represent 4, 5, 6, and even larger membered cyclic sugars. In addition, it is to be understood that the above formula may be modified to represent deoxy sugars, where one or more of the hydroxy groups present on the formulae are replaced by hydrogen, alkyl, or amino. In addition, it is to be understood that the corresponding carbonyl compounds are contemplated by the above formulae, where one or more of the hydroxyl groups is oxidized to the corresponding carbonyl. In addition, in this illustrative embodiment, the pyranose includes both carboxyl and amino functional groups and (a) can be inserted into the backbone and (b) can provide synthetic handles for branching side chains in variations of this embodiment. Any of the pendant hydroxyl groups may be used to attach other chemical fragments, including additional sugars to prepare the corresponding oligosaccharides. Other variations of this embodiment are also contemplated, including inserting the pyranose or other sugar into the backbone at a single carbon, i.e. a spiro arrangement, at a geminal pair of carbons, and like arrangements. For example, one or two ends of the linker, or the drug D, or the binding ligand B may be connected to the sugar to be inserted into the backbone in a 1,1; 1,2; 1,3; 1,4; 2,3, or other arrangement.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen, and have a carbon/nitrogen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less. In one aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of amino functional groups.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more amino groups of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00058
  • where n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance. In another aspect, the integer n is 1 in each instance.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L comprises one or more sulfuric acid esters, such as an alkyl ester of sulfuric acid. Illustratively, the linker includes the following formula(e):
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00059
  • where n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3. Illustratively, n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance.
  • It is understood, that in such polyhydroxyl, polyamino, carboxylic acid, sulfuric acid, and like linkers that include free hydrogens bound to heteroatoms, one or more of those free hydrogen atoms may be protected with the appropriate hydroxyl, amino, or acid protecting group, respectively, or alternatively may be blocked as the corresponding pro-drugs, the latter of which are selected for the particular use, such as pro-drugs that release the parent drug under general or specific physiological conditions.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises one or more of the following divalent radicals:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00060
  • wherein n is an integer from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer from 1 to about 4, as described above.
  • It is to be further understood that in the foregoing embodiments, open positions, such as (*) atoms are locations for attachment of the binding ligand (B) or any drug (D) to be delivered. In addition, it is to be understood that such attachment of either or both of B and any D may be direct or through an intervening linker comprising one or more of the radicals described herein. In addition, (*) atoms may form releasable linkers with any drug D, or other portion of the linker L.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises at least three carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more aspartic acids. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more glutamic acids. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, one or more glutamic acids, one or more aspartic acids, and one or more beta amino alanines. In a series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines. In another series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L includes a hydrophilic spacer linker comprising one or more divalent 1,4-piperazines that are included in the chain of atoms connecting at least one of the binding ligands (L) with at least one of the drugs (D). In one variation, the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another variation, the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more aspartic acids. In another variation, the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more glutamic acids. In a series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines. In another series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more oligoamide hydrophilic spacers, such as but not limited to aminoethylpiperazinylacetamide.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L includes a hydrophilic spacer linker comprising one or more triazole linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more amide linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more PEG groups and one or more cysteines. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more EDTE derivatives.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L includes a divalent radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00061
  • wherein * indicates the point of attachment to a folate and ** indicates the point of attachment to a drug; and F and G are each independently 1, 2, 3 or 4 are described.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker L includes a trivalent radical of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00062
  • wherein *, **, *** each indicate points of attachment to the folate receptor binding moiety B, and the one or more drugs D. It is to be understood that when there are fewer drugs, *, **, *** are substituted with hydrogen or a heteroatom. F and G are each independently 1, 2, 3 or 4; and W1 is NH or O is described. In another aspect, ml is 0 or 1.
  • In any of the embodiments described herein heteroatom linkers can also be included in the polyvalent linker L, such as —NR1R2—, oxygen, sulfur, and the formulae-(NHR1NHR2)—, —SO—, —(SO2)—, and —N(R3)O—, wherein R1, R2, and R3 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and alkoxyalkyl. It is to be understood that the heteroatom linkers may be used to covalently attach any of the radicals described herein, including drug radicals D to the polyvalent linker, ligand radicals B to the polyvalent linker, or various di and polyvalent radicals that from the polyvalent linker L.
  • Illustrative additional bivalent radicals that can be used to form part of the linker are as follows.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00063
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00064
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00065
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00066
  • The polyvalent linker L is a releasable linker.
  • As used herein, the term “releasable linker” refers to a linker that includes at least one bond that can be broken under physiological conditions when the compounds described herein are delivered to or inside of the target cell. Accordingly, the term releasable linker does not generally refer simply to a bond that is labile in vivo, such as in serum, plasma, the gastrointestinal tract, or liver, unless those systems are the target for the cell surface receptor binding ligand. However, after delivery and/or selective targeting, releasable linkers may be cleaved by any process that includes at least one bond being broken in the linker or at the covalent attachment of the linker to B or any D under physiological conditions, such as by having one or more pH-labile, acid-labile, base-labile, oxidatively labile, metabolically labile, biochemically labile, and/or enzyme-labile bonds. It is appreciated that such physiological conditions resulting in bond breaking do not necessarily include a biological or metabolic process, and instead may include a standard chemical reaction, such as a hydrolysis reaction, for example, at physiological pH, or as a result of compartmentalization into a cellular organelle such as an endosome having a lower pH than cytosolic pH.
  • It is understood that a cleavable bond can connect two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker, and/or connect other linkers with B, and/or any D, as described herein, at any ends of the releasable linker. In the case where a cleavable bond connects two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker, following breakage of the bond, the releasable linker is broken into two or more fragments. Alternatively, in the case where a cleavable bond is between the releasable linker and another moiety, such as an additional heteroatom, a spacer linker, another releasable portion of the linker, any D, or B, following breakage of the bond, the releasable linker is separated from the other moiety.
  • Illustrative radicals that themselves include a cleavable bond, or form a cleavable bond with B and/or any D hemiacetals and sulfur variations thereof, acetals and sulfur variations thereof, hemiaminals, aminals, and the like, or which can be formed from methylene fragments substituted with at least one heteroatom, such as 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, and the like. Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, haloalkylenecarbonyl, and the like. Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, (diarylsilyl)aryl, and the like. Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include oxycarbonyloxy, oxycarbonyloxyalkyl, sulfonyloxy, oxysulfonylalkyl, and the like. Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, carbonylcycloalkylideniminyl, and the like. Illustrative releasable linkers described herein include polyvalent linkers that include alkylenethio, alkylenearylthio, and carbonylalkylthio, and the like. Each of the foregoing fragments is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined herein.
  • The substituents X2 can be alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R4-carbonyl, R5-carbonylalkyl, R6-acylamino, and R7-acylaminoalkyl, wherein R4 and R5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R6 and R7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides. In this embodiment the heteroatom linker can be nitrogen, and the substituent X2 and the heteroatom linker can be taken together with the releasable linker to which they are bound to form an heterocycle.
  • The heterocycles can be pyrrolidines, piperidines, oxazolidines, isoxazolidines, thiazolidines, isothiazolidines, pyrrolidinones, piperidinones, oxazolidinones, isoxazolidinones, thiazolidinones, isothiazolidinones, and succinimides.
  • In any of the embodiments described herein, the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, and 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl to form an acetal or ketal, wherein each of the fragments is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined herein. Alternatively, the methylene or alkylene is substituted with an optionally-substituted aryl.
  • In any of the embodiments described herein, the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to sulfonylalkyl to form an alkylsulfonate.
  • In any of the embodiments described herein, the releasable linker may include nitrogen bonded to iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, and carbonylcycloalkylideniminyl to form an hydrazone, each of which is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined herein. In an alternate configuration, the hydrazone may be acylated with a carboxylic acid derivative, an orthoformate derivative, or a carbamoyl derivative to form releasable linkers containing various acylhydrazones.
  • In any of the embodiments described herein, the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, and (diarylsilyl)aryl to form a silanol, each of which is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined herein.
  • In any of the embodiments described herein, the releasable linker may include nitrogen bonded to carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl to form an amide, or alternatively an amide with a drug nitrogen.
  • In any of the embodiments described herein, the releasable linker may include oxygen bonded to carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl to form an ester, or alternatively an ester with drug oxygen.
  • It is to be understood that the bivalent spacer linkers may be combined in any chemically relevant way, either directly or via an intervening heteroatom to construct the releasable linkers described herein. It is further understood that the nature of the arrangement of spacer and heteroatom linkers defines where the releasable linker will cleave in vivo. For example, two spacer linkers that terminate in a sulfur atom when combined form a disulfide, which is the cleavable bond in the releasable linker formed thereby.
  • For example, in another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxymethyloxy moiety, where the methyl is optionally substituted with alkyl or substituted aryl.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms an acylaziridine with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 1-alkoxycycloalkylenoxy moiety.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises an alkyleneaminocarbonyl(dicarboxylarylene)carboxylate.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a dithioalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms a hydrazone with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thioalkylsulfonylalkyl(disubstituted silyl)oxy, where the disubstituted silyl is substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a plurality of spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids and stereoisomers thereof.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the drug and the aryl is optionally substituted.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 4-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the drug, and the aryl is optionally substituted.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxyalkyloxyalkylidene, where the alkylidene forms an hydrazone with the drug, each alkyl is independently selected, and the oxyalkyloxy is optionally substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkyloxycarbonylhydrazide.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2- or 3-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the drug, and the alkyl is ethyl.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2- or 3-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the drug. In another aspect, the alkyl is ethyl.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the drug. In another aspect, the alkyl is ethyl.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 2-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate or a carbamoylaziridine with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker comprises a 4-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate or a carbamoylaziridine with the drug.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein comprise divalent radicals of formulae (II)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00067
  • where n is an integer selected from 1 to about 4; Ra and Rb are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl, including lower alkyl such as C1-C4 alkyl that are optionally branched; or Ra and Rb are taken together with the attached carbon atom to form a carbocyclic ring; R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other bivalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein comprise divalent radicals of formulae (III)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00068
  • where m is an integer selected from 1 to about 4; R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other bivalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein comprise divalent radicals of formulae (IV)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00069
  • where m is an integer selected from 1 to about 4; R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other divalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • In another embodiment, the compounds described herein comprise one or more radicals selected from the formulae:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00070
  • wherein X is NH, O, or S.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers herein described comprise a radical having the formula:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00071
  • Another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein comprise a radical of having the formula:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00072
  • where X is an heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, n is an integer selected from 0, 1, 2, and 3, R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy, and the like, and the symbol (*) indicates points of attachment. It is appreciated that other substituents may be present on the aryl ring, the benzyl carbon, the alkanoic acid, or the methylene bridge, including but not limited to hydroxy, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, and the like.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein comprise radicals selected from carbonyl, thionocarbonyl, alkylene, cycloalkylene, alkylenecycloalkyl, alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, alkylenesulfoxyl, sulfonylalkyl, alkylenesulfoxylalkyl, alkylenesulfonylalkyl, carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl, 1-(carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl)succinimid-3-yl, and 1-(carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of said spacer linkers is optionally substituted with one or more substituents X1;
  • wherein each substituent X1 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R4-carbonyl, R5-carbonylalkyl, R6-acylamino, and R7-acylaminoalkyl, wherein R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an amino acid, an amino acid derivative, and a peptide, and wherein R6 and R7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an amino acid, an amino acid derivative, and a peptide.
  • The compounds described herein may contain one or more chiral centers, or may otherwise be capable of existing as multiple stereoisomers. It is to be understood that in one embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular sterochemical requirement, except where specifically indicated, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be optically pure, or may be any of a variety of stereoisomeric mixtures, including racemic and other mixtures of enantiomers, other mixtures of diastereomers, and the like. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of stereoisomers may include a single stereochemical configuration at one or more chiral centers, while including mixtures of stereochemical configuration at one or more other chiral centers.
  • Similarly, the compounds described herein may include geometric centers, such as cis, trans, E, and Z double bonds. It is to be understood that in another embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular geometric isomer requirement, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be pure, or may be any of a variety of geometric isomer mixtures. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of geometric isomers may include a single configuration at one or more double bonds, while including mixtures of geometry at one or more other double bonds.
  • As used herein, the term “cell surface receptor binding or targeting ligand” generally refers to compounds that bind to and/or target receptors that are found on cell surfaces, and in particular those that are found on, over-expressed by, and/or preferentially expressed on the surface of pathogenic cells. Illustrative ligands include, but are not limited to, vitamins and vitamin receptor binding compounds.
  • Illustrative vitamin moieties include carnitine, inositol, lipoic acid, pyridoxal, ascorbic acid, niacin, pantothenic acid, folic acid, riboflavin, thiamine, biotin, vitamin B12, and the lipid soluble vitamins A, D, E and K. These vitamins, and their receptor-binding analogs and derivatives, constitute the targeting entity from which a radical can be formed for covalent attachment to the polyvalent linker L. Illustrative biotin analogs that bind to biotin receptors include, but are not limited to, biocytin, biotin sulfoxide, oxybiotin, and the like.
  • Illustrative folic acid analogs that bind to folate receptors include, but are not limited to folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, tetrahydrofolates, and their deaza and dideaza analogs. The terms “deaza” and “dideaza” analogs refer to the art-recognized analogs having a carbon atom substituted for one or two nitrogen atoms in the naturally occurring folic acid structure, or analog or derivative thereof. For example, the deaza analogs include the 1-deaza, 3-deaza, 5-deaza, 8-deaza, and 10-deaza analogs of folate, folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, and tetrahydrofolates. The dideaza analogs include, for example, 1,5-dideaza, 5,10-dideaza, 8,10-dideaza, and 5,8-dideaza analogs of folate, folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, and tetrahydrofolates. Other folates useful as complex forming ligands for this invention are the folate receptor-binding analogs aminopterin, amethopterin (also known as methotrexate), N10-methylfolate, 2-deamino-hydroxyfolate, deaza analogs such as 1-deazamethopterin or 3-deazamethopterin, and 3′,5′-dichloro-4-amino-4-deoxy-N10-methylpteroylglutamic acid (dichloromethotrexate). The foregoing folic acid analogs and/or derivatives are conventionally termed “folates,” reflecting their ability to bind with folate-receptors, and such ligands when conjugated with exogenous molecules are effective to enhance transmembrane transport, such as via folate-mediated endocytosis as described herein.
  • Additional analogs of folic acid that bind to folic acid receptors are described in US Patent Application Publication Serial Nos. 2005/0227985 and 2004/0242582, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Illustratively, such folate analogs have the general formula:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00073
  • wherein X and Y are each-independently selected from the group consisting of halo, R2, OR2, SR3, and NR4R5;
  • U, V, and W represent divalent moieties each independently selected from the group consisting of —(R6a)C═, —N═, —(R6a)C(R7a)—, and —N(R4a)—; Q is selected from the group consisting of C and CH; T is selected from the group consisting of S, O, N, and —C═C—;
  • A1 and A2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, —C(Z)—, —C(Z)O—, —OC(Z)—, —N(R4b)—, —C(Z)N(R4b)—, —N(R4b)C(Z)—, —OC(Z)N(R4b)—, —N(R4b)C(Z)O—, —N(R4b)C(Z)N(R5b)—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, —N(R4a)S(O)2—, —C(R6b)(R7b)—, —N(CCH)—, —N(CH2C≡CH)—, C1-C12 alkylene, and C1-C12 alkyeneoxy, where Z is oxygen or sulfur;
  • R1 is selected-from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, and C1-C12 alkoxy; R2, R3, R4, R4a, R4b, R5, R5b, R6b, and R7b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, C1-C12 alkoxy, C1-C12 alkanoyl, C1-C12 alkenyl, C1-C12 alkynyl, (C1-C12 alkoxy)carbonyl, and (C1-C12 alkylamino)carbonyl;
  • R6 and R7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, and C1-C12 alkoxy; or, R6 and R7 are taken together to form a carbonyl group; R6a and R7a are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, and C1-C12 alkoxy; or R6a and R7aare taken together to form a carbonyl group;
  • L is a divalent linker as described herein; and
  • n, p, r, s and t are each independently either 0 or 1.
  • As used herein, the term “amino acid” refers generally to beta, gamma, and longer amino acids, such as amino acids of the formula:

  • —N(R)—(CR′R″)q—C(O)—
  • where R is hydrogen, alkyl, acyl, or a suitable nitrogen protecting group, R′ and R″ are hydrogen or a substituent, each of which is independently selected in each occurrence, and q is an integer such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Illustratively, R′ and/or R″ independently correspond to, but are not limited to, hydrogen or the side chains present on naturally occurring amino acids, such as methyl, benzyl, hydroxymethyl, thiomethyl, carboxyl, carboxylmethyl, guanidinopropyl, and the like, and derivatives and protected derivatives thereof. The above described formula includes all stereoisomeric variations. For example, the amino acid may be selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, threonine, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “amino acid derivative” generally refers to an amino acid as defined herein where either, or both, the amino group and/or the side chain is substituted. Illustrative amino acid derivatives include prodrugs and protecting groups of the amino group and/or the side chain, such as amine, amide, hydroxy, carboxylic acid, and thio prodrugs and protecting groups. Additional Illustrative amino acid derivatives include substituted variations of the amino acid as described herein, such as, but not limited to, ethers and esters of hydroxy groups, amides, carbamates, and ureas of amino groups, esters, amides, and cyano derivatives of carboxylic acid groups, and the like.
  • Diagnostic agents useful in the present invention include compounds capable of labeling a cell or tissue with a contrast agent for the generation or modulation of signal intensity in biomedical imaging. Such contrast agents may be used for imaging such cells and tissues using techniques such as Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), radio-imaging, radio-diagnosis, and the like. Such labeling of the cell or tissue is illustratively accomplished by incorporation of superparamagnetic, paramagnetic, ferrimagnetic, or ferromagnetic metals, radioactive gamma-emitting, positron-emitting or photon-emitting metals, radionuclides, other radioactive elements such as certain halogen isotopes (radiohalogens), and the like, in the agent. The diagnostic agent may be a chelating agent capable of binding such metals described above, or a radio-pharmaceutical possessing an organic fragment, such as an aromatic ring, possessing a radiohalogen. Such chelating agents are known to the skilled artisan.
  • Metals useful in the invention employing such chelating agents for MRI include certain ions of chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, copper, praseodymium, neodymium, samarium, gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, ytterbium, and the like, such as Cr(III), Mn(II), Fe(II), Fe(III), and Ni(II). Metals useful in the invention employing such chelating agents for radio-imaging include certain isotopes of gallium, indium, copper, technetium, rhenium, and the like, such as 99mTc, 51Cr, 67Ga, 68Ga, 103Ru, 211Bi, 64Cu and 111In. Radiobalogens useful in the invention employing radio-pharmaceuticals include certain isotopes of fluorine, iodine, astatine, and the like, such as 18F, 123I, and 131I.
  • Visualization techniques suitable for radioimaging are known in the art, such as positron emission tomography (PET), planar or SPECT imaging, gamma cameras, scintillation, and the like.
  • One embodiment of the invention is a ligand-therapeutic agent conjugate wherein the therapeutic agent targets pathogenic cells or tissues, such as tumors, bacteria, and the like. Such therapeutic agents include chemotherapeutic agents, antimicrobial agents, or other cytotoxic agents associated with the targeting ligand. Such cytotoxic agents, may lead to the destruction of the pathogenic cell or tissue. The therapeutic agent may be a radiotherapeutic agent. These agents, like the related diagnostic agents above, may possess a chelating functionality capable of sequestering a radionuclide, such as a radioactive metal or a radioactive alpha or beta-emitting metal suitable for nuclear medicine, or alternatively a suitable functionality bearing a radiohalogen, such as an aryl group. In this context however, the metal or halogen is used for radiotherapy rather than for radiodiagnosis. Metals appropriate for such radiotherapeutic agents are known in the art, including certain isotopes of gadolinium, technetium, chromium, gallium, indium, ytterbium, lanthanum, yttrium, samarium, holmium, dysprosium, copper, ruthenium, rhenium, lead, bismuth, and the like, such as 157Gd, 64Cu, 67Cu, 186Re, 188Re, 90Y, 111In, and 177Lu. Radiohalogens are also useful in the invention for radiotherapeutic agents, including certain isotopes of iodine, astatine, and the like, such as 125I, 131I, and 211At. In another embodiment, the therapeutic may be a species suitable for neutron capture therapy, such as an organoborane moiety, comprising 10B.
  • As used herein, the terms “tubulysin” and “tubulysins” refer generally to tetrapeptide compounds of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00074
  • and pharmaceutical salts thereof, where
  • n is 1-3;
  • V is H, OR2, or halo, and W is H, OR2, or alkyl, where R2 is independently selected in each instance from H, alkyl, and C(O)R3, where R3 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; providing that R2 is not H when both V and W are OR2; or V and W are taken together with the attached carbon to form a carbonyl;
  • X═H, C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or CH2QR9; where Q is —O—, or —S—; R9═H, C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or C(O)R10; and R10═C1-6 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • Z is alkyl and Y is O; or Z is alkyl or C(O)R4, and Y is absent, where R4 is alkyl, CF3, or aryl;
  • R1 is H, or R1 represents 1 to 3 substituents selected from halo, nitro, carboxylate or a derivative thereof, cyano, hydroxyl, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, and OR6, where R6 is hydrogen or optionally substituted aryl, a phenol protecting group, a prodrug moiety, alkyl, arylalkyl, C(O)R7, P(O)(OR8)2, or SO3R8, where R7 and R8 are independently selected in each instance from H, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or R8 is a metal cation; and
  • R is OH or a leaving group, or R forms a carboxylic acid derivative, such as an acylhydrazide.
  • Conjugates of each of the foregoing tubulysins are described herein. In one variation, Z is methyl. In another variation, R1 is H. In another variation, R1 is OR6 at C(4), where R6 is H, alkyl, or COR7. In another variation, V is H, and W is OC(O)R3. In another variation, X═CH2QR9. In another variation, X═CH2OR9. In another variation, R9 is alkyl or alkenyl. In another variation, R9 is C(O)R10. In another variation, R10=optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl. In another variation, R10═C1-6 alkyl. In another variation, R forms an acylhydrazide. It is to be understood that the foregoing description is an explicit description of each chemically possible combination of variations of the general tubulysin structure. For example, it is to be understood that the foregoing description is a description of the variation where Z is methyl, and R1 is H; where R1 is OR6 at C(4), and R6 is H; where Z is methyl, R1 is OR6 at C(4), R6 is H, and X═CH2OR9; and the like.
  • Natural tubulysins are generally linear tetrapeptides consisting of N-methyl pipecolic acid (Mep), isoleucine (Ile), an unnatural aminoacid called tubuvaline (Tuv), and either an unnatural aminoacid called tubutyrosine (Tut, an analog of tyrosine) or an unnatural aminoacid called tubuphenylalanine (Tup, an analog of phenylalanine). In another embodiment, naturally occurring tubulysins, and analogs and derivatives thereof, of the following general formula are described
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00075
  • and pharmaceutical salts thereof, where R, R1, and R10 are as described in the various embodiments herein. Conjugates of each of the foregoing tubulysins are described herein.
  • In another embodiment, conjugates of naturally occurring tubulysins of the following general formula are described
  •
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00076
    Factor R10 R1
    A (CH3)2CHCH2 OH
    B CH3(CH2)2 OH
    C CH3CH2 OH
    D (CH3)2CHCH2 H
    E CH3(CH2)2 H
    F CH2CH3 H
    G (CH3)2C═CH OH
    H CH3 H
    I CH3 OH

    and pharmaceutical salts thereof.
  • In another embodiment, compounds are described herein where the conjugate is formed at the terminal carboxylic acid group or the terminal acylhydrazine group of each of the tybulysins described herein.
  • As used herein, the term “a rapamycin” is understood to include sirolimus (rapamycin), temsirolimus, everolimus, and ridaforolimus, and related compounds, and compounds of the formula
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00077
  • and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein
  • YA is ORC or OCH2CH2ORC;
  • one of RA, RB, or RC is a bond connected to L; and
  • the other two of RA, RB, and RC are independently selected in each case from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted heteroalkyl, prodrug forming group, and C(O)RD, where RD is in each instance independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, and alkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted is described.
  • As used herein, the term “alkyl” includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched. As used herein, the term “alkenyl” and “alkynyl” includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond or triple bond, respectively. It is to be understood that alkynyl may also include one or more double bonds. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments, alkyl is advantageously of limited length, including C1-C24, C1-C12, C1-C8, C1-C6, and C1-C4. Illustratively, such particularly limited length alkyl groups, including C1-C8, C1-C6, and C1-C4 may be referred to as lower alkyl. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments alkenyl and/or alkynyl may each be advantageously of limited length, including C2-C24, C2-C12, C2-C8, C2-C6, and C2-C4. Illustratively, such particularly limited length alkenyl and/or alkynyl groups, including C2-C8, C2-C6, and C2-C4 may be referred to as lower alkenyl and/or alkynyl. It is appreciated herein that shorter alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl groups may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior. In embodiments of the invention described herein, it is to be understood, in each case, that the recitation of alkyl refers to alkyl as defined herein, and optionally lower alkyl. In embodiments of the invention described herein, it is to be understood, in each case, that the recitation of alkenyl refers to alkenyl as defined herein, and optionally lower alkenyl. In embodiments of the invention described herein, it is to be understood, in each case, that the recitation of alkynyl refers to alkynyl as defined herein, and optionally lower alkynyl. Illustrative alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups are, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, 3-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, and the like, and the corresponding groups containing one or more double and/or triple bonds, or a combination thereof.
  • As used herein, the term “alkylene” includes a divalent chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched. As used herein, the term “alkenylene” and “alkynylene” includes a divalent chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond or triple bond, respectively. It is to be understood that alkynylene may also include one or more double bonds. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments, alkylene is advantageously of limited length, including C1-C24, C1-C12, C1-C8, C1-C6, and C1-C4. Illustratively, such particularly limited length alkylene groups, including C1-C8, C1-C6, and C1-C4 may be referred to as lower alkylene. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments alkenylene and/or alkynylene may each be advantageously of limited length, including C2-C24, C2-C12, C2-C8, C2-C6, and C2-C4. Illustratively, such particularly limited length alkenylene and/or alkynylene groups, including C2-C8, C2-C6, and C2-C4 may be referred to as lower alkenylene and/or alkynylene. It is appreciated herein that shorter alkylene, alkenylene, and/or alkynylene groups may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior. In embodiments of the invention described herein, it is to be understood, in each case, that the recitation of alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene refers to alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene as defined herein, and optionally lower alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene. Illustrative alkyl groups are, but not limited to, methylene, ethylene, n-propylene, isopropylene, n-butylene, isobutylene, sec-butylene, pentylene, 1,2-pentylene, 1,3-pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “cycloalkyl” includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain is cyclic. It is to be understood that cycloalkylalkyl is a subset of cycloalkyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic. Illustrative cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 2-methylcyclopropyl, cyclopentyleth-2-yl, adamantyl, and the like. As used herein, the term “cycloalkenyl” includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond, where at least a portion of the chain in cyclic. It is to be understood that the one or more double bonds may be in the cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl and/or the non-cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkenylalkyl and cycloalkylalkenyl are each subsets of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic. Illustrative cycloalkenyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexylethen-2-yl, cycloheptenylpropenyl, and the like. It is to be further understood that chain forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl is advantageously of limited length, including C3-C24, C3-C12, C3-C8, C3-C6, and C5-C6. It is appreciated herein that shorter alkyl and/or alkenyl chains forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl, respectively, may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior.
  • As used herein, the term “heteroalkyl” includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, and is optionally branched. Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium. As used herein, the term “cycloheteroalkyl” including heterocyclyl and heterocycle, includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, such as heteroalkyl, and is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain is cyclic. Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium. Illustrative cycloheteroalkyl include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “aryl” includes monocyclic and polycyclic aromatic carbocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted. Illustrative aromatic carbocyclic groups described herein include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, and the like. As used herein, the term “heteroaryl” includes aromatic heterocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted. Illustrative aromatic heterocyclic groups include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl, quinolinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, thienyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “amino” includes the group NH2, alkylamino, and dialkylamino, where the two alkyl groups in dialkylamino may be the same or different, i.e. alkylalkylamino. Illustratively, amino includes methylamino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, methylethylamino, and the like. In addition, it is to be understood that when amino modifies or is modified by another term, such as aminoalkyl, or acylamino, the above variations of the term amino are included therein. Illustratively, aminoalkyl includes H2N-alkyl, methylaminoalkyl, ethylaminoalkyl, dimethylaminoalkyl, methylethylaminoalkyl, and the like. Illustratively, acylamino includes acylmethylamino, acylethylamino, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “amino and derivatives thereof” includes amino as described herein, and alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, heteroalkylamino, heteroalkenylamino, heteroalkynylamino, cycloalkylamino, cycloalkenylamino, cycloheteroalkylamino, cycloheteroalkenylamino, arylamino, arylalkylamino, arylalkenylamino, arylalkynylamino, heteroarylamino, heteroarylalkylamino, heteroarylalkenylamino, heteroarylalkynylamino, acylamino, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted. The term “amino derivative” also includes urea, carbamate, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “hydroxy and derivatives thereof” includes OH, and alkyloxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, heteroalkyloxy, heteroalkenyloxy, heteroalkynyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, cycloalkenyloxy, cycloheteroalkyloxy, cycloheteroalkenyloxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, arylalkenyloxy, arylalkynyloxy, heteroaryloxy, heteroarylalkyloxy, heteroarylalkenyloxy, heteroarylalkynyloxy, acyloxy, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted. The term “hydroxy derivative” also includes carbamate, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “thio and derivatives thereof” includes SH, and alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, heteroalkylthio, heteroalkenylthio, heteroalkynylthio, cycloalkylthio, cycloalkenylthio, cycloheteroalkylthio, cycloheteroalkenylthio, arylthio, arylalkylthio, arylalkenylthio, arylalkynylthio, heteroarylthio, heteroarylalkylthio, heteroarylalkenylthio, heteroarylalkynylthio, acylthio, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted. The term “thio derivative” also includes thiocarbamate, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “acyl” includes formyl, and alkylcarbonyl, alkenylcarbonyl, alkynylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroalkenylcarbonyl, heteroalkynylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, cycloalkenylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkenylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl, arylalkenylcarbonyl, arylalkynylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, heteroarylalkylcarbonyl, heteroarylalkenylcarbonyl, heteroarylalkynylcarbonyl, acylcarbonyl, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • As used herein, the term “carbonyl and derivatives thereof” includes the group C(O), C(S), C(NH) and substituted amino derivatives thereof.
  • As used herein, the term “carboxylic acid and derivatives thereof” includes the group CO2H and salts thereof, and esters and amides thereof, and CN.
  • The term “optionally substituted” as used herein includes the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the radical that is optionally substituted. Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxyl, halo, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like. Illustratively, any of amino, hydroxyl, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
  • As used herein, the terms “optionally substituted aryl” and “optionally substituted heteroaryl” include the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the aryl or heteroaryl that is optionally substituted. Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxy, halo, thio, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like. Illustratively, any of amino, hydroxy, thio, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
  • Illustrative substituents include, but are not limited to, a radical —(CH2)xZX, where x is an integer from 0-6 and ZX is selected from halogen, hydroxy, alkanoyloxy, including C1-C6 alkanoyloxy, optionally substituted aroyloxy, alkyl, including C1-C6 alkyl, alkoxy, including C1-C6 alkoxy, cycloalkyl, including C3-C8 cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, including C3-C8 cycloalkoxy, alkenyl, including C2-C6 alkenyl, alkynyl, including C2-C6 alkynyl, haloalkyl, including C1-C6 haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, including C1-C6 haloalkoxy, halocycloalkyl, including C3-C8 halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, including C3-C8 halocycloalkoxy, amino, C1-C6 alkylamino, (C1-C6 alkyl)(C1-C6 alkyl)amino, alkylcarbonylamino, N-(C1-C6 alkyl)alkylcarbonylamino, aminoalkyl, C1-C6 alkylaminoalkyl, (C1-C6 alkyl)(C1-C6 alkyl)aminoalkyl, alkylcarbonylaminoalkyl, N-(C1-C6 alkyl)alkylcarbonylaminoalkyl, cyano, and nitro; or ZX is selected from —CO2R4 and —CONR5R6, where R4, R5, and R6 are each independently selected in each occurrence from hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, aryl-C1-C6 alkyl, and heteroaryl-C1-C6 alkyl.
  • As used herein the term “radical” with reference to, for example, the cell surface receptor binding and/or targeting ligand, and/or the independently selected drug, refers to a cell surface receptor binding and/or targeting ligand, and/or an independently selected drug, as described herein, where one or more atoms or groups, such as a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group on a heteroatom, and the like, is removed to provide a radical for conjugation to the polyvalent linker L. Such ligand radicals and drug radicals may also be referred herein as ligand analogs and drug analogs, respectively.
  • As used herein, the term “leaving group” refers to a reactive functional group that generates an electrophilic site on the atom to which it is attached such that nucleophiles may be added to the electrophilic site on the atom. Illustrative leaving groups include, but are not limited to, halogens, optionally substituted phenols, acyloxy groups, sulfonoxy groups, and the like. It is to be understood that such leaving groups may be on alkyl, acyl, and the like. Such leaving groups may also be referred to herein as activating groups, such as when the leaving group is present on acyl. In addition, conventional peptide, amide, and ester coupling agents, such as but not limited to PyBop, BOP-Cl, BOP, pentafluorophenol, isobutylchloroformate, and the like, form various intermediates that include a leaving group, as defined herein, on a carbonyl group.
  • It is to be understood that in every instance disclosed herein, the recitation of a range of integers for any variable describes the recited range, every individual member in the range, and every possible subrange for that variable. For example, the recitation that n is an integer from 0 to 8, describes that range, the individual and selectable values of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8, such as n is 0, or n is 1, or n is 2, etc. In addition, the recitation that n is an integer from 0 to 8 also describes each and every subrange, each of which may for the basis of a further embodiment, such as n is an integer from 1 to 8, from 1 to 7, from 1 to 6, from 2 to 8, from 2 to 7, from 1 to 3, from 2 to 4, etc.
  • As used herein, the term “composition” generally refers to any product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combinations of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. It is to be understood that the compositions described herein may be prepared from isolated compounds described herein or from salts, solutions, hydrates, solvates, and other forms of the compounds described herein. It is appreciated that certain functional groups, such as the hydroxy, amino, and like groups form complexes and/or coordination compounds with water and/or various solvents, in the various physical forms of the compounds. It is also to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various amorphous, non-amorphous, partially crystalline, crystalline, and/or other morphological forms of the compounds described herein. It is also to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various hydrates and/or solvates of the compounds described herein. Accordingly, such pharmaceutical compositions that recite compounds described herein are to be understood to include each of, or any combination of, the various morphological forms and/or solvate or hydrate forms of the compounds described herein. In addition, it is to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various co-crystals of the compounds described herein.
  • Illustratively, compositions may include one or more carriers, diluents, and/or excipients. The compounds described herein, or compositions containing them, may be formulated in a therapeutically effective amount in any conventional dosage forms appropriate for the methods described herein. The compounds described herein, or compositions containing them, including such formulations, may be administered by a wide variety of conventional routes for the methods described herein, and in a wide variety of dosage formats, utilizing known procedures (see generally, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, (21st ed., 2005)).
  • The term “therapeutically effective amount” as used herein, refers to that amount of active compound or pharmaceutical agent that elicits the biological or medicinal response in a tissue system, animal or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician, which includes alleviation of the symptoms of the disease or disorder being treated. In one aspect, the therapeutically effective amount is that which may treat or alleviate the disease or symptoms of the disease at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment. However, it is to be understood that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions described herein may be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific therapeutically-effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, gender and diet of the patient: the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidentally with the specific compound employed; and like factors well known to the researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician of ordinary skill.
  • The term “administering” as used herein includes all means of introducing the compounds and compositions described herein to the patient, including, but are not limited to, oral (po), intravenous (iv), intramuscular (im), subcutaneous (sc), transdermal, inhalation, buccal, ocular, sublingual, vaginal, rectal, and the like. The compounds and compositions described herein may be administered in unit dosage forms and/or formulations containing conventional nontoxic pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, adjuvants, and vehicles.
  • Illustrative formats for oral administration include tablets, capsules, elixirs, syrups, and the like.
  • Illustrative routes for parenteral administration include intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, epidurial, intraurethral, intrasternal, intramuscular and subcutaneous, as well as any other art recognized route of parenteral administration.
  • Depending upon the disease as described herein, the route of administration and/or whether the compounds and/or compositions are administered locally or systemically, a wide range of permissible dosages are contemplated herein, including doses falling in the range from about 1 μg/kg to about 1 g/kg. The dosages may be single or divided, and may administered according to a wide variety of protocols, including q.d., b.i.d., t.i.d., or even every other day, once a week, once a month, once a quarter, and the like. In each of these cases it is understood that the therapeutically effective amounts described herein correspond to the instance of administration, or alternatively to the total daily, weekly, month, or quarterly dose, as determined by the dosing protocol.
  • The term “prodrug” as used herein generally refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates a biologically active compound as a result of one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a combination thereof. In vivo, the prodrug is typically acted upon by an enzyme (such as esterases, amidases, phosphatases, and the like), simple biological chemistry, or other process in vivo to liberate or regenerate the more pharmacologically active drug. This activation may occur through the action of an endogenous host enzyme or a non-endogenous enzyme that is administered to the host preceding, following, or during administration of the prodrug. Additional details of prodrug use are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,627,165; and Pathalk et al., Enzymic protecting group techniques in organic synthesis, Stereosel. Biocatal. 775-797 (2000). It is appreciated that the prodrug is advantageously converted to the original drug as soon as the goal, such as targeted delivery, safety, stability, and the like is achieved, followed by the subsequent rapid elimination of the released remains of the group forming the prodrug.
  • Prodrugs may be prepared from the compounds described herein by attaching groups that ultimately cleave in vivo to one or more functional groups present on the compound, such as —OH—, —SH, —CO2H, —NR2. Illustrative prodrugs include but are not limited to carboxylate esters where the group is alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl as well as esters of hydroxyl, thiol and amines where the group attached is an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, phosphate or sulfate. Illustrative esters, also referred to as active esters, include but are not limited to 1-indanyl, N-oxysuccinimide; acyloxyalkyl groups such as acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl, β-acetoxyethyl, β-pivaloyloxyethyl, 1-(cyclohexylcarbonyloxy)prop-1-yl, (1 -aminoethyl)carbonyloxymethyl, and the like; alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl groups, such as ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl, α-ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, β-ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, and the like; dialkylaminoalkyl groups, including di-lower alkylamino alkyl groups, such as dimethylaminomethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, diethylaminomethyl, diethylaminoethyl, and the like; 2-(alkoxycarbonyl)-2-alkenyl groups such as 2-(isobutoxycarbonyl) pent-2-enyl, 2-(ethoxycarbonyl)but-2-enyl, and the like; and lactone groups such as phthalidyl, dimethoxyphthalidyl, and the like.
  • Further illustrative prodrugs contain a chemical moiety, such as an amide or phosphorus group functioning to increase solubility and/or stability of the compounds described herein. Further illustrative prodrugs for amino groups include, but are not limited to, (C3-C20)alkanoyl; halo-(C3-C20)alkanoyl; (C3-C20)alkenoyl; (C4-C7)cycloalkanoyl; (C3-C6)-cycloalkyl(C2-C16)alkanoyl; optionally substituted aroyl, such as unsubstituted aroyl or aroyl substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy, (C1-C3)alkyl and (C1-C3)alkoxy, each of which is optionally further substituted with one or more of 1 to 3 halogen atoms; optionally substituted aryl(C2-C16)alkanoyl and optionally substituted heteroaryl(C2-C16)alkanoyl, such as the aryl or heteroaryl radical being unsubstituted or substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, (C1-C3)alkyl and (C1-C3)alkoxy, each of which is optionally further substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms; and optionally substituted heteroarylalkanoyl having one to three heteroatoms selected from O, S and N in the heteroaryl moiety and 2 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkanoyl moiety, such as the heteroaryl radical being unsubstituted or substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy, (C1-C3)alkyl, and (C1-C3)alkoxy, each of which is optionally further substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms. The groups illustrated are exemplary, not exhaustive, and may be prepared by conventional processes.
  • It is understood that the prodrugs themselves may not possess significant biological activity, but instead undergo one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a combination thereof after administration in vivo to produce the compound described herein that is biologically active or is a precursor of the biologically active compound. However, it is appreciated that in some cases, the prodrug is biologically active. It is also appreciated that prodrugs may often serves to improve drug efficacy or safety through improved oral bioavailability, pharmacodynamic half-life, and the like. Prodrugs also refer to derivatives of the compounds described herein that include groups that simply mask undesirable drug properties or improve drug delivery. For example, one or more compounds described herein may exhibit an undesirable property that is advantageously blocked or minimized may become pharmacological, pharmaceutical, or pharmacokinetic barriers in clinical drug application, such as low oral drug absorption, lack of site specificity, chemical instability, toxicity, and poor patient acceptance (bad taste, odor, pain at injection site, and the like), and others. It is appreciated herein that a prodrug, or other strategy using reversible derivatives, can be useful in the optimization of the clinical application of a drug.
  • The compounds, linkers, intermediates, and conjugates described herein may be prepared using conventional processes, including those described in International Patent Publication Nos. WO 2009/002993, WO 2004/069159, WO 2007/022494, and WO 2006/012527, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/837539 (filed Mar. 15, 2013). The disclosures of each of the foregoing are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • Each publications cited herein is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The following examples further illustrate specific embodiments of the invention; however, the following illustrative examples should not be interpreted in any way to limit the invention.
    • EXAMPLES COMPOUND EXAMPLES
  • The compounds described herein may be prepared using the process and syntheses described herein, as well as using general organic synthetic methods. In particular, methods for preparing the compounds are described in U.S. patent application publication 2005/0002942, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • EXAMPLE. General formation of folate-peptides. The folate-containing peptidyl fragment Pte-Glu-(AA)n-NH(CHR2)CO2H (3) is prepared by a polymer-supported sequential approach using standard methods, such as the Fmoc-strategy on an acid-sensitive Fmoc-AA-Wang resin (1), as shown in the following Scheme:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00078
  • It is to be understood that unnatural amino acids may be included in the foregoing process using the appropriate starting materials.
  • In this illustrative embodiment of the processes described herein, R1 is Fmoc, R2 is the desired appropriately-protected amino acid side chain, and DIPEA is diisopropylethylamine. Standard coupling procedures, such as PyBOP and others described herein or known in the art are used, where the coupling agent is illustratively applied as the activating reagent to ensure efficient coupling. Fmoc protecting groups are removed after each coupling step under standard conditions, such as upon treatment with piperidine, tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF), and the like. Appropriately protected amino acid building blocks, such as Fmoc-Glu-OtBu, Fmoc-D-Glu-OtBu, N10-TFA-Pte-OH, and the like, are used, as described in the Scheme, and represented in step (b) by Fmoc-AA-OH. Thus, AA refers to any amino acid starting material, that is appropriately protected. It is to be understood that the term amino acid as used herein is intended to refer to any reagent having both an amine and a carboxylic acid functional group separated by one or more carbons, and includes the naturally occurring alpha and beta amino acids, as well as amino acid derivatives and analogs of these amino acids. In particular, amino acids having side chains that are protected, such as protected serine, threonine, cysteine, aspartate, and the like may also be used in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein. Further, gamma, delta, or longer homologous amino acids may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein. Further, amino acid analogs having homologous side chains, or alternate branching structures, such as norleucine, isovaline, β-methyl threonine, β-methyl cysteine, β,β-dimethyl cysteine, and the like, may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • The coupling sequence (steps (a) & (b)) involving Fmoc-AA-OH is performed “n” times to prepare solid-support peptide (2), where n is an integer and may equal 0 to about 100. Following the last coupling step, the remaining Fmoc group is removed (step (a)), and the peptide is sequentially coupled to a glutamate derivative (step (c)), deprotected, and coupled to TFA-protected pteroic acid (step (d)). Subsequently, the peptide is cleaved from the polymeric support upon treatment with trifluoroacetic acid, ethanedithiol, and triisopropylsilane (step (e)). These reaction conditions result in the simultaneous removal of the t-Bu, t-Boc, and Trt protecting groups that may form part of the appropriately-protected amino acid side chain. The TFA protecting group is removed upon treatment with base (step (f)) to provide the folate-containing peptidyl fragment (3).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00079
  • LCMS [ESI [M+H]+: 1046; Partial 1H NMR (D2O, 300 MHz): δ 8.68 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.57 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz, FA H-12 & 16), 6.67 (d, 2H, J=9 Hz, FA H-13 &15), 4.40-4.75 (series of m, 5H), 4.35 (m, 2H), 4.16 (m, 1H), 3.02 (m, 2H), 2.55-2.95 (series of m, 8H), 2.42 (m, 2H), 2.00-2.30 (m, 2H), 1.55-1.90 (m, 2H), 1.48 (m, 2H) ppm.
  • EXAMPLE. The corresponding compounds containing one or more D-amino acids may also be prepared, such as the following:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00080
  • LCMS [ESI, [M+H]+1) 1046. Partial 1H-NMR (DMSO) 8(ppm): δ(s), 7.5(d), 6.6(d), 3.8-4.6(m), 2.8-3.2(m), 2.2-2.8(m), 1-2.2(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00081
  • MS (ESI, [M+H]+1)=1046.5. Partial 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.5(d), 6.6(d), 3.8-4.6(m), 2.8-3.2(m), 2.2-2.8(m), 1-2.2(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00082
  • MS (ESI, [M+H]+1)=1046.4. Partial 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.6(d), 6.6(d), 4-4.6(m), 3.4-3.8(m), 3-3.15(m), 1-2.8(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00083
  • [M+H]+=1047.52. Partial 1H NMR (D2O): 8.6 (s, 1H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 6.65 (d, 2H), 4.4 (dd, 2H), 4.18 (m, 4H), 2.9 (t, 2H), 2.75 (t, 2H), 2.6-2.15 (m, 10H), 2.1-1.8 (m, 3H), 1.7-1.4 (m, 3H), 1.3 (m, 3H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00084
  • MS (ESI [M+H]+): 1046. Partial 1H NMR data (D2O, 300 MHz): δ(ppm) 8.68 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.57 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 6.67 (d, 2H, J=9 Hz, FA H-13 &15).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00085
  • MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=1046.7. Partial 1H-NMR (D2O) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.5(d), 6.6(d), 4.4-4.8(m), 4-4.2(m) 2.2-3(m), 1.8-2.2(m), 1.3-1.7(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00086
  • EXAMPLE. Preparation of tubulysin hydrazides. Illustrated by preparing EC0347 (TubB-H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00087
  • N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA, 6.1 μL) and isobutyl chloroformate (3.0 μL) were added with via syringe in tandem into a solution of tubulysin B (0.15 mg) in anhydrous EtOAc (2.0 mL) at −15° C. After stirring for 45 minutes at −15° C. under argon, the reaction mixture was cooled down to −20° C. and to which was added anhydrous hydrazine (5.0 μL). The reaction mixture was stirred under argon at −20° C. for 3 hours, quenched with 1.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, 1.0 mL), and injected into a preparative HPLC for purification. Column: Waters XTerra Prep MS C 18 10 μm, 19×250 mm; Mobile phase A: 1.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile; Method: 10% B to 80% B over 20 minutes, flow rate=25 mL/min. Fractions from 15.14-15.54 minutes were collected and lyophilized to produce EC0347 as a white solid (2.7 mg). The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin hydrazides by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of coupling reagent EC0311.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00088
  • DIPEA (0.60 mL) was added to a suspension of HOBt-OCO2—(CH2)2—SS-2-pyridine HCl (685 mg, 91%) in anhydrous DCM (5.0 mL) at 0° C., stirred under argon for 2 minutes, and to which was added anhydrous hydrazine (0.10 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred under argon at 0° C. for 10 minutes and room temperature for an additional 30 minutes, filtered, and the filtrate was purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, 2% MeOH in DCM) to afford EC0311 as a clear thick oil (371 mg), solidified upon standing.
  • EXAMPLE. Preparation of tubulysin disulfides (stepwise process).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00089
  • Illustrated for EC0312. DIPEA (36 μL) and isobutyl chloroformate (13 μL) were added by syringe in tandem into a solution of tubulysin B (82 mg) in anhydrous EtOAc (2.0 mL) at −15° C. After stirring for 45 minutes at −15° C. under argon, to the reaction mixture was added a solution of EC0311 in anhydrous EtOAc (1.0 mL). The resulting solution was stirred under argon at −15° C. for 15 minutes and room temperature for an additional 45 minutes, concentrated, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, 2 to 8% MeOH in DCM) to give EC0312 as a white solid (98 mg). The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin derivatives by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • EXAMPLE.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00090
  • To a solution of doxorubicin (100 mg, 0.184 mmol) and 2-[benzotriazole-1-yl-(oxycarbonyloxy)-ethyldisulfanyl]-pyridine (77.8 mg, 0.184 mmol) in DCM (4 ml) was added DIPEA (0.064 ml, 0.368 mmol.). The reaction was allowed to stir for 2 hours. TLC (10% MeOH in DCM) indicated that the reaction was complete. DCM was removed under reduced pressure and purified on SiO2 column (10% MeOH in DCM) to yield pure product (90 mg, 65%). LCMS (ESI): (M+H)+ Calculated for C35H36N2O13S2, 757.17; found 757.30, 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD): δ 8.44 (br s, 1H), 8.00 (d, 1H), 7.65-7.82 (m, 3H), 7.38 (d, 1H), 7.18 (br s, 1H), 5.45 (s, 1H), 5.25 (s, 3H), 4.70 (m, 2H), 4.3 (m, 1H), 4.22-3.90 (m, 2H), 3.75 (s, 1H), 3.62 (s, 1H), 3.35-2.90 (m, 2H), 2.45-2.10 (m, 2H), 1.85 (m, 5H), 1.32 (d, 3H).
  • EXAMPLE. Tubulysin B pyridyldisulfide.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00091
  • Similarly, Tubulysin B pyridyldisulfide is prepared as described herein.
  • EXAMPLE.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00092
  • MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=1681. Partial 1H NMR (DO): 8.96 (s), 7.65 (d), 6.81 (d), 4.66 (s), 4.40-4.15 (m), 3.90-3.54 (m), 3.50-3.18 (m), 2.97-2.90 (m), 2.51-1.80 (m).
  • EXAMPLE. General Synthesis of Disulfide Containing Tubulysin Conjugates.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00093
  • Illustrated with pyridinyl disulfide derivatives of certain naturally occurring tubulysins, where R1 is H or OH, and R10, is alkyl or alkenyl. A binding ligand-linker intermediate containing a thiol group is taken in deionized water (ca. 20 mg/mL, bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the suspension was adjusted by saturated NaHCO3 (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) to about 6.9 (the suspension may become a solution when the pH increased). Additional deionized water is added (ca. 20-25%) to the solution as needed, and to the aqueous solution is added immediately a solution of EC0312 in THF (ca. 20 mg/mL). The reaction mixture becomes homogenous quickly. After stirring under argon, e.g. for 45 minutes, the reaction mixture is diluted with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, ca 150 volume percent) and the THF is removed by evacuation. The resulting suspension is filtered and the filtrate may be purified by preparative HPLC (as described herein). Fraction are lyophilized to isolate the conjugates. The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin conjugates by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1663 and EC1664 The following additional compounds are preparable using the methods and processed described herein:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00094
  • EXAMPLE. EC1426 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00095
  • EXAMPLE. EC1456 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00096
  • EXAMPLE. N10-TFA Protected EC1454 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00097
  • EXAMPLE. EC1454 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00098
  • EC1454: MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+)=840.90, [M+H]+=1681.3. Partial 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.6(d), 6.6(d), 4.45(s), 4.35(t), 4.15-4.3(m), 3.3-3.6(m), 3.25(m), 3.0(m), 2.7-2.9(m), 2-2.3(m), 1.6-2(m).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00099
  • EC1415: [M+H]+=1709.69, [M+2H]2+=855.22. Partial 1H NMR (D2O, 300 MHz) δ(ppm): 8.6 (s, 1H), 7.45 (d, 2H), 6.5 (d, 2H), 4.5 (s, 2H), 4.3-4.1 (m, 6H), 3.95 (t, 1H), 3.8-3.4 (m, 19H), 3.4-2.95 (m, 7H), 2.4-1.7 (m, 26H), 1.6 (m, 1H), 1.25 (s, 2H), 1.05 (s, 3H).
  • EXAMPLE. EC1004 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00100
  • Into a round bottomed flask equipped with magnetic stir bar and temperature probe dipeptide EC1458, imidazole, and methylene chloride is added. Once all the solids have dissolved, the solution is cooled using an ice bath. Chlorotriethylsilane (TESCl) is added drop wise and the ice bath is removed. The reaction is monitored for completion. A second portion of chlorotriethylsilane and/or imidazole is added if necessary. The imidazole HCl salt is removed by filtration and methylene chloride is added. The organics are washed with a saturated solution of sodium chloride (brine), the aqueous layer is back extracted once with methylene chloride, and the combined organic layers are washed with brine. The organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The residue is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF) and cooled to approximately −45° C. A solution of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (KHMDS) in toluene is added drop wise. With stirring, chloromethyl butyrate is added and the reaction is monitored. The reaction is quenched with methanol and then ethyl acetate and brine are added. The aqueous layer is discarded and the organics are washed once with brine. The organic layer is concentrated on a rotary evaporator and the oily residue is passed through a short plug of silica gel. The plug is washed with a 20% solution of ethyl acetate in petroleum ether. The combined organics are concentrated on a rotary evaporator until distillation ceases. The crude EC1004 oil is analyzed by LC and NMR and stored in a freezer until use.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1005 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00101
  • Into an appropriately sized hydrogenation flask place R-N-methyl pipecolinate (MEP), pentafluorophenol, N-methyl pyrrolidinone (NMP), and ethyl dimethylaminopropyl carbodiimide (EDC). The mixture is stirred for at least 16 h. EC1004 dissolved in N-methyl pyrrolidinone (NMP) and 10 wt % Pd/C are added. The reaction mixture is stirred/shaken under hydrogen pressure until the reaction is complete by LC analysis. The Pd/C is removed by filtration through celite. The celite is washed with ethyl acetate and the combined organics are washed three times with a 1% sodium bicarbonate/10% sodium chloride solution. The organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The residue is dissolved in DCM and purified by silica gel chromatography using ethyl acetate and petroleum ether as eluents. Fractions are collected, checked for purity, combined and dried on a rotary evaporator. The EC1005 oil is assayed by LC and stored in a freezer until use.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1008 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00102
  • EC1005 is dissolved in 1,2-dichloroethane (DCE) and trimethyltin hydroxide is added. The reaction mixture is heated and reaction is monitored by LC. On completion, the mixture is cooled with an ice bath and filtered. The solids are then washed with DCE. The organic layer is washed once with water and dried over sodium sulfate. The solution is concentrated on a rotary evaporator and the residue dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF). Triethylamine trihydrofluoride is added and the mixture stirred while monitoring with LC. Pyridine, dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP), and acetic anhydride are added. The reaction is stirred and monitored by LC. The reaction mixture is concentrated to a residue and the product is purified by C18 column chromatography with acetonitrile and water as eluents. Product fractions are collected, concentrated, and lyophilized to yield a white to off-white powder.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1426 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00103
  • EC1422 is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF) and (Benzotriazol-1-yloxy)tripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBop) and diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) are added. Once all the solids have dissolved hydrazine is added and the reaction is stirred and monitored for completion. EC0607 is added and the mixture stirred and monitored for completion by LC. Ethyl acetate is added and the organics are washed once with saturated ammonium chloride, twice with saturated sodium bicarbonate, and once with saturated sodium chloride. The organics are dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The crude EC1426 is purified by silica column chromatography with dichloromethane and methanol as eluents. Fractions are collected and the combined product fractions are concentrated on a rotary evaporator to yield a yellow solid.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1428 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00104
  • EC1008 is dissolved in dichloromethane and pentafluorophenol dissolved in DCM along with N-cyclohexylcarbodiimide,N′-methyl polystyrene (DCC-resin) are added. The mixture is stirred and reaction completion is monitord by LC. The mixture is filtered to remove the resin and the organic layer is concentrated on a rotary evaporator to yield activated EC1008. In a separate flask, EC1426 is dissolved in dichloromethane and trifluoroacetic acid is added. The reaction mixture is stirred and monitored for completion by LC. The reaction mixture is concentrated on a rotary evaporator to yield deprotected EC1426. The activated EC1008 is dissolved in DMF and diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) is added. The deprotected EC1426 is dissolved in DMF and added to the reaction mixture. The reaction is stirred and monitored for completion by LC. Ethyl acetate is added and the organics are washed three times with saturated aqueous sodium chloride. The organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate and the volatiles removed by rotary evaporation. The crude EC1428 is purified by silica column chromatography using dichloromethane and methanol as eluents. Fractions are collected, checked for purity, and the combined product fractions are concentrated by rotary evaporation to yield a yellow solid. The EC1428 is stored in a freezer.
  • EXAMPLE. Additional tubulsyins and tubulysin intermediates may be prepared according to the processes described in WO 2012/019123, WO 2009/055562, PCT
  • International Application Serial No. US2013/034672, and U.S. Provisional application Ser. No. 61/793082, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • EXAMPLE. Illustrative tubulysins are as follows:
  •
    100a-c
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00105
    Compound 100a 100b 100c Tub B
    R allyl n-butyl n-pentyl
    IC50 1.2 0.7 0.8 1.2
    on FR+ KB cell (nM)
  • EXAMPLE. EC1454 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00106
  • The solid phase synthesis of N10-TFA protected EC1454 starts with resin bound trityl protected D-cysteine. The resin is suspended in dimethylformamide (DMF) and washed twice with DMF. EC0475 (glucamine modified L-glutamic acid), (Benzotriazol-1-yloxy)tripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP), and diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) are added to reaction mixture. After at least 1 hour, a Kaiser test is performed to ensure the coupling is complete. The resin is washed three times with DMF, three times with IPA, and three times with DMF. The resin is slowly washed three times with piperidine in DMF, three times with DMF, and three times with IPA. A Kaiser test is performed to confirm deprotection. The resin is washed three times with DMF and the next amino acid in the sequence is coupled following the same process. Monomers are coupled in the following order: 1) EC0475, 2) Fmoc-D-Glu(OtBu)-OH, 3) EC0475, 4) Fmoc-D-Glu(OtBu)-OH, 5) EC0475, 6) Fmoc-D-Glu-OtBu, and 7) N10-TFA-Pte-OH.
  • Once the final coupling is complete, the resin is washed three times with methanol and dried by passing argon through the resin at room temperature. The dried resin is suspended in a mixture of TFA, water, ethanedithiol, and triisopropylsilane. After 1 hour the resin is removed by filtration and washed with TFA. The product is precipitated by addition to cold ethyl ether, filtered, and washed with ether. The solids are dried under vacuum at room temperature and stored in a freezer.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00107
  • N10-TFA EC1454 is dissolved in argon sparged water. Sodium carbonate (1M in water, argon sparged) is added to achieve a pH of 9.4-10.1. The reaction mixture is stirred for at least 20 minutes. Once the reaction is complete as determined by LC, it is quenched by adjusting the pH to 1.9-2.3 with 2M HCl. The product is purified by C18 column chromatography using acetonitrile and pH 5 ammonium acetate buffer as eluents. Fractions are collected and checked for purity by HPLC. The combined product fractions are concentrated on a rotary evaporator and then lyophilized to yield EC1454 as a yellow solid. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+)=840.90, [M+H1]+=1681.3. Selected 1H-NMR (DMSO, 300 MHz) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.6(d), 6.6(d), 4.45(s), 4.35(t), 4.15-4.3(m), 3.3-3.6(m), 3.25(m), 3.0(m), 2.7-2.9(m), 2-2.3(m), 1.6-2(m). The product is stored at −20° C.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1456 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00108
  • EC1428 is dissolved in acetonitrile and a solution of EC1454 in pH 7.4 Sodium phosphate buffer is added. The solutions are sparged with argon before and after addition. The reaction mixture is stirred for at least 15 minutes and then checked for completion. The desired product is purified by C18 column chromatography using acetonitrile and pH 7.4 phosphate buffer as eluents. The product fractions are collected, checked for purity, combined and concentrated by ultra-filtration to yield an aqueous solution that is 10-20 mg/mL EC1456. The final product solution is sampled for assay and then stored in a freezer.
  • The positive electrospray mass spectrum of EC1456 was obtained on a high resolution Waters Acquity UPLC Xevo Gs-S QTOF mass spectrometer. The spectrum was obtained following separation of the major component on a UPLC inlet system, the resolving power was approximately 35,000. The accurate mass measurement of the M+H monoisotopic peak was 2625.0598, which is 1.1 ppm error difference from the theoretical value of 2625.0570 for an ion of formula C110H166N23O45S3. The isotopic distribution is also consistent with that formula.
  • Mass spectral features of the ES+ spectrum for EC1456
  • Observed
    Ion Interpretation
    2626.06 13C isotope of the (M + H)+ ion for the MW 2624 drug
    substance
    1313.54 13C isotope of the (M + 2H)++ ion for the MW 2624 drug
    substance
    1150.43 13C isotope of the (M + 2H − 326)++ fragment,
    corresponding to the cleavage of the peptide bond at the
    tertiary nitrogen and the loss of the butyric acid moiety.
    876.03 13C isotope of the (M + 3H)+++ ion for the MW 2624 drug
    substance
    657.27 13C isotope of the (M + 4H)++++ ion for the MW 2624 drug
    substance
  • A sample of ˜30 mg EC1456 was dissolved in 665 μL of a 9:1 mixture of deuterated dimethylsulfoxide and deuterated water. The 1H NMR spectrum was obtained at 500 MHz at 26 deg. C. on an Agilent model DD2 spectrometer fitted with a 2 channel probe containing both broadband and proton observe coils. The 13C NMR spectrum was obtained at 125 MHz on the same instrument under identical conditions. All spectra were referenced to the DMSO solvent residual signals at 2.5 ppm (1H) and 39.50 ppm (13C).
  • All spectral features are assigned for both NMR spectra in the tables below (1H and 13C) using the atom numbering in the following figure, where the * symbols indicate the connection for the disulfide bond.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00109
  • Assignments were made on the basis of both 1D and 2D NMR experiments, including through bond H—H connectivity using the COSY and TCSY 2D experiments, through space H—H proximity using 2D NOESY, carbon multiplicity measurement using the 1D DEPT experiment and through bond C—H connectivity using the proton detected 2D experiments HSQC and HMBC. In most cases of overlap in the 1D spectra (different protons or carbons resonating at the same chemical shift) could be resolved in the 2D spectra, in these cases the tables reflect the chemical shifts measured from the 2D spectra but summed integrations for the group of co-resonating species. In some cases of 1D overlap (such as the nearly identical glutamic acid and glucamine subunits) there was also overlap in the 2D correlation spectra which precludes unambiguous assignment of single or multiple resonances between multiple atom numbers, in these cases there are multiple entries for chemical shift and/or atom number assignments in a single table row.
  • NH and OH protons were exchanged by the D2O deuterium atoms and are mostly absent from the spectrum, except weak broad peaks in the 5-10 ppm region. The 1H peaks in the spectrum that are not listed in the table include a broad HOD peak at 3.75 ppm, and a DMSO peak at 2.50 ppm. The HOD peak does not obscure any resonances, but elevates the integrations for nearby resonances at 4.2 and 3.4-3.7 ppm due to the broad baseline rise. The DMSO peak obscures the resonance for H129, which is not integrated for this reason. The 13C peaks in spectrum not listed in the table include the very large DMSO solvent at 39.50 ppm. The DMSO peak obscures both the signals from C91 and C93. The C116 peak is not observable in the 13C spectrum due to extensive broadening due to conformational changes around the nearby amide group. All three chemical shifts (C91, C93, C116) are visible in and measured in the proton detected 2D correlation spectra.
  • Proton NMR assignments for EC1456
  • Proton
    Chemical Shift (ppm) Assignment # protons
    8.61  5 1
    8.16 103 1
    7.58  15, 17 2
    6.96  95, 99 2
    6.62  14, 18 4
    6.59  96, 98
    6.18 116 Ha 1
    5.7 107 1
    5.24 116 Hb 1
    4.47  11 2
    4.39 111,122 2
    4.21  78 10
    4.21  65
    4.18  84
    4.15  46
    4.15  59
    4.13  21
    4.13  40
    4.09  27
    4.09  92
    3.61 33, 52, 71 3
    3.56 34, 53, 72 6
    3.54 37 Ha, 56 Ha, 75 Ha
    3.46 36, 55, 74 3
    3.4 35, 54, 73 6
    3.38 37 Hb, 56 Hb, 75 Hb
    3.21 80 Ha, 32 Ha, 51 Ha, 4
    70 Ha
    3.05 32 Hb, 51 Hb, 70 Hb 3
    2.93 80 Hb 3
    2.91  83
    2.8 133 Ha 1
    2.68  93 2
    2.49 (see text) 129 1
    2.35  89 2
    2.33 110 Ha
    2.8 133 Hb 37
    2.17 118
    2.14-2.08 24, 29, 42, 48, 61, 67
    2.09 110 Hb
    2.08 109
    2.02 135
    1.97-1.70 28, 41, 47, 60, 66
    1.92  23 Ha
    1.88 123
    1.8  91 Ha
    1.79  23 Hb
    1.77 112
    1.6 131 Ha 9
    1.56 130 Ha
    1.5 132 Ha
    1.5  91 Hb
    1.45 125 Ha
    1.42 119
    1.4 132 Hb
    1.33 130 Hb
    1.14 131 Hb 2
    1.07 125 Hb
    1  90 3
    0.94 114 3
    0.79 124 3
    0.77 126 3
    0.75 120 3
    0.64 113 3

    Carbon NMR assignments for EC1456
  • Carbon
    Chemical shift
    (ppm) Assignment
    176.77, 176.32 43, 62
    175.74 88
    175.42 22
    174.75 121
    173.87, 172.68, 25, 38, 44, 57, 63
    172.15, 171.94,
    171.84
    173.43 79
    173.3 128
    172.79 (2x), 30, 49, 68
    172.72
    172.46 117
    170.87 76
    170.39 108
    169.3 105
    166.09 19
    162.4 9
    160.7 101
    156.4 85
    156.09 3
    155.71 97
    154.59 1
    150.84 13
    149.63 102
    149.11 6
    148.99 5
    130.44 95, 99
    128.99 15, 17
    128.89 94
    127.99 8
    124.97 103
    122.24 16
    115.25 96, 98
    111.86 14, 18
     72.17 (3x) 35, 54, 73
    71.78, 71.74, 71.71 33, 52, 71
    71.62, 71.59 (2x) 36, 55, 74
    69.65, 69.57 (2x) 34, 53, 72
     69.45 107
     69.34 116
     68.51 129
     63.42 (3x) 37, 56, 75
     63.03 84
     55.08 133
     54.05 40
     53.88 78
     53.46 (2x) 46, 59
     53.33 27
     52.96 (2x) 122, 111
     52.89 21
     52.55 65
     49.77 92
     46.07 11
     44.02 135
     42.85 80
     42.34 (2x), 42.29 32, 51, 70
     39.52 93
     38.95 91
     37.43 83
     35.95 118
     35.43 123
     35.38 89
     34.86 110
    32.56, 32.36, 24, 29, 42, 48, 61,67
    32.16, 32.09 (2x),
     31.81
     30.5 112
     29.95 130
    28.60, 28.04, 27.78 28, 41, 47, 60, 66
    (2x), 27.66
     27 23
     25.01 132
     24.43 125
     23.04 131
     20.86 109
     20.56 114
     19.64 113
     18.36 90
     18.04 119
     15.64 124
     13.72 120
     10.28 126
  • The IR spectrum of EC1456 was acquired on a Nexus 6700® Fourier transform infrared (FT-IR) spectrophotometer (Thermo Nicolet) equipped with an Ever-Glo mid/far IR source, an extended range potassium bromide (KBr) beam splitter, and a deuterated triglycine sulfate (DTGS) detector. An attenuated total reflectance (ATR) accessory (Thunderdome™, Thermo Spectra-Tech), with a germanium (Ge) crystal was used for data acquisition. The spectrum represents 256 co-added scans collected at a spectral resolution of 4 cm-1. A background data set was acquired with a clean Ge crystal. A Log 1/R (R=reflectance) spectrum was acquired by taking a ratio of these two data sets against each other. Wavelength calibration was performed using polystyrene.
  • Infrared band assignments for EC1456 reference substance
  • Characteristic Absorption(s) (cm−1) Functional Group
    1700-1500 (m, m) Aromatic C=C Bending
    2950-2850 (m or s) Alkyl C—H Stretch
    ~3030 (v) Aromatic C—H Stretch
    3550-3200 (broad, s) Alcohol/Phenol O—H Stretch
    3700-3500 (m) Amide C=O Stretch
  • The ultraviolet spectrum EC1456 acquired on a Perkin-Elmer Lambda 25 UV/Vis spectrometer. The spectrum was recorded at 40.7 uM in 0.1M NaOH solvent on a 1 cm path-length cell at 25 deg. C. The local maxima at 366 nm, 288 nm and 243 nm are due primarily to the Pteroic acid, benzamide/phenol and thiazole-amide substructures, respectively, although the molecule contains dozens of chromaphores with overlapping absorption in the UV region.
  • EXAMPLE. N10-TFA Protected EC1579 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00110
  • EXAMPLE. EC1579 is prepared according to the following process.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00111
  • EC1579 MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+)=840.89 (M+1H)1+=1681.0. Partial 1H-NMR (D2O) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.5(d), 6.65(d), 4.4-4.8(m), 4-4.2(m), 3.4-3.8(m) 3-3.3(m) 2.75(s), 1.6-2.4(m).
  • EXAMPLE. EC0948 is made by the processes described herein.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00112
    • EC0848: MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+)=840.8.
  • [M+H]+=1681.1. Selected 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): s, 8.6; d, 7.6; d, 6.6; s, 4.45; m, 4-4.2; m, 3.3-3.8; m, 3.1-3.3; m, 3-3.1; m, 2.7-2.9; m, 1.7-2.3; s, 1.15
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00113
  • EXAMPLE. EC1669 is prepared according to the processes described herein from EC1579 and EC0469 as follows:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00114
  • EC1579 (200 mg, 1.0 eq) is dissolved in deoxygenated (bubbling argon) 20 mM PO4 (pH=7) buffer (4.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC0469 (80 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL) at room temperature with argon bubbling. After 30 min, EC1669 (132 mg) is purified by preparative HPLC in 0-30% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized (49% yield). Chemical Formula: C87H122N26O40S2; Exact Mass: 2234.78; MW 2236.18. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1118.39, Found 1119.52. Partial 1H NMR (DMSO w/ 10% D2O) δ (ppm) 8.67 (s), 8.59 (2), 7.61 (d), 7.56 (d), 6.71 (d), 6.61 (d), 3.34-3.39 (m).
  • EXAMPLE. The following additional compounds are described and are prepared according to the general processes described herein.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00115
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00116
  • EC1454 (8.5 mg, 1.5 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM phosphate pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1717 (3.8 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1739 (5.3 mg, 59%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+)=1327.06, Found 1327.73
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00117
  • EC1454 (5.5 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20mM phosphate pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1662 (3.6 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1664 (4.6 mg, 54%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1313.05, Found 1313.37. Partial 1H NMR (DMSO w/ 10% D2O, 300 MHz) δ (ppm) 8.61 (s), 8.15 (s), 7.58 (d), 6.94 (d), 6.60 (m), 5.78 (d), 5.22 (d), 4.47 (m), 4.09-4.33 (m), 0.99 (d), 0.93 (d), 0.76 (t), 0.71 (t), 0.61 (d).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00118
  • EC1454 (16.1 mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM phosphate pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1661 (8.7 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1663 (15.8 mg, 76%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1306.04, Found 1306.82.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00119
  • EC1415 (20 mg) was dissolved in pH7 phosphate (pH 7.75, purged with argon). To this solution was added a suspension of EC0312 (14 mg) in equal volume of MeOH. The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 45 min, and then loaded onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (18 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS(ESI, [M+2H]2+) 1328, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, D2O, 300 MHz): 8.6 (s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.85 (bd, 1H), 7.55 (d, 2H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 6.6 (m, 4H), 6.2 (d, 1H), 5.68 (d, 1H), 5.2 (d, 1H), 4.5 (bs, 3H), 4.5-4.3 (m, 4H), 4.3-4.0 (m, 10H), 3.5-3.3 (m, 13H), 3.2 (bd, 5H), 3.1-2.8 (m, 8H), 2.75 (bs, 5H), 2.6-1.6 (m, 50H), 1.4 (m, 9H), 1.2 (m, 9H), 1.0 (dd, 9H), 0.7 (m, 11H), 0.6 (d, 3H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00120
  • A solution of ECO259 (35 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (3.0 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (1.5 mL) were added to a solution of EC0312 (39 mg) in MeOH (5.5 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (25 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 1993.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00121
  • A solution of ECO259 (35 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (3.0 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (1.5 mL) were added to a solution of EC0312 (39 mg) in MeOH (5.5 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (25 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 1993.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00122
  • A solution of EC1544 (55.1 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (1.95 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (0.30 mL) were added to a solution of EC1248 (58.0 mg) in MeOH (2.30 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (61.5 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 1993.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00123
  • The pH of a solution of EC1392 (20 mg) in 40 mM pH7 phosphate buffer was adjusted to 8 with a saturated NaHCO3 solution. To the solution was added a suspension of EC0312 (20 mg) in equal volume of MeOH. The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 30 min, and then loaded onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (15 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS(ESI, [M+2H]2+) 1011.39. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, D2O, 300 MHz): 8.6 (s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.85 (bd, 1H), 7.55 (d, 2H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 6.6 (m, 4H), 6.2 (d, 1H), 5.68 (d, 1H), 5.2 (d, 1H), 4.6 (t, 1H), 4.5 (m, 3H), 4.5-4.0 (m, 11H), 3.2-2.8 (m, 6H), 2.8-2.5 (m, 8H), 2.4 (m, 5H), 2.2-2.0 (m, 14H), 2.0-1.7 (m, 7H), 1.6-1.3 (m, 13H), 1.25 (d, 8H), 1.1-0.95 (dd, 8H), 0.75 (m, 10H), 0.6 (d, 2H).
  • EXAMPLE. The compounds described herein can also be prepared by following two methods:
  • Method A: Folate spacer is dissolved in water by adjusting the pH of the solution with NaHCO3 solution to a pH=7 with argon purging. The thiophilic agent in organic solvent (MeOH, ACN, THF or DMSO) is then added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature with argon purging. The progress of reaction is monitored by analytical HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0; B=ACN). After the reaction is complete, the organic solvent is evaporated and the resulted solution is then purified by prep-HPLC with C18 column (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer or 2 mM phosphate buffer, pH=7.0; B=ACN).
  • Method B: Folate spacer is dissolved in water and the pH is adjusted to 2 with acid (AcOH or dilute HCl). The resulting pH adjusted spacer is lyophilized, and then redissolved in DMSO. The reaction mixture is purged with argon, and 10 molar equivalents of Et3N (or DIPEA) are added. To this solution is added the thiophilic agent in organic solvent (DMSO, THF, ACN, etc.). The progress of the reaction is monitored by HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer or 2 mM phosphate buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN). After the reaction is complete, the reaction mixture is purified by prep-HPLC with C18 column (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer or 2 mM phosphate buffer, pH=7.0; B=ACN).
  • EXAMPLE. Additional illustrative linker intermediates (also referred as folate spacers) are described herein:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00124
  • EC0014: 1H NMR (D2O, 500 MHz) δ(ppm) 8.73(s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.56 (d, 2H, FA H-12&H16), 6.73(d, 2H, FA H-13&H15), 4.45(m, 2H), 4.1(m, 2H), 3.61(d, 2H), 2.82(m, 3H), 2.74(dd, 1H), 2.37(m, 2H), 2.18(m, 1H), 2.09(m, 3H), 1.74(m, 1H)
  • EXAMPLE.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00125
  • EC0020: MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 746. 1H NMR (D2O, 500 MHz) δ(ppm) 8.76(s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.68(d, 2H, FA H-12&H16), 6.8(d, 2H, FA H-13&H15), 4.71(dd, 1H, Asp H-2), 4.64(s, 2H FA H-9), 4.41(dd, 1H, D-Glu H-2), 4.3(dd, 1H, Cys H-2), 4.1(dd, Dpr H-2),3.72(dd, 1H, Dpr H-3A), 3.52(dd, 1H, Dpr H-3B), 2.89(dd, 1H, Cys H-3A), 2.85(dd, 1H, Cys H-3B), 2.81(dd, 1H, Asp H-3A), 2.62(dd, 1H, Asp H-3B), 2.44(dd, 2H, D-Glu H-4), 2.27(m, 1H, D-Glu H-3A), 2.08(m, 1H, D-Glu H-3B). 13C NMR (DMSO-d6+D2O, 75 MHz): δ 174.78, 174.42, 172.68 (2C), 170.45, 168.25, 167.08, 162.24, 156.24, 154.38, 151.24, 149.41 (2C), 129.52, 128.14, 121.74, 111.98, 55.76, 53.02 (2C), 52.77, 50.89, 46.16, 36.61, 32.26, 27.32, 26.60
  • EXAMPLES.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00126
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00127
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00128
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00129
  • EC0149: [M+H]+=631. 1H NMR (D2O): 8.55 (s, 1H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 6.61 (d, 2H), 4.42 (s, 2H), 4.35 (dd, 1H), 4.25 (m, 2H), 4.1 (s, 1H), 3.68 (m, 1H), 3.5 (m, 1H), 3.35-3.2 (m, 3H), 3.1 (dd, 1H), 2.4-2.1 (m, 3H), 2.1-1.9 (m, 4H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00130
  • EC0150: MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 631. Selected 1H NMR (D2O) δ(ppm) 8.42(s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.50(d, 2H, FA H-12&16), 6.65(d, 2H, FA H-13&15), 4.42 (s, 2H), 4.3-4.1(m, 2H), 4.0-3.85 (m, 1H), 3.35-3.30(m, 1H), 3.30-3.10(m, 2H), 3.10-2.90(m, 2H), 2.80-2.70(m, 1H), 2.65-2.50(m, 2H), 2.30-2.10(m, 3H), 2.10-1.85(m, 2H), 1.95-1.80(m, 2H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00131
  • EC0151: MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 630. Selected 1H NMR (D2O) δ(ppm) 8.42(s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.50(d, 2H, FA H-12&16), 6.65(d, 2H, FA H-13&15), 4.42 (s, 2H), 4.3-4.1(m, 2H), 4.0-3.85 (m, 1H), 3.35-3.30(m, 1H), 3.30-3.10(m, 2H), 3.10-2.90(m, 2H), 2.80-2.70(m, 1H), 2.65-2.50(m, 2H), 2.30-2.10(m, 3H), 2.10-1.85(m, 2H), 1.95-1.80(m, 2H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00132
  • ECO232: MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 774. 1H NMR (D2O): 8.56 (s), 7.50 (d), 6.65 (d), 4.48-4.41 (m), 4.21 (dd), 4.08 (dd), 3.48-3.42 (m), 3.28-3.09 (m), 2.61-2.35 (m), 2.28-2.18 (m), 2.16-2.02 (m), 1.97-1.62 (m).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00133
  • ECO252: [M+H]+=1046.83. 1H NMR (D2O): 8.58 (s, 1H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 6.6 (d, 2H), 3.05-2.6 (m, 5H), 2.3-1.9 (m, 4H), 1.8-1.2 (m, 7H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00134
  • ECO259: [M+H]+=1047.52. 1H NMR (D2O): 8.6 (s, 1H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 6.65 (d, 2H), 4.4 (dd, 2H), 4.18 (m, 4H), 2.9 (t, 2H), 2.75 (t, 2H), 2.6-2.15 (m, 10H), 2.1-1.8 (m, 3H), 1.7-1.4 (m, 3H), 1.3 (m, 3H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00135
  • EC1213: LCMS (ESI [M+H]+): 1046. Selected 1H NMR data (D20, 300 MHz): δ 8.68 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.57 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 6.67 (d, 2H, J=9 Hz, FA H-13 &15).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00136
  • EC1214: LCMS (ESI [M+H]+): 1046. Selected 1H NMR data (D2O, 300 MHz): δ 8.68 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.57 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 6.67 (d, 2H, J=9 Hz, FA H-13 &15).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00137
  • EC1215: LCMS (ESI [M+H]+): 1046. Selected 1H NMR data (D2O, 300 MHz): δ 8.68 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.57 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 6.67 (d, 2H, J=9 Hz, FA H-13 &15).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00138
  • EC1216: LCMS (ESI [M+H]+): 1046 Selected 1H NMR data (D2O, 300 MHz): δ 8.68 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.57 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 6.67 (d, 2H, J=9 Hz, FA H-13 &15).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00139
  • EC1217: LCMS (ESI [M+H]+): 1046. Selected 1H NMR data (D20, 300 MHz): δ 8.68 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.57 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 6.67 (d, 2H, J=9 Hz, FA H-13 &15).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00140
  • EC1392: [M+H]+=1074.85. 1H NMR (D2O, 300 MHz) δ(ppm): 8.55 (s, 1H), 7.45 (d, 2H), 6.5 (d, 2H), 4.6 (m, 2H), 4.45 (t, 1H), 4.35 (bs, 2H), 4.2 (m, 1H), 4.1 (s, 1H), 4.05 (m, 1H), 2.9 (t, 2H), 2.75-2.4 (m, 6H), 2.3 (m, 2H), 2.2-1.9 (m, 2H), 1.8-1.4 (m, 2H), 1.2 (m, 2H), 1.3 (s, 3H), 1.2 (s, 3H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00141
  • EC1347: MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=701.57. Selected 1H-NMR (DMSO, 300 MHz) δ(ppm): 8.65(s), 7.6(d), 6.6(d), 4.2-4.6(m), 2.6-3.2(m), 1.8-2.6(m), 1.1-1.7(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00142
  • EC0589: MS (ESI, [M+H]+) 746. Selected 1H NMR (DMSO-d6+D2O, 300 MHz): 67 8.46(s, 1H), 7.45 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.47 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 4.39 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 1H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00143
  • EC0819: MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=1046.4. Selected 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.6(d), 6.6(d), 4-4.6(m), 3.4-3.8(m), 3-3.15(m), 1-2.8(m).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00144
  • EC0823: MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=672.3. Selected 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): 8.8(s), 7.6(d), 6.6(d), 4.4-4.6(m), 4.2-4.4(m), 3.4-3.8(m), 1.8-2.8(m), 1.15(s)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00145
  • EC0835: MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=1046.5. Selected 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): 8.6(s), 7.5(d), 6.6(d), 3.8-4.6(m), 2.8-3.2(m), 2.2-2.8(m), 1-2.2(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00146
  • EC0923: MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=672.3. Selected 1H-NMR (D2O) δ(ppm): 8.8(s), 7.75(d), 6.85(d), 4.4-5(m), 2.6-2.9(m), 2.4-2.6(m), 2-2.6(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00147
  • EC0879: MS (ESI, [M+H]+)=442.3. Selected 1H-NMR (DMSO) δ(ppm): 8.7(s), 7.6(d), 6.6(d), 4.55(s), 4.3(m), 2.2-2.6(m), 1.8-2.2(m), 1-1.2(m)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00148
  • EC0306: [M+H]+=1100.51. 1H NMR (D2O): δ 8.75 (s, 1H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 6.75 (d, 2H), 4.7-4.5 (m, 5H), 4.38 (m, 2H), 4.2 (m, 2H), 4.1 (d, 1H), 3.85-3.5 (m, 10H), 2.95-2.6 (m, 4H), 2.45 (m, 2H), 2.3-2.0 (m, 2H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00149
  • EC0368: [M+H]+=2175.5. 1H NMR (D2O): 8.6 (s, 1H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 6.6 (d, 2H), 4.45 (bs, 3H), 4.35-4.2 (m, 4H), 4.05 (t, 1H), 3.6-3.35 (bs, 114H), 3.2 (s, 6H), 2.77 (t, 2H), 2.65 (dd, 1H), 2.55-2.45 (m, 3H), 2.4-2.2 (m, 6H), 2.1-1.8 (m, 2H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00150
  • EC0373: [M+H]+=1346.0. 1H NMR (D2O): 8.55 (s, 1H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 6.6 (d, 2H), 4.4 (s, 2H), 4.25 (m,2H), 4.05 (t, 1H), 3.7 (dd, 1H), 3.6-3.3 (m, 50H), 3.25 (dd, 3H), 3.05 (dd, 3H), 2.8 (t, 2H), 2.7 (dd, 2H), 2.6 (dd, 1H), 2.4 (t, 2H), 2.2-1.9 (m, 4H).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00151
  • EC0536: [M+2H]2+=941.2. 1H NMR (D2O): 8.55 (s, 1H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 6.6 (d, 2H), 4.4 (s, 2H), 4.25 (m,2H), 4.1 (m, 5H), 3.85 (t, 1H), 3.8-3.4 (m, 21H), 3.4-2.95 (m, 7H), 2.8 (s, 2H), 2.7-2.4 (ddd, 2H), 2.4-1.7 (m, 22H), 1.55 (m, 1H).
  • EXAMPLE. Additional illustrative compounds and processes for preparing the compounds are described herein:
    • Conjugates of EC1579
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00152
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00153
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00154
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00155
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00156
  • A solution of EC1579 (acidified, 13.0 mg, 0.0077 mmole) in DMSO (0.4 mL) and 12 μL of DIPEA (0.070 mmole, 13.5 eq.) were added to a solution of EC1822 (5.6 mg, 0.0052 mmole) in DMSO (0.2 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (12.4 mg) as a pale yellow solid. Selected 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ(ppm) 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 7.60 (d, 2H), 7.56 (d), 6.93 (d, 2H), 6.61 (m, 3H), 5.25(d, 1H), 4.51(d, 1H), 4.50-4.40(m, 3H), 4.32-4.10(m, 10H), 3.65-3.50(m, 10H), 3.40-3.30 (m, 10H), 3.30-3.10(m, 7H), 3.10-2.95(m, 3H), 2.95-2.80(m, 3H), 2.75-2.60(br, 3H), 2.40-2.00(m, 14H), 2.0-1.3(m, 24H), 1.30-1.05(m, 6H), 0.99(d, 3H), 0.88(d, 3H), 0.86(d, 3H), 0.79(t, 6H), 0.73(t, 3H), 0.64(br, 3H)
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00157
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00158
    Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00159
  • A solution of EC1579 (30.9 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (4.2 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (0.30 mL) were added to a solution of EC1662 (16.9 mg) in MeOH (4.8 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification.
  • Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to give the product (33.1 mg) as a fluffy yellow solid. MS (ESI, M+H)=2627. EC1746 1H NMR (D2O): 8.66 (s), 8.10 (s), 7.62 (b), 6.99 (b), 6.69 (b), 5.81 (b), 5.18 (b), 4.60-4.18 (m), 3.91-0.57 (m).
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1669
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00160
  • EC1579 (200 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (4.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of crude EC0469 (80 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1669 (132 mg, 49%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 0-30% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1118.39, Found 1119.52. Partial 1H NMR (DMSO w/10% D2O) d(ppm) 8.67 (s), 8.59 (2), 7.61 (d), 7.56 (d), 6.71 (d), 6.61 (d), 3.34-3.39 (m).
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1665
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00161
  • EC1579 (15 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC0564 (10.5 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1665 (13.4 mg, 55%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/10 mM NH4OAc pH5 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1368.09, Found 1368.30
    • Conjugates of EC1454 EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1751
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00162
  • EC1454 (21.1 mg, 1.3 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1716 (10.8 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1751 (8.5 mg, 33%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1320.05, Found 1320.72. Selected 1H NMR (DMSO w/10% D2O) δ(ppm) 8.61 (s), 8.15 (s), 7.58 (d), 6.94 (d), 6.60 (m), 5.79 (d), 5.22 (d), 4.47 (m), 4.09-4.33 (m), 0.98 (d), 0.93 (d), 0.75 (m), 0.61 (d)
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1750
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00163
  • EC1454 (31.1 mg, 1.3 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1715 (15.3 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1750 (18.0 mg, 97%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1299.03, Found 1299.19. Partial 1H NMR (DMSO w/10% D2O) δ(ppm) 8.61 (s), 8.14 (s), 7.57 (d), 6.93 (d), 6.60 (m), 5.77 (d), 5.23 (d), 4.47 (m), 0.98 (d), 0.92 (d), 0.76 (m), 0.71 (t), 0.61 (d)
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1739
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00164
  • EC1454 (8.5 mg, 1.5 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1717 (3.8 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1739 (5.3 mg, 59%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) predicted 1327.06, Found 1327.73
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00165
  • MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1313.05, Found 1313.37. Selected 1H NMR (DMSO w/10% D2O) δ(ppm) 8.61 (s), 8.15 (s), 7.58 (d), 6.94 (d), 6.60 (m), 5.78 (d), 5.22 (d), 4.47 (m), 4.09-4.33 (m), 0.99 (d), 0.93 (d), 0.76 (t), 0.71 (t), 0.61 (d)
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1664
  • EC1454 (5.5 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1662 (3.6 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1664 (4.6 mg, 54%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized.
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1663
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00166
  • EC1454 (16.1 mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC1661 (8.7 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1663 (15.8 mg, 76%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, [M+2H]2+) Predicted 1306.04, Found 1306.82
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1653
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00167
  • EC1454 (8.3 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (2.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of EC0564 (5.8 mg, 1.0 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1653 (6.3 mg, 46%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 10-100% acetonitrile/10 mM NH4OAc pH5 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, ((M−2)/2)) Predicted 1368.09, Found 1368.74
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00168
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1496
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00169
  • EC1454 (324 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in degassed (Ar bubbling) 20 mM PO4 pH7 buffer (4.0 mL) and added dropwise to a stirring solution of crude EC0469 (142 mg, 1.1 eq) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (4.0 mL, Aldrich) at room temperature with Ar bubbling. After 30 min, EC1496 (221 mg, 51%) was purified by preparative HPLC in 0-30% acetonitrile/50 mM NH4HCO3 pH7 buffer and lyophilized. MS (ESI, ((M+2)/2)) Predicted 1118.39, Found 1119.02
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00170
    • EXAMPLES. Conjugates of EC1415
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00171
    • EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1416
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00172
  • EC1415 (20 mg) was dissolved in pH7 phosphate (pH 7.75, purged with argon). To this solution was added a suspension of EC0312 (14 mg) in equal volume of MeOH. The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 45 min, and then loaded onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (18 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS(ESI, [M+2H]2+) 1328. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, D2O, 300MHz): 8.6 (s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.85 (bd, 1H), 7.55 (d, 2H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 6.6 (m, 4H), 6.2 (d, 1H), 5.68 (d, 1H), 5.2 (d, 1H), 4.5 (bs, 3H), 4.5-4.3 (m, 4H), 4.3-4.0 (m, 10H), 3.5-3.3 (m, 13H), 3.2 (bd, 5H), 3.1-2.8 (m, 8H), 2.75 (bs, 5H), 2.6-1.6 (m, 50H), 1.4 (m, 9H), 1.2 (m, 9H), 1.0 (dd, 9H), 0.7 (m, 11H), 0.6 (d, 3H).
    • EXAMPLES. Conjugates of EC1392
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00173
    • MS(ESI, [M+2H]2+) 1011.39
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00174
    • EXAMPLE. Conjugates of EC59
  • A solution of EC59 (13.2 mg) in 20 mM pH7.1 phosphate buffer (2.4 mL) was added to a solution of EC0312 (14.2 mg) in MeOH (2.4 mL). The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to give the product (15.3 mg) as a fluffy yellow solid.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00175
    • EXAMPLES. Conjugates of EC1347
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00176
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00177
  • EC1208: LCMS [ESI (M+H)+: 1918]. Selected 1H NMR data for EC145 (D2O, 300 MHz): δ 8.67 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.50 (br s, 1H, VLB H-11′), 7.30-7.40 (br s, 1H, VLB H-14′), 7.35 (d, 2H, J=7.8 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 7.25 (m, 1H, VLB H-13′), 7.05 (br s, 1H, VLB H-12′), 6.51 (d, 2H, J=8.7 Hz, FA H-13 &15), 6.4 (s, 2H, VLB H-14 & 17), 5.65 (m, 1H, VLB H-7), 5.5 (m, 1H, VLB H-6), 4.15(m,1H, VLB H-8′), 3.82 (s, 3H, VLB C18′—CO2CH3), 3.69 (s, 3H, VLB C16—OCH3), 2.8 (s, 3H, VLB N—CH3), 1.35 (br s, 1H, VLB H-3′), 1.15 (m, 1H, VLB H-2′), 0.9 (t, 3H, J=7 Hz, VLB H-21′), 0.55 (t, 3H, J=6.9 Hz, VLB H-21) ppm.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00178
  • EC1209: LCMS [ESI (M+H)+: 1918]. Selected 1H NMR data for EC145 (D2O, 300 MHz): δ 8.67 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.50 (br s, 1H, VLB H-11′), 7.30-7.40 (br s, 1H, VLB H-14′), 7.35 (d, 2H, J=7.8 Hz, FA H-12 &16), 7.25 (m, 1H, VLB H-13′), 7.05 (br s, 1H, VLB H-12′), 6.51 (d, 2H, J=8.7 Hz, FA H-13 &15), 6.4 (s, 2H, VLB H-14 & 17), 5.65 (m, 1H, VLB H-7), 5.5 (m, 1H, VLB H-6), 4.15(m,1H, VLB H-8′), 3.82 (s, 3H, VLB C18′—CO2CH3), 3.69 (s, 3H, VLB C16—OCH3), 2.8 (s, 3H, VLB N-CH3), 1.35 (br s, 1H, VLB H-3′), 1.15 (m, 1H, VLB H-2′), 0.9 (t, 3H, J=7 Hz, VLB H-21′), 0.55 (t, 3H, J=6.9 Hz, VLB H-21) ppm.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00179
  • EC1575: A solution of EC1577 (9.5 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (2.0 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (0.50 mL) were added to a solution of EC0312 (10.1 mg) in MeOH (2.0 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (9.5 mg) as a pale yellow solid. LCMS [ESI (M+H)+: 2627]. 1H NMR (D2O, 300 MHz): 8.70 (s), 8.11 (s), 7.62 (d), 7.00 (d), 6.71 (dd), 6.11 (d), 5.80 (d), 5.33 (d), 4.60-4.50 (m), 4.40-4.15 (m), 3.88-3.51 (m), 3.50-3.20 (m), 3.19-2.80 (m), 2.76 (s), 2.60-1.43 (m), 1.40-1.27 (m),1.18 (d), 1.02 (d), 0.97-0.82 (m), 0.76-0.63 (m).
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00180
  • EC1548: A solution of EC1544 (55.1 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (1.95 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (0.30 mL) were added to a solution of EC1248 (58.0 mg) in MeOH (2.30 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (61.5 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS (ESI, M+1) 1993
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00181
  • EC1549: A solution of EC1547 (23.5 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (2.0 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (0.30 mL) were added to a solution of EC1248 (24.7 mg) in MeOH (2.3 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (29.2 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS (ESI, M+1) 1993
    • EXAMPLE.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00182
    • EXAMPLE. EC1299
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00183
  • A solution of ECO259 (35 mg) in 20 mM pH7 phosphate buffer (3.0 mL) and a saturated NaHCO3 solution (1.5 mL) were added to a solution of EC0312 (39 mg) in ACN (5.5 mL) in tandem. The resulting homogeneous solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 min. and then loaded directly onto a preparatory HPLC (Mobile phase A=50 mM NH4HCO3 buffer, pH=7.0. B=ACN. Method: 5-80% B in 20 min.) for purification. Fractions containing the desired product were collected, combined, and freeze-dried to afford the product (25 mg) as a pale yellow solid. MS (ESI, M+1) 1993
    • EXAMPLE
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00184
  • EXAMPLE
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00185
    • EXAMPLE
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00186
  • EC153: MS(ESI, [M+H]+) 1023; (ESI, [M−H]−) 1021; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, 300 MHz): 8.84 (s, 1H), 7.70 (d, 2H), 6.80(d, 2H), 4.60(m, 1H), 4.56 (s, 2H), 4.34 (m, 2H), 4.10(m, 2H), 3.85(m, 2H), 3.60-3.30(m, 5H), 3.20(s, 2H), 318-3.05(m, 1H), 3.0(br, 2H), 2.90-2.70(m, 2H), 2.40-2.00 (m, 4H), 1.95(m, 3 H).
  • EXAMPLES. The following compounds were prepared according to the processes described herein starting from EC0059:
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00187
    • EXAMPLE
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00188
  • COMPARATIVE EXAMPLES. The following comparative compounds are disclosed:
    • COMPARATIVE EXAMPLE
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00189
    • COMPARATIVE EXAMPLE
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00190
    • COMPARATIVE EXAMPLE. EC0923
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00191
    • METHODS AND EXAMPLES
  • General. The following abbreviations are used herein: partial response (PR); complete response (CR), three times per week (M/W/F) (TIW).
  • METHOD. Relative Affinity Assay. The affinity for folate receptors (FRs) relative to folate is determined according to a previously described method (Westerhof, G. R., J. H. Schornagel, et al. (1995) Mol. Pharm. 48: 459-471) with slight modification. Briefly, FR-positive KB cells are heavily seeded into 24-well cell culture plates and allowed to adhere to the plastic for 18 h. Spent incubation media is replaced in designated wells with folate-free RPMI (FFRPMI) supplemented with 100 nM 3H-folic acid in the absence and presence of increasing concentrations of test article or folic acid. Cells are incubated for 60 min at 37° C. and then rinsed 3 times with PBS, pH 7.4. Five hundred microliters of 1% SDS in PBS, pH 7.4, is added per well. Cell lysates are then collected and added to individual vials containing 5 mL of scintillation cocktail, and then counted for radioactivity. Negative control tubes contain only the 3H-folic acid in FFRPMI (no competitor). Positive control tubes contain a final concentration of 1 mM folic acid, and CPMs measured in these samples (representing non-specific binding of label) are subtracted from all samples. Relative affinities are defined as the inverse molar ratio of compound required to displace 50% of 3H-folic acid bound to the FR on KB cells, where the relative affinity of folic acid for the FR is set to 1.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1669 shows high binding affinities towards folate receptors as determined by an in vitro competitive binding assay that measures the ability of the ligand to compete against 3H-folic acid for binding to cell surface folate receptors (FR). EC1669 (). The relative affinity values of EC1669 (normalized against folic acid, which is set to (1) are determined to be 0.53 and 0.13 on KB and CHO-FRβ cells, respectively (see, FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B). In comparison, methotrexate (MTX) showed poor binding to the cell surface FRs. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the high binding affinity of EC1669 allows for efficient cellular uptake via FR-mediated endocytosis.
  • METHOD. Inhibition of Cellular DNA Synthesis. The compounds described herein are evaluated using an in vitro cytotoxicity assay that predicts the ability of the drug to inhibit the growth of folate receptor-positive cells, such as KB cells, RAW264.7 macrophages, and the like. It is to be understood that the choice of cell type can made on the basis of the susceptibility of those selected cells to the drug that forms the conjugate. The test compounds are comprised of folate linked to a respective chemotherapeutic drug, as prepared according to the processes described herein. The test cells are exposed to varying concentrations of folate-drug conjugate, and also in the absence or presence of at least a 100-fold excess of folic acid to assess activity as being specific to folate receptor mediation.
  • EXAMPLE. Conjugates of cytotoxic drugs described herein are active against KB cells. The activity is mediated by the folate receptor as indicated by competition experiments using co-administered folic acid. KB cells are exposed for up to 7 h at 37° C. to the indicated concentrations of folate-drug conjugate in the absence or presence of at least a 100-fold excess of folic acid. The cells are then rinsed once with fresh culture medium and incubated in fresh culture medium for 72 hours at 37° C. Cell viability was assessed using a 3H-thymidine incorporation assay. For compounds described herein, dose-dependent cytotoxicity is generally measurable, and in most cases, the IC50 values (concentration of drug conjugate required to reduce 3H-thymidine incorporation into newly synthesized DNA by 50%) are in the low nanomolar range. Though without being bound by theory, when the cytotoxicities of the conjugates are reduced in the presence of excess free folic acid, it is believed herein that such results indicate that the observed cell death is mediated by binding to the folate receptor.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1669 shows a potent cytostatic effect against murine RAW264.7 macrophages. The anti-proliferative activity of EC1669 is measured in a XTT cell viability assay (FIG. 2) on RAW264.7 cells after a 2-h exposure and a total of 72 h incubation.
  • RAW264.7 macrophages are susceptible to the drug forming the EC1669 conjugate, aminopterin. The cell viability is assessed by adding XTT (2,3-bis(2-methoxy-4-nitro-5-sulfo-phenyl)-2H-tetrazolium-5-carboxanilide) following the manufacturer's instructions. EC1669 showed a dose-dependent inhibition of cell proliferation with a relative IC50 value of ˜1.2 nM. The observed anti-proliferative effect was 100% competable in the presence of 100-fold excess folic acid (FA), indicating a FR-specific mode of action for EC1669.
  • METHOD. In vitro activity against various cancer cell lines. IC50 values are generated for various cell lines. Cells are heavily seeded in 24-well Falcon plates and allowed to form nearly confluent monolayers overnight. Thirty minutes prior to the addition of the test compound, spent medium is aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh folate-deficient RPMI medium (FFRPMI). A subset of wells are designated to receive media containing 100 μM folic acid. The cells in the designated wells are used to determine the targeting specificity. Without being bound by theory it is believed herein that the cytotoxic activity produced by test compounds in the presence of excess folic acid, i.e. where there is competition for FR binding, corresponds to the portion of the total activity that is unrelated to FR-specific delivery. Following one rinse with 1 mL of fresh FFRPMI containing 10% heat-inactivated fetal calf serum, each well receives 1 mL of medium containing increasing concentrations of test compound (4 wells per sample) in the presence or absence of 100 μM free folic acid as indicated. Treated cells are pulsed for 2 h at 37° C., rinsed 4 times with 0.5 mL of media, and then chased in 1 mL of fresh medium up to 70 h. Spent medium is aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh medium containing 5 μCi/mL 3H-thymidine. Following a further 2 h 37° C. incubation, cells are washed 3 times with 0.5 mL of PBS and then treated with 0.5 mL of ice-cold 5% trichloroacetic acid per well. After 15 min, the trichloroacetic acid is aspirated and the cell material solubilized by the addition of 0.5 mL of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide for 15 min. A 450 μL aliquot of each solubilized sample is transferred to a scintillation vial containing 3 mL of Ecolume scintillation cocktail and then counted in a liquid scintillation counter. Final results are expressed as the percentage of 3H-thymidine incorporation relative to untreated controls.
  • EXAMPLE. Compounds described herein exhibit potent in vitro activity against pathogenic cells, such as KB cells. Compounds described herein exhibit greater specificity for the folate receptor compared to compounds that do not include at least one unnatural amino acid. For Example, EC1456 exhibits ca. 1000-fold specificity for the folate receptor as determined by folic acid competition (specificity=difference in IC50 between competed group and non-competed group), and a 4-fold improvement in specificity compared to comparator compound EC0531, which does not include a linker L having an unnatural amino acid.
  • EXAMPLE. Selectivity for folate receptor expressing cells. Compounds described herein show high activity for folate receptor expressing cells. Compounds described herein do not show significant binding to folate receptor negative cells. EC1456 show high competable binding to low and high FR expressing cells (FR+), and does not show binding to cells that do not express FR (FR−).
    • Activity of EC1456 in (FR+) and (FR−) Cell Lines
  • FR Activity Competable
    Cell Line Expression (IC50) up to 100 nM
    KB Human Cervical Carcinoma +++  2.3 nM Yes
    NC1/ADR-RES-Cl2 Human ovarian Carcinoma ++  1.4 nM Yes
    IGROV1 Human ovarian + 0.72 nM Yes
    adenocarcinoma
    MDA-MB-231 Human breast + 0.47 nM Yes
    adenocarcinoma (triple
    negative)
    A549 Human Lung Carcinoma − Inactive (a) NA
    H23 Human Lung − Inactive NA
    adenocarcinoma
    HepG2 Human hepatocellular − Inactive NA
    Carcinoma
    AN3CA Human endometrial − Inactive NA
    adenocarcinoma
    LNCaP Human prostate − ~850 nM  NA
    adenocarcinoma
    (a) activity was evaluated from 0.1-100 nM against these specifically selected (FR-) cell lines (A549, H23, HepG2, AN3CA, LNCaP);
    NA = not applicable.
  • METHOD. Inhibition of Tumor Growth in Mice. Four to seven week-old mice (Balb/c or nu/nu strains) are purchased from Harlan Sprague Dawley, Inc. (Indianapolis, Ind.). Normal rodent chow contains a high concentration of folic acid (6 mg/kg chow); accordingly, test animals are maintained on a folate-free diet (Harlan diet # TD00434) for about 1 week before tumor implantation to achieve serum folate concentrations close to the range of normal human serum, and during the Method. For tumor cell inoculation, 1×106 M109 cells (a syngeneic lung carcinoma) in Balb/c strain, or 1×106 KB cells in nu/nu strain, in 100 μL are injected in the subcutis of the dorsal medial area (right axilla). Tumors are measured in two perpendicular directions every 2-3 days using a caliper, and their volumes are calculated as 0.5×L×W2, where L=measurement of longest axis in mm and W=measurement of axis perpendicular to L in mm. Log cell kill (LCK) and treated over control (T/C) values are then calculated according to published procedures (see, e.g., Lee et al., “BMS-247550: a novel epothilone analog with a mode of action similar to paclitaxel but possessing superior antitumor efficacy” Clin Cancer Res 7:1429-1437 (2001); Rose, “Taxol-based combination chemotherapy and other in vivo preclinical antitumor studies” J Natl Cancer Inst Monogr 47-53 (1993)).
  • Dosing is initiated when the s.c. tumors have an average volume between 50-100 mm3 (t0), typically 8 days post tumor inoculation (PTI) for KB tumors, and 11 days PTI for M109 tumors. Test animals (5/group) are injected i.v., generally three times a week (TIW), for 3 weeks with varying doses, such as with 1 μmol/kg to 5 μmol/kg, of the drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control), unless otherwise indicated. Dosing solutions are prepared fresh each day in PBS and administered through the lateral tail vein of the mice.
  • METHOD. General 4T-1 Tumor Assay. Six to seven week-old mice (female Balb/c strain) are obtained from Harlan, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind. The mice are maintained on Harlan's folate-free chow for a total of three weeks prior to the onset of and during the method. Folate receptor-negative 4T-1 tumor cells (1×106 cells per animal) are inoculated in the subcutis of the right axilla. Approximately 5 days post tumor inoculation when the 4T-1 tumor average volume is ˜100 mm3 (t0), mice (5/group) are injected i.v. three times a week (TIW), for 3 weeks with varying doses, such as 3 μmol/kg, of drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control), unless otherwise indicated herein. Tumor growth is measured using calipers at 2-day or 3-day intervals in each treatment group. Tumor volumes are calculated using the equation V=a×b2/2, where “a” is the length of the tumor and “b” is the width expressed in millimeters.
  • METHOD. Drug Toxicity. Persistent drug toxicity is assessed by collecting blood via cardiac puncture and submitting the serum for independent analysis of blood urea nitrogen (BUN), creatinine, total protein, AST-SGOT, ALT-SGPT plus a standard hematological cell panel at Ani-Lytics, Inc. (Gaithersburg, Md.). In addition, histopathologic evaluation of formalin-fixed heart, lungs, liver, spleen, kidney, intestine, skeletal muscle and bone (tibia/fibula) is conducted by board-certified pathologists at Animal Reference Pathology Laboratories (ARUP; Salt Lake City, Utah).
  • METHOD. Toxicity as Measured by Weight Loss. The percentage weight change of the test animals is determined on selected days post-tumor inoculation (PTI), and during dosing. The results are graphed.
  • EXAMPLE. In vivo activity against tumors. Compounds described herein show high potency and efficacy against KB tumors in nu/nu mice. Compounds described herein show specific activity against folate receptor expressing tumors, with low host animal toxicity. For example, EC1456 shows a complete response in 4/4 test animals when administered intravenously at 1 μmol/kg TIW, 2 wk. EC1456 also shows specific activity mediated by the folate receptor as evidenced by being competable with excess comparator compound EC0923 (50 or 100 μmol/kg), as shown in FIG. 3A. EC1456 does not show any evidence of whole animal toxicity, as shown in FIG. 3B.
  • EXAMPLE. The therapeutic performance of EC1663 was evaluated against the human KB tumors. The data in FIG. 4A show 4/4 partial responses where the tumor volume was significantly decreased compared to control, but did not go to zero, and the tumor began to regrow after dosing ended. It is believed herein that a higher dose may result in a complete response and/or cure. The data in FIG. 4B show that at the administered efficacious dose, whole animal toxicity was not observed.
  • METHOD. TNBC Tumor Assay. Triple negative breast cancer (TNBC) is a subtype characterized by lack of gene expression for estrogen, progesterone and Her2/neu. TNBC is difficult to treat, and the resulting death rate in patients is reportedly disproportionately higher than for any other subtype of breast cancer. A TNBC xenograft model was generated in an analogous way to the KB and M109 models described herein by implanting MDA-MB-231 breast cancer cells in nu/nu mice. Dosing is initiated when the s.c. tumors have an average volume between 110-150 (generally 130) mm3 (t0), typically 17 days post tumor inoculation (PTI). Test animals (5/group) are injected i.v., generally three times a week (TIW), for 2-3 weeks with varying doses, such as with 1 μmol/kg to 5 μmol/kg, of the drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control), unless otherwise indicated. Dosing solutions are prepared fresh each day in PBS and administered through the lateral tail vein of the mice.
  • EXAMPLE. When tested against an established triple negative FR-positive subcutaneous MDA-MB-231 breast cancer xenografts, EC1456 is found to be highly active at 2 μmol/kg intravenous dose administered on a three times per week, 2 consecutive week schedule. The treatment produced 4 of 5 complete responses, where tumor volume was reduced to zero, and regrowth did not occur during the observation window over nearly 135 days. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the test animals were cured of the triple negative breast cancer. The results for EC1456 are shown in FIG. 5A. The anti-tumor activity was not accompanied by significant weight loss in the test animals, as shown in FIG. 5B.
  • METHOD. Human cisplatin-resistant cell line. A human cisplatin-resistant cell line is created by culturing FR-positive KB cells in the presence of increasing cisplatin concentrations (100→2000 nM; over a >12 month period). The cisplatin-resistant cells, labeled as KB-CR2000 cells, are found to be tumorigenic, and are found to retain their FR expression status in vivo. KB-CR2000 tumors are confirmed to be resistant to cisplatin therapy. Treatment with a high, toxic dose of cisplatin (average weight loss of 10.3%, as shown in FIG. 6B), did not produce even a single partial response (PR), as shown in FIG. 6A. In contrast, EC1456 is found to be very active against KB-CR tumors, where 5/5 CRs are observed. In addition, regrowth of the tumor was only observed in 1/5 test animals. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that 4/5 test animals were cured of the cisplatin-resistant cancer, where regrowth did not occur during the nearly 70 day observation period. Furthermore, unlike cisplatin, EC1456 did not cause any weight loss in this cohort of mice, and therefore did not display any evidence of gross animal toxicity during the dosing period.
  • EXAMPLE. Comparison of conjugated and unconjugated drugs. The therapeutic performance of unconjugated tubulysin B and unconjugated TubB-H (EC0347) drugs is evaluated in vivo against human KB tumors in mice. The anti-tumor efficacy and gross toxicity, as determined by body weight changes, of each unconjugated drug are compared to the EC1456 conjugate. EC1456 produced dose responsive anti-tumor activity in this model. Complete responses were observed under treatment conditions that produced little to no weight loss. In contrast, both unconjugated tubulysin-based drugs failed to yield any anti-tumor response, even when very toxic doses were administered to the mice. The results are shown in the following table.
  • Toxicity
    Dose Dosing PR CR Cures Deaths Avg. Weight
    Example (μmol/kg) Schedule (%) (%) (%) (%) Loss
    EC1456 0.5 TIW, 3 weeks 60 0 0 0  <5%*
    0.67 TIW, 2 weeks 60 20 0 0  <2%
    1.0 TIW, 2 weeks 40 60 60 0 <1.5% 
    2.0 TIW, 2 weeks 0 100 100 0  <3%
    Tubulysin B 0.1 (4 doses) TIW, 2 weeks 0 0 0 100 >20%
    0.2 (3 doses) TIW, 2 weeks 0 0 0 100 >18%
    0.5 (1 dose) TIW, 2 weeks 0 0 0 100 >15%
    TubB-H 0.5 TIW, 2 weeks 0 0 0 0 <5.5% 
    0.75 TIW, 2 weeks 0 0 0 20 >10%
    1.0 (2 doses)1 TIW, 2 weeks 0 0 0 20 >15%
    *Untreated control group had an average weight loss of 2.4%
    1Group received only 2 doses due to toxicity.
  • These results confirm that despite tubulysin B and TubBH being highly cytotoxic to cells in culture (typical IC50 ˜1 nM), both agents yielded dose-limiting toxicities in mice at levels that did not produce measurable anti-tumor effect. Thus, the unconjugated compounds do not exhibit a therapeutic window. In contrast, the conjugated forms of the drugs, such as conjugated TubBH (EC1456) produce anti-tumor responses without significant toxicity to mice bearing well-established human tumor xenografts. Conjugation as described herein provides a therapeutic window to highly toxic drugs.
  • EXAMPLE. Compounds described herein exhibit high folate receptor affinity compared to folic acid (relative affinity=1) in 10% serum/FDRPMI, potent in vitro activity, potent in vivo activity, specificity for the folate receptor, and a sufficiently high therapeutic index compared to unconjugated drug.
  • Therapeutic
    In vitro 50% In vitro index over
    Relative IC50 competition specificity In vivo unconjugated
    Example Affinity (a) (nM) (b) (nM) (c) (fold) (d) activity (e) drug (f)
    EC1299 0.29 0.9 700 778 CR Yes
    EC1393 0.25 2.2 600 300 NT NT
    EC1456 0.27 1.5 1416  944 CR Yes
    EC1548 0.23 4.4 350 78 CR Yes
    EC1549 0.90 4.5 350 78 CR Yes
    EC1586 0.56 NT NT NT NT NT
    EC0531 NT 1.5 355 237 CR Yes
    (comparator
    example)
    (a) compared to folic acid;
    (b) as determined by thymidine incorporation;
    (c) IC50 for test compound when competed with excess folic acid; the higher the IC50 the more specific is the folate mediation.;
    (d) in vitro specificity = difference in IC50 between competed group and non-competed group;
    (e) as determined in subcutaneous KB tumor in nu/nu mice;
    CR = complete response, where tumor volume, as defined herein, during the observation period was zero for all test animals in the group;
    (f) parent tubulysin;
    NT = not tested.
  • METHOD. Adjuvant-Induced Arthritis (AIA) Model. Female Lewis rats are fed a folate-deficient diet (Harlan Teklad, Indianapolis, Ind.) for 9-10 days prior to arthritis induction. The adjuvant-induced arthritis (AIA) is induced by intradermal inoculation (at the base of tail) of 0.4-0.5 mg of heat-killed Mycobacteria butyricum (BD Diagnostic Systems, Sparks, Md.) in 100 μL light mineral oil (Sigma). Ten days after arthritis induction, paw edema (degree of arthritis) in rats is assessed using a modified arthritis scoring system: 0=no arthritis; 1=swelling in one type of joint; 2=swelling in two types of joint; 3=swelling in three types of joint; 4=swelling of the entire paw. A total score for each rat is calculated by summarizing the scores for each of the four paws, giving a maximum score of 16 for each rat. On Day 10 post arthritis induction, rats with a total arthritis score of ≥2 were removed from the study and the remaining rats are distributed evenly across the control and treatment groups (n=5 for all groups except that n=2-3 for healthy controls). All treatments are started on Day 10 unless indicated otherwise. Rat paws are also evaluated radiographically to assess and determine bone damage.
  • EXAMPLE. Compounds described herein are potent in treating inflammatory diseases, such as inflammation and bone damage accompanying arthritis. EC1496 is potent and efficacious in the reducing paw inflammation in a rat model of adjuvant-induced arthritis, as shown in FIG. 7. FIG. 7 shows that EC1496 is efficacious in preventing the development of arthritis based on the evaluation of paw edema. EC1496 (trace (d)) is significantly different from untreated control (trace (b)). In addition, the data indicate that the effect is folate receptor mediated because EC1496 (trace (d)) is also significantly different from the competition control group where EC1496 is co-administered with excess folic acid (trace (d)).
  • EXAMPLE. Compounds described herein are potent in treating inflammatory diseases, such as inflammation and bone damage accompanying arthritis. Illustratively, EC1496 is potent and efficacious in reducing and/or preventing bone damage in a rat model of adjuvant-induced arthritis, as determined by radiographic analysis. The radiography shows that the treated animals do not exhibit the bone damage seen in the untreated control animals, based on visual scoring. Instead, the treated animals and the healthy animals show similar bone structure.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1669 displays folate receptor-specific activity against adjuvant arthritis. Starting 9 days after induction, rats with developing AIA are distributed according to arthritis scores into three groups (n=5): (1) the untreated AIA control, (2) the EC1669 treated group, and (3) the EC1669 plus EC0923 competition group. All treatments last for 2 consecutive weeks. The animals in the AIA control group are left untreated. The animals in the EC1669 treatment group are given twice-a-week subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 375 nmol/kg. The animals in the EC1669 plus EC0923 group are given twice-a-week subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 375 nmol/kg in conjunction to EC0923 at a dosage of 187.5 μmol/kg. The study endpoints are shown in FIG. 8A, FIG. 8B, FIG. 9A, and FIG. 9B are: (a) arthritis score; (b) change in body weight; and (c) paw swelling, assessed by percent increase in paw weight (collected 4 days after the last dose), and (d) bone radiography. EC1669 is found to be highly effective in alleviating paw swelling (by ˜80% compared to control) and bone damage (by ˜80% compared to control). The anti-arthritic activity of EC1669 is competable (blocked) with the folate competitor (EC0923).
  • EXAMPLE. In a subsequent dosing study, various EC1669 dosing regiments were evaluated including once-a-week at 1000 nmol/kg, twice-a-week at 250 nmol/kg, and twice-a-week at 500 nmol/kg. Surprisingly, twice-a-week dosing at 250 nmol/kg was superior to once-a-week dosing at 1000 nmol/kg, a two-fold decrease in total dose. EC1669 was found more efficacious when dosed biweekly than once weekly in reducing paw swelling at 81% reduction at 500 nmol/kg, biw, and 64% reduction at 250 nmol/kg, biw, compared to a 44% reduction at 1000 nmol/kg, siw.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1669 plus CellCept is more effective than either agent alone against adjuvant-induced arthritis. CellCept is a prodrug of mycophenolic acid, an immunosuppressant drug used to prevent organ rejection in transplantation. CellCept is activated in vivo and releases its active product that can inhibit T cell proliferation and interfere with leukocyte adhesion to endothelial cells. To test the combination effect of EC1669 and CellCept, rats with developing AIA are distributed according to arthritis scores into four groups (n=5): (1) the untreated AIA control, (2) the EC1669 treated group, (3) the CellCept treated group, and (4) the EC1669 and CellCept combination group. All treatments start on day 9 after AIA induction and last 2 consecutive weeks. The animals in the AIA control group are untreated. The animals in the EC1669 treatment group are given weekly subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 1000 nmol/kg. The animals in the CellCept treatment group are given daily oral doses of CellCept at a dosage of 30 mg/kg, 5 days per week. The animals in the EC1669 and CellCept combination treatment group are given weekly subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 1000 nmol/kg and daily oral doses of CellCept at a dosage of 30 mg/kg, 5 days per week. As shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 11, the EC1669 and CellCept combination therapy is more effective than either agent alone in reducing arthritis scores, paw swelling, and weight loss due to disease progression. FIG. 10B shows that the EC1669 and CellCept combination therapy causes lower toxicity than either drug given alone.
  • METHOD. Collagen-Induced Arthritis (CIA) Model. The collagen-induced arthritis (CIA) is induced in female Lewis rats on folate-deficient diet (Harlan Teklad, Indianapolis, Ind.). On Day 0, rats are immunized with 500 μg of bovine collagen Type II (Chondrex, Redmond, Wash.) formulated with Freund's complete adjuvant. A booster immunization is given on Day 7 with 250 μg of the bovine collagen formulated with Freund's incomplete adjuvant. Arthritis disease is assessed by a qualitative clinical score system described by the manufacturer (Chondrex, Redmond, Wash.): 0=normal, 1=Mild, but definite redness and swelling of the ankle or wrist, or apparent redness and swelling limited to individual digits, regardless of the number of affected digits, 2=Moderate redness and swelling of ankle of wrist, 3=Severe redness and swelling of the entire paw including digits, and 4=Maximally inflamed limb with involvement of multiple joints. On Day 10 post first immunization, rats are distributed evenly (according to the arthritis score) across the control and treatment groups. The CIA rats are given ten consecutive subcutaneous doses of test compound on days 10-19. For each drug, an induction dose (for example, 500 nmol/kg) is given on days 10 and 15 and a maintenance dose (for example, 100 nmol/kg) is given on days 11-14 and 16-19. The animals in the arthritis control group are left untreated. The arthritis score and animal body weight are recorded five times a week.
  • METHOD. Animal Experimental Autoimmune Uveitis Model. Experimental autoimmune uveitis (EAU) is induced in female Lewis rats maintained on a folate-deficient diet (Harlan Teklad, Indianapolis, Ind.). On Day 0, the animals are immunized subcutaneously with 25 μg of bovine S-Ag PDSAg peptide formulated with Freund's incomplete adjuvant containing 0.5 mg of grounded M. Tuberculosis H37Ra. Purified pertussis toxin (PT) is given at a dosage of 1 μg per animal on the same day via intraperitoneal injection. The severity of uveitis in each eye is assessed by a qualitative visual score system: 0=No disease, eye is translucent and reflects light (red reflex); 0.5 (trace)=Dilated blood vessels in the iris, 1=Engorged blood vessels in iris, abnormal pupil contraction; 2=Hazy anterior chamber, decreased red reflex; 3=Moderately opaque anterior chamber, but pupil still visible, dull red reflex; and 4=Opaque anterior chamber and obscured pupil, red reflex absent, proptosis. This assessment yields a maximum uveitis score of 8 per animal.
  • EXAMPLE. Compounds described herein are potent in treating autoimmune uveitis. EC1669 displays folate receptor-specific activity against autoimmune uveitis. Animals presenting EAU are randomized and distributed into three groups: (1) the untreated EAU control (n=11), (2) the test compound treated group (n=7), such as EC1669, (3) the test compound and competitor compound treated group (n=7), such as EC1669 plus EC0923, and (4) the positive control treated group (n=7), such as methotrexate (MTX). All treatments start on day 8 after EAU induction. The animals in the EAU control group are untreated. The animals in the EC1669 treatment group are given five subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day (q2d). The animals in the EC1669 plus EC0923 treatment group are given five subcutaneous doses of EC1669 at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day plus a 500-fold excess of EC0923 at a dosage of 125 μmol/kg as the folate competitor. The animals in the MTX treatment group are given five subcutaneous doses of MTX at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day. The uveitis score and animal body weight are recorded for each animal at predetermined frequencies. The clinical severity of EAU is monitored on a daily basis using an ophthalmoscope and graded on a scale of 0 to 4 per eye with a maximum possible score of 8 per animal. On day 16, the animals are euthanized and rat eye balls are fixed in formalin for histology. As shown in FIG. 12A, EC1669 treatment at disease on-set effectively reduces the symptoms of EAU in a FR-dependent manner and its activity is competitive with subcutaneous MTX. Treatment-related weight loss was not observed with the conjugate compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, as shown in FIG. 12B.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1496 is potent and efficacious against folate receptor specific autoimmune uveitis, as shown in FIG. 13A. Tissues are evaluated by histology as shown in FIG. 13B.
  • METHOD. Autoimmune Encephalomyelitis (EAE) Model. EAE is induced in rats by immunization against 25 μg of guinea pig myelin basic protein (MBP) formulated with CFA containing 1 mg of grounded Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra. Pertussis toxin is given intraperitoneally (1 μg/rat) to enhance the organ-specific autoimmunity. Starting 8 days after induction, rats are divided into 4 groups: (1) untreated control (n=8), (2) test compound (n=7), and (3) test compound plus competitor compound (n=7), such as EC0923 competition. All treatments start on day 8 after EAE induction. The animals in the EAE control group are left untreated. The animals in the test compound treatment group are given four subcutaneous doses of test compound at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day (q2d). The animals in the test compound plus competitor compound treatment group are given four subcutaneous doses of test compound at a dosage of 250 nmol/kg every other day plus a 500-fold excess of competitor compound, such as EC0923 at a dosage of 125 μmol/kg as an illustrative folate receptor competitor. The clinical severity of EAE is monitored on a daily basis and graded on a scale of 0 to 5 per animal. The clinical signs of ascending paralysis of EAE rats are divided into a 0-5 scale: 0=No disease, 0.5=distal limp tail, 1=limp tail, 2=mild paraparesis; ataxia-weakened hind limbs, 3=moderate paraparesis; hind limbs paresis, 4=complete hind limb paralysis, 5=complete hind limb paralysis and incontinence (euthanasia). On day 16, the animals are euthanized and brain and spinal cords are fixed in formalin for histology.
  • EXAMPLE. Compounds described herein are potent in treating experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE). EC1669 displays folate receptor-specific activity against EAE. As shown in FIG. 14A, EC1669 treatment at disease on-set effectively suppresses the neurological symptoms during the acute phase of EAE. Treatment-related weight loss was not observed with EC1669 when dose alone, as shown in FIG. 14B. The therapeutic effect of EC1669 is blocked by the folate receptor competitor EC0923.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1496 is potent and efficacious against EAE, as shown in FIG. 15. Treatment-related weight loss was not observed with EC1496 when dosed alone.
  • METHOD. Human serum stability. Compounds described herein are tested in human serum for stability using conventional protocols and methods. Briefly, test compound is administered to the test animal, such as by subcutaneous injection. The plasma concentration of the conjugate, and optionally one or more metabolites, is monitored over time. The results are graphed to determine Cmax, Tmax, half-life, and AUC for the test compound and metabolites.
  • EXAMPLE. Conjugate compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid are more stable in plasma than comparator conjugate compounds that do not have a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid. EC1495 and EC0746 (comparator compound) are each administered at 500 nmol/kg by subcutaneous injection. The plasma concentration of the conjugate and the metabolites (aminopterin and aminopterin hydrazide) are monitored over time. EC1496 shows a higher Cmax than EC0746, as shown in FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B, respectively. In addition, FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B show that EC1496 releases substantially less drug in plasma than does EC0746. As also shown in the following table, free drug is released as the parent aminopterin and the hydrazide derivative (EC0470).
  • Free drug released From From
    (%) EC0746 EC1496
    AMT 11.0 5.13
    AMT-hydrazide 7.4 3.15
    (EC0470)
    Total 18.4 8.28
  • Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the data indicate that the compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, such as EC1496, exhibit greater plasma stability. In addition, the comparative example EC0746, which does not include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, releases more than 2-fold more drug than the EC1496 after a subcutaneous dose in rats. EC1496 also shows a higher Cmax than EC0746 leading to a higher effective therapeutic dose. Finally, EC1496 shows a shorter half-life. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that rapid clearance may further lead to lower toxicity because the duration of exposure to prematurely released drug from the conjugates described herein, compared to compounds that do not include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, will also be decreased.
  • METHOD. Plasma clearance. In vivo studies include a minimum of 3 test animals, such as rats, per time point. Illustratively, female Lewis rats with jugular vein catheters (Harlan, regular rodent diet) are given a single subcutaneous injection of test compound, such as EC1669 at 500 nmol/kg. Whole blood samples (300 μL) are collected at the following time points: 1 min, 10 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 3 h, 4 h, 8 h, and 12 h after injection. The blood samples are placed into anti-coagulant tubes containing 1.7 mg/mL of K3-EDTA and 0.35 mg/mL of N-maleoyl-beta-alanine (0.35 mg/mL) in a 0.15% acetic acid solution. Plasma samples are obtained by centrifugation for 3 min at ˜2,000 g and stored at −80° C. The amounts of test compound in the plasma and any metabolites, such as EC1669 and its two active metabolites aminopterin (AMT) and AMT hydrazide (EC0470), respectively, are quantified by LC-MS/MS.
  • EXAMPLE. EC1669 shows fast plasma clearance after subcutaneous administration in rats. EC1669 is detectable in the blood stream within minutes, with a Cmax of ˜472 nM occurring at ˜30 min post dose, and it maintained a plateau until 60 min after the injection. The EC1669-derived AMT and EC0470 are detected at similar Cmax values of 27 nM and 21 nM, respectively, but there is a 30-min delay in comparison to the EC1669 Cmax. While EC1669 itself is cleared rapidly from the blood with an elimination half-life of ˜37 min, the elimination half-lives of the two metabolites are approximately 2-3 times longer at 66 min (AMT) and 112 min (EC0470), respectively. The corresponding area-under-the-curve (AUC) values for EC1669, AMT and EC0470 are 52, 5.9, and 3.9 nmol*min/mL, respectively. Based on their AUC responses, ˜15.8% of active drug exposure/release (AMT plus EC0470) is estimated in the plasma over the 12 h collection period, a shown in the following table.
  • Metabolites % Released AMT/EC0470 Ratio
    Total 15.8 1.51
    AMT 9.5
    EC0470 6.3
  • Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the fast plasma clearance observed for the compounds described herein, such as EC1669, may result in lower host animal toxicity because the duration of exposure to prematurely released drug from the conjugates described herein, compared to compounds that do not include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, will also be decreased.
  • METHOD. Pharmacokinetic biodistribution. Studies in this section included a minimum of 3 test animals (mice) per time point. The pharmacokinetic biodistribution of test compound, such as 3H-EC1669 (label on the drug), compared to positive control, such as 3H-methotrexate (3H-MTX), is observed in female Balb/c mice on folate-deficient diet. Compounds are administered as a single subcutaneous (SC) injection at 500 nmol/kg. Whole blood (>300 μL) along with ˜100 mg each of various tissues of interests are collected at various time points (such as 10 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 8 h, 12 h, 24 h, and 72 h). The blood samples are placed in BD microtainer tubes (heparin) and centrifuged (4,000 g×3 min, 4° C.) to separate plasma (>100 μL). The remaining red blood cell (RBC) mass is washed 2× with phosphate buffered saline (PBS, pH 7.4) to obtain RBCs. The collected tissues are weighed and processed to determine 3H-EC1669 and 3H-MTX distribution: plasma, RBC, heart, lung, liver (the smallest lobe), spleen, kidney (1), intestine (above cecum), fecal material (from colon), muscle, and brain.
  • EXAMPLE. Comparison of pharmacokinetic biodistribution of3H-EC1669 and 3H-methotrexate after subcutaneous administration. The comparative pharmacokinetic biodistribution results are shown in FIG. 17 (as percent injected dose per gram (% ID/g)). At 10 min post-dose, 31% ID/g of 3H-MTX is captured by the liver. Twice as much 3H-EC1669 is found in the plasma than 3H-MTX (12% versus 5.2% ID/g). 3H-MTX retention in RBCs, spleen, liver, intestine, and feces are also consistently higher than that of 3H-EC1669 during the entire sampling period. The RBC data is also plotted in FIG. 18 showing that 3H-MTX retention is higher than EC1669. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein these data suggest that EC1669 differs significantly from MTX in hepatic clearance, where MTX is preferentially cleared by the liver. Without being bound by theory, it is also believed herein these data suggest that EC1669 differs significantly from MTX in RBC uptake, suggesting different methods of cellular entry. MTX reportedly enters cells non-specifically, typically via the ubiquitously expressed reduced folate carrier (RFC). The compounds described herein are shown to enter cells specifically through the functional folate receptor. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the RBC data further support the folate receptor mediated activity of the conjugates described herein.
  • In a subsequent renal/hepatic secretion study, mice are housed in metabolic cages with a 6-h fast before subcutaneous administration of 3H-EC1669 or 3H-MTX. At 24 h post-dose, ˜14% more radioactivity is found in the pooled urine of 3H-EC1669 dosed animals than in 3H-MTX dosed animals. In contrast, twice as much radioactivity was found in the pooled feces of 3H-MTX dosed animals than in EC1669 dosed animals. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein these data suggest that EC1669 differs significantly from MTX in renal to hepatic clearance ratio, where EC1669 is preferentially cleared by the kidneys, rather than the liver. MTX reportedly causes hepatotoxicity as a major side effect, especially after long-term use. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the preferential renal clearance of the compounds described herein will lead to fewer side effects such as hepatotoxicity.
  • EXAMPLE. Compounds described herein are less toxic than compounds that do not have a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid. Test compounds are administered i.v. at equivalent doses to folate deficient rats. As shown in FIG. 19, conjugates described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid, such as EC1496, are less toxic than the corresponding conjugate that does not, such as comparative example EC0746.
  • EXAMPLE. Maximum tolerated dose (MTD). Conjugate compounds described herein that include a linker comprising at least one unnatural amino acid show high MTDs, which are improved over compounds that do not have linkers comprising one or more unnatural amino acids. Test compounds are administered by i.v., BIW, 2 wks in female Sprague-Dawley rats. Comparator compound EC0531 has a MTD of 0.33 μmol/kg, while EC1456 has a MTD of at least 0.51 μmol/kg, a 65% improvement, as shown in FIG. 20. Histopathologic changes were not observed with doses of EC1456 at or below the MTD.
  • EXAMPLE. Targeting the Tumor-Associated Folate Receptor with a 111In-DTPA Conjugate of Pteroic Acid
  • Objective. The present study was undertaken to evaluate the structural requirements for folate-receptor-targeting with low-molecular-weight radiometal chelates, specifically examining the role of the amino acid fragment of folic acid (pteroyl-glutamic acid) in mediating folate-receptor affinity.
  • Methods. The amide-linked conjugate pteroyl-NHCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2NH-DTPA (CYK4-013), which lacks an amino acid in the linker region, was prepared by a three-step procedure from pteroic acid, 2,2′-(ethylenedioxy)-bis(ethylamine), and t-Bu-protected DTPA.
  • Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00192
  • CY3-064 was obtained from pteroic acid (0.025 g; 0.080 mmol) and a large excess of 2,2′-(ethylenedioxy)-bis(ethylamine) (0.237 g; 1.6 mmol) using the coupling reagents. Benzotriazole-1-yl-oxy-tris(pyrrolidino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP) (0.125 g; 0.24 mmol), N-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.037 g; 0.24 mmol), and N-methylmorpholine (Nmm)(0.049 g; 0.48 mmol) in dry dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) (0.8 mL) at room temperature for 22 hours under nitrogen. The excess reagent and solvent DMSO were removed under vacuum and the resulting brown residue triturated with diethylether, methanol, and water to produce 20 mg of CY3-064 as a yellow solid (57% estimated yield).
  • This yellow solid was then coupled with t-butyl-protected DTPA (synthesized as described by S. A. Chilefu, et al., J. Org. Chem., 2000, 65:1562-1565) using the same coupling reagents (0.012 g CY3-064; 0.071 g t-Bu-DTPA, 0.127 mmol; 0.0848 g PyBOP, 0.16 mmol; 0.0249 g HOBt, 0.16 mmol; 0.0247 g Nmm, 0.24 mmol; 0.6 mL dry DMSO). During coupling, the solubility of CY3-064 was very poor in the DMSO solvent, and not improved by addition of more Nmm. 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8-hexahydro-1-methyl-2H-pyrimido[1,2-a]-pyrimidine (MTBD) (0.0083 g; 0.0542 mmol) was added after stirring overnight at room temperature, but the solubility remained poor. After again stirring overnight, the DMSO and excess reagents were removed under high vacuum overnight.
  • The resulting brown residue was triturated first with diethylether and then with methanol. The methanol suspension was centrifuged to produce crude CY3-078 as a yellow solid. This yellow solid was purified using semi-preparative HPLC (2×) on a C18 column (10×250 mm) to produce pure CY3-078. (HPLC solvent A=5% CH3CN in 0.1% aqueous TFA; solvent B=10% water in 0.1% TFA in CH3CN. Linear gradients established as: 5% B at time=zero ramping to 70% B at 30 minutes, then ramping to 100% B at 32 minutes, and remaining 100% B to 40 minutes. Flow rate=2.35 mL/min). The peak with retention time of 30.5 minutes was collected. The purified CY3-078 was treated with 70% TFA/CH2Cl2 at 0° C. for 30 minutes, and stirred at room temperature for 5 hours, to remove the three t-Bu protecting groups. The resulting CYK4-013 product (6 mg) was isolated by trituration with diethylether. Both CY3-078 and CYK4-013 exhibit the expected parent ion peaks in their positive and negative ion electrospray mass spectra. In particular, purified CYK4-013 exhibited the expected parent ion peaks in its positive and negative ion electrospray mass spectra (m/e=818 and 816, respectively).
  • The 111In complex of CYK4-013 was prepared from 111In-chloride (1.2 mCi; 44 MBq) and purified by reversed-phase HPLC. Specifically, the 111In complex of CYK4-013 was prepared from 111In-chloride via ligand exchange in acetate buffer. Briefly, 1.2 mCi no-carrier-added 111In-chloride (Mallinckrodt, Inc., St. Louis) in 0.05 mL 0.05 N HCl was transferred to a small tube and 0.05 mL 0.1N ammonium acetate (pH 5.5), followed by 0.02 mL 0.5N ammonium acetate (pH 7.4) was added, producing a solution with pH 7. The CYK4-013 ligand was weighed out and diluted in water, pH adjusted with 1N NaOH to pH 9-10. 10 μL of this ligand solution containing 95 μg CYK4-013 was added to the 111In-acetate solution (120 μL) and mixed. The solution was protected from light and kept at room temperature.
  • The radiochemical purity of the resulting crude 111In-CYK4-013 was evaluated by radio-HPLC using a 4.6×250 mm Dynamax C18 column (Varian/Rainin) eluted with an aqueous NH4O Ac:acetonitrile gradient. HPLC conditions: Solvent A=56 mM NH4OAc in water; Solvent B=CH3CN. Flow rate=1 mL/min on 4.6×250 mm C18 reverse-phase column. Linear gradient conditions: 5% B at zero minutes, ramping to 25% B at 25 minutes, then ramping to 60% B at 27 minutes and 100% B at 30 minutes).
  • The major radioactive HPLC peak, eluting with a retention time of 14.1 minutes, was collected. HPLC analysis of this isolated peak showed it to remain stable for at least 7 days at room temperature. HPLC conditions: Solvent A=56 mM NH4OAc in water; Solvent B=CH3CN. Flow rate=1 mL/min on 4.6×250 mm C18 reverse-phase column. Linear gradient conditions: 5% B at zero minutes, ramping to 25% B at 25 minutes, then ramping to 60% B at 27 minutes and 100% B at 30 minutes.
  • Radio-TLC of the HPLC-purified 111In-CYK4-013 was performed using a C18 plate eluted with 25% NH4OAc; 75% acetonitrile. The results confirm the absence of 111In-species that irreversibly adsorb to C18 (i.e., there is no 111In remaining at origin)
  • The HPLC-purified 111In-CYK4-013 was removed from the HPLC solvents by solid-phase extraction. A C18 Sep-Pak Light solid phase extraction cartridge (Millipore, Inc.) was conditioned by washing with ethanol followed by water. The 111In-CYK4-013 was loaded onto the C18 Sep-Pak after dilution with water to 5% acetonitrile, the Sep-Pak was washed with 3 mL water, and the 111In-CYK4-013 product was recovered by fractional elution with ethanol. The resulting ethanol solution of 111In-CYK4-013 was evaporated to dryness under a stream of N2 at room temperature, and the 111In-CYK4-013 was reconstituted in saline for use in a biodistribution study in mice.
  • Our primary animal model for evaluation of the biodistribution and pharmacokinetics of folate-receptor-targeted radiopharmaceuticals has been athymic mice bearing subcutaneously implanted folate-receptor-positive human KB cell tumors. Because normal rodent chow contains a high concentration of folic acid (6 mg/kg chow), the mice used in these receptor targeting studies were maintained on folate-free diet for 3 weeks to achieve serum folate concentrations close to the 4-6 μg/L (9-14 nM) range of normal human serum. After 3 weeks on folate-free diet, mouse serum folate levels drop to 25±7 nM from the initial 720±260 nM serum folate level when the animals are fed normal rodent chow. This dietary intervention is believed to be a reasonable manipulation of the animal model, since the mice would have serum folate levels only slightly higher than the folate concentration of normal human serum. Thus, in these mouse biodistribution studies the radiotracer is competing for tumor folate receptors with physiologically relevant concentrations of endogenous unlabeled serum folate.
  • Thus, to demonstrate the ability of such conjugates to selectively localize in folate-receptor-positive tissues, the biodistribution of 111In-CYK4-013 was determined following intravenous administration to athymic mice with subcutaneous folate-receptor-positive human KB cell tumor xenografts. The resulting data are presented in Tables 1 and 2. The 111In-CYK4-013 agent is found to selectively localize in the folate-receptor-positive tumors (5.4±0.8 and 5.5±1.1 percent of the injected 111In dose per gram of tumor at 1 hour and 4 hours post-injection, respectively) and to exhibit prolonged tumor retention of the radiolabel (3.6±0.6 percent of the injected 111In dose per gram of tumor still remaining at 24 hours post-injection). The tumor localization of the 111In-radiolabel clearly appears to be mediated by the cellular folate receptor, since the tumor uptake of radiotracer drops precipitously (0.12±0.07 percent of the injected 111In dose per gram at 4 hours) when 111In-CYK4-013 is co-injected with an excess of folic acid, which will compete for folate receptor sites. Urinary excretion appears to be the primary whole-body clearance pathway for the 111In-CYK4-013. The substantial retention of 111In in the kidneys is fully consistent with the binding of 111In-CYK4-013 to tissue folate receptors, since the renal proximal tubule is a known normal tissue site of folate receptor expression. This interpretation is supported by the expected and observed marked reduction in renal 111In when 111In-CYK4-013 is co-administered with excess folic acid. The behavior of the 111In-CYK4-013 radiopharmaceutical in this animal model (Table 2) is very similar to that observed for 111In-DTPA-Folate (Table 3).
  • Results. Biodistribution of 111In-CYK4-013 is shown in Tables 1-3. Similar to 111In-DTPA-Folate, 111In-CYK4-013 selectively localized in the folate-receptor-positive tumor xenografts, and afforded prolonged tumor retention 111-In (5.4±0.8; 5.5±1.1; and 3.6±0.6% ID/g at 1 hour, 4 hours, and 24 hours, respectively) (Table 2). The tumor localization of the 111In-radiolabel appears to be mediated by the cellular folate receptor, since the tumor uptake dropped precipitously (0.12±0.07%ID/g at 4 hours) when 111In-CYK4-013 was co-injected with an excess of folic acid (Table 2). Blockable binding was also observed in the kidneys, where the folate receptor occurs in the proximal tubules.
  • TABLE 1
    Biodistribution of 111In-CYK4-013 in KB Tumor-Bearing Athymic Mice
    at Various Times Following Introvenous Administration
    Percentage of Injected 111In Dose Per Organ (Tissue)
    1 Hour 4 Hours 4 Hours - Blocked** 24 Hours
    Tumormass (g): 0.15 ± 0.10 0.080 ± 0.031 0.077 ± 0.010 0.104 ± 0.097
    Animalmass (g): 29.5 ± 1.2  28.6 ± 1.6  28.2 ± 1.1  28.6 ± 0.8 
    Animal Quantity & Gender: 3 M 4 M 4 M 4 M
    Blood:  0.29 ± 0.003 0.078 ± 0.010 0.025 ± 0.015 0.055 ± 0.002
    Heart: 0.51 ± 0.09 0.41 ± 0.08 0.0023 ± 0.0016 0.18 ± 0.06
    Lungs: 0.69 ± 0.06 0.60 ± 0.01 0.0082 ± 0.0051 0.34 ± 0.03
    Liver & Gall Bladder: 6.8 ± 1.3 3.0 ± 1.0 0.074 ± 0.044 1.7 ± 0.9
    Spleen: 0.063 ± 0.016 0.049 ± 0.012 0.0049 ± 0.0029 0.055 ± 0.017
    Kidney (one): 15.3 ± 1.2  20.2 ± 1.6  0.23 ± 0.15 26.8 ± 2.7 
    Stomach, Intestines & Contents: 5.8 ± 0.5 5.4 ± 0.8 4.6 ± 2.8 3.3 ± 0.6
    Muscle: 43.6 ± 4.1  33 ± 9  1.0 ± 0.7 23.1 ± 7.0 
    Tumor: 0.78 ± 0.47 0.46 ± 0.26 0.0094 ± 0.0061 0.42 ± 0.4 
    *Athymic mice (NuNu strain) with subcutaneous tumors. Born Sep. 11, 2000. Arrived Oct. 10, 2000. Initiated folate-free diet Oct. 10, 2000. Implanted on Oct. 20, 2000; 0.25 × 106 KB cells (passage 9) per animal subcutaneous in intrascapular region. Study date: Nov. 2, 2000. Values shown represent the mean ± standard deviation. Blood was assumed to account for 5.5% of total body mass. Muscle was assumed to account for 42% of the total body mass.
    **Folate receptors blocked by co-injection of folic acid dihydrate at a dose of 4.1 ± 0.4 mg/kg
  • TABLE 2
    Biodistribution of 111In-CYK4-013 in KB
    Tumor-Bearing Athymic Mice at Various Times
    Following Intravenous Administration
    Percentage of Injected 111In
    Dose Per Gram (Tissue Wet Mass)
    4 Hours -
    1 Hour 4 Hours Blocked** 24 Hours
    Tumormass (g): 0.15 ± 0.10 0.080 ± 0.031 0.077 ± 0.010 0.104 ± 0.097
    Animalmass (g): 29.5 ± 1.2  28.6 ± 1.6  28.2 ± 1.1  28.6 ± 0.8 
    Animal 3 M 4 M 4 M 4 M
    Quantity &
    Gender:
    Blood: 0.18 ± 0.01 0.050 ± 0.009 0.016 ± 0.010 0.035 ± 0.002
    Heart: 3.5 ± 0.4 2.9 ± 0.9 0.015 ± 0.010 1.2 ± 0.5
    Lungs: 1.5 ± 0.2 1.4 ± 0.3 0.041 ± 0.027 0.72 ± 0.21
    Liver & Gall 4.3 ± 0.7 1.9 ± 0.6 0.051 ± 0.029 1.2 ± 0.6
    Bladder:
    Spleen: 0.31 ± 0.09 0.29 ± 0.07 0.028 ± 0.017 0.27 ± 0.08
    Kidney (one): 61 ± 5  81 ± 7  0.90 ± 0.59 105 ± 7 
    Stomach, 1.7 ± 0.2 1.5 ± 0.9 1.7 ± 1.1 1.2 ± 0.2
    Intestines &
    Contents:
    Muscle: 3.5 ± 0.5 2.8 ± 0.8 0.080 ± 0.057 1.9 ± 0.6
    Tumor: 5.4 ± 0.8 5.6 ± 1.1 0.12 ± 0.07 3.6 ± 0.6
    Tumor/blood 30 ± 5  111 ± 11  7.5 ± 2.4 105 ± 20 
    Tumor/kidney 0.088 ± 0.013 0.069 ± 0.013 0.12 ± 0.03 0.035 ± 0.008
    Tumor/liver 1.3 ± 0.4 3.0 ± 0.5 2.2 ± 0.6 3.7 ± 1.4
    Tumor/muscle 1.6 ± 0.4 2.1 ± 0.2 1.5 ± 0.7 2.0 ± 0.6
    *Athymic mice (NuNu strain) with subcutaneous tumors. Vulues shown represent the mean ± standard deviation.
    **Folate receptors blocked by co-injection of folic acid dihydrate at a dose of 4.1 ± 0.4 mg/kg.
  • TABLE 3
    Biodistribution of 111In-DTPA-Folate in Athymic
    Mice with Subcutaneous KB Cell Tumor Xenografts
    Percentage of Inject 111In
    Dose Per Gram (mean ± s.d.: n = 4)
    4 Hours Post
    1 Hour 4 Hours Injection
    Pose Injection Post Injection BLOCKED
    Tumormass (g): 0.138 ± 0.051 0.202 ± 0.083 0.193 ± 0.078
    Animalmass (g): 24 ± 2  25 ± 1  24 ± 1 
    Folic Acid Dose 0 0 495 ± 79 
    (μg/kg):
    Blood: 0.014 ± 0.03 0.064 ± 0.007 0.029 ± 0.011
    Heart: 2.3 ± 0.4 2.0 ± 0.3 0.022 ± 0.010
    Lungs: 1.3 ± 0.1 1.1 ± 0.3 0.065 ± 0.021
    Liver & Gall 4.0 ± 1.5 2.2 ± 0.4 0.12 ± 0.03
    Bladder:
    Spleen: 0.36 ± 0.03 0.35 ± 0.11 0.060 ± 0.021
    Kidney: 90 ± 9  85 ± 12  2.3 ± 1.0*
    Stomach, 1.0 ± 0.2 1.0 ± 0.2 0.49 ± 0.20
    Intestines &
    Contents:
    Muscle: 3.5 ± 0.8 2.9 ± 0.7 0.023 ± 0.013
    Tumor: 5.3 ± 0.4 6.8 ± 1.2 0.16 ± 0.07
    Tumor/blood 38 ± 7  106 ± 15  5.5 ± 0.8
    Tumor/kidney 0.060 ± 0.011 0.080 ± 0.012 0.050 ± 0.023
    Tumor/liver 1.5 ± 0.5 3.3 ± 1.1 1.4 ± 0.4
    Tumor/muscle 1.6 ± 0.3 2.5 ± 0.9 8.4 ± 3.8
    *n = 3 (While 4 animals were studied, one gave an unusually high value for the kidney uptake with no apparent underlying cause for the disparity with the other animals in this group. If that anomalous value is included, this result becomes 5.0 ± 5.5% ID/g, n = 4.
  • Conclusion. Tumor-selective drug targeting via the folate receptor remains feasible with pteroic acid conjugates lacking amino acid fragments, such as the glutamic acid moiety of folic acid.
    • EXAMPLE
  • Synthesis of a DOTA Conjugate of Pteroic Acid
  • A pteroic acid conjugate linked to the tetraazamacrocyclic DOTA chelating ligand was prepared for radiolabeling with radiometals such as 64Cu2+ and 111In3+. This conjugate (CY4-036) was prepared as shown in FIG. 3. The starting material for the synthesis was pteroic acid. Due to the poor solubility of pteroic acid in organic solvent, pteroic acid was protected with 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethanol to produce intermediate CY4-033 using literatural procedure (M. Nomura, et al., J. Org. Chem., 2000, 65, 5016-5021) to increase its solubility in organic solvent before coupling to the DOTA derivative.
  • DOTA was coupled to 2,2′-(ethylenedioxy)bis(ethyleneamine) using PyBOP, HOBt, and NMM as coupling reagents in DMF to produce CY4-032. Protected form of pteroyl-linker-DOTA (CY4-034) was obtained through the coupling of CY4-032 and CY4-033 in DMSO using MTBD as a base, and then purified via flash chromatography eluted with gradient MeOH/CHCl3.
  • All the protecting groups (three t-butyl groups on carboxylic acids and one 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyloxycarbonyl on nitrogen) were removed by the treatment with 70% TFA/CH2Cl2 to produce CY4-036.
  • Synthesis of CY4-032. To a solution of DOTA-tri-t-butyl ester (0.050 g, 0.087 mmol), PyBOP (0.136 g, 0.261 mmol), and HOBt (0.052 g, 0.339 mmol) in DMF (0.9 mL) was added NMM (0.035 g, 0.348 mmol) under N2. The clear solution was stirred at room temperature (i.e., about 25° C.) for 10 minutes followed by the addition of 2,2′-(ethylenedioxy)bis(ethyleneamine) (0.065 g, 0.436 mmol) under N2. After stirring at room temperature for 17 h, the solution was concentrated under high vacuum to remove DMF and excess reagents. The oily residue was triturated with Et2O (3×5 mL). After the removal of Et2O, EtOAc (3 mL) was added followed by 2 mL of water. After stirring for 2 minutes, the EtOAc was separated from aqueous layer and then more EtOAc (3 mL) was added for the extraction of product. The extraction was repeated one more time. All three EtOAc layers were combined, concentrated, and then dried under high vacuum to produce 0.153 g of oily crude product. C34H66N6O9=702; Electrospray (+): M+H 703. This crude material was used for the next coupling step without further purification.
  • Synthesis of CY4-033. To a suspension of carbonyl diimidazole (CDI) (0.069 g, 0.425 mmol) and pteroic acid (0.028 g, 0.090 mmol) in DMSO (0.8 mL) was added triethylamine (0.032 g, 0.32 mmol) under N2. After stirring at room temperature for 3.5 hours, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethanol (0.076 g, 0.64 mmol) was added and stirred at room temperature for 5.5 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under high vacuum overnight to remove DMSO and excess reagents. Yellow residue was produced and triturated with Et2O. A yellow solid (0.067 g) was produced as crude product. This crude material was used for next reaction without further purification.
  • Synthesis of CY4-034. To a solution of CY4-032 (0.153 g) and CY4-033 (0.067 g) in DMSO (0.8 mL) was added MTBD (0.041 g, 0.27 mmol) under N2. After stirring at room temperature for 21 hour, the reaction mixture was dried under high vacuum to remove DMSO and excess reagents to produce 0.157 g of yellow residue. This crude product was purified via flash chromatography eluted with gradient MeOH/CHCl3to produce 0.073 g of pure CY4-034.
  • Synthesis of CY4-036. 70% TFA/CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added to the purified CY4-034 (0.018 g) at room temperature. After stirring at room temperature for 4.5 hour, the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and dried under high vacuum overnight to produce 19 mg of crude product. All three t-Butyl groups and the 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyloxycarbonyl protecting group were removed at this step.
  • 64Cu-complex of CY4-036. The 64Cu complex of CY4-036 was prepared from 64Cu-chloride via ligand exchange in acetate buffer. Briefly, 2.88 mCi of no-carrier-added 64Cu-chloride (Washington University, St. Louis, Mo.) in 0.005 mL of 0.01 N HCl was transferred to a small test tube and mixed with 0.010 mL of 0.5 M ammonium acetate (pH 7.4). The CY4-036 ligand was weighed out and diluted in water and the pH adjusted with 1 N NaOH to pH 11-12. One μL of this ligand solution containing ˜125 μg CY4-036 was added to the 64Cu-acetate solution and mixed. The pH of the solution was adjusted to pH 8-9 with the addition of 1 μL of 1 N NaOH. The solution was protected from light and incubated at 65° C. for 30 minutes.
  • The resulting crude 64Cu-CY4-036 was diluted with water and injected onto radio-HPLC using a 10×250 mm Dynamax C18 column (Varian/Rainin) eluted with an aqueous NH4OAc:acetonitrile gradient. HPLC conditions: Solvent A=56 mM NH4OAc in water; Solvent B=CH3CN. Flow rate=2.35 mL/min on 10×250 mm C18 reverse-phase column. Linear gradient conditions: 5% B at zero minutes, ramping to 25% B at 25 minutes, then ramping to 60% B at 27 minutes and 100% B at 30 minutes. The major radioactive HPLC peak, eluting with a retention time of 20.9 minutes, was collected. Radio-TLC confirmed the absence of 64Cu(II)-acetate, which was independently shown to remain at the origin.
  • HPLC-purified 64Cu-CY4-036 was removed from the HPLC solvents by solid-phase extraction. A C18 Sep-Pak Light solid phase extraction cartridge (Millipore, Inc.) was conditioned by washing with ethanol followed by water. The HPLC-purified 64Cu-CY4-036 was loaded onto the C18 Sep-Pak after dilution with water to 5% acetonitrile, the Sep-Pak was washed with 20 mL water, and the 64Cu-CY4-036 product recovered by fractional elution with ethanol. The resulting ethanol solution of 64Cu-CY4-036 was evaporated to dryness under a stream of N2 at room temperature, and the 64Cu-CY4-036 was reconstituted in water. Analytical HPLC confirmed the radiochemical purity, and stability, of the isolated 64Cu-CY4-036 product. HPLC conditions: Solvent A=53 mM NH4OAc in water; Solvent B=CH3CN. Flow rate=1 mL/min on 4.6×250 mm C18 reverse-phase analytical column. Linear gradient conditions: 5% B at zero minutes, ramping to 25% B at 25 minutes, then ramping to 60% B at 27 minutes and 100% B at 30 minutes.

Claims (34)

1.-46. (canceled)
47. A compound of the formula

B-L(D)x
or a salt thereof, wherein
B is a binding ligand of the formula
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00193
wherein * represents the point of attachment of B to L;
L is a linker comprising one or more unnatural amino acids, wherein at least one unnatural amino acid has the D-configuration;
D is a therapeutic agent; and
x is 1.
48. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein at least one unnatural amino acid is selected from the group consisting of D-alanine, D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-phenylalanine, D-histidine, D-isoleucine, D-lysine, D-leucine, D-methionine, D-proline, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-valine, D-tryptophan, D-tyrosine, and D-ornithine.
49. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises two or more unnatural amino acids.
51. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises three or more unnatural amino acids.
52. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises four or more unnatural amino acids.
53. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises a plurality of spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids and stereoisomers thereof.
54. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises a plurality of spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids selected from the group consisting of asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, and ornithine.
55. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises at least one naturally occurring amino acid.
56. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises at least one hydrophilic spacer linker.
57. The compound of claim 56, or a salt thereof, wherein the hydrophilic spacer linker includes a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups.
58. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00194
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00195
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00196
wherein
R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl;
m is an integer from 1 to about 3;
n is an integer from 1 to about 6;
p is an integer from 1 to about 5;
r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3; and
each * represents a covalent bond to B, D, or another linker portion.
59. The compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, wherein D is a radiotherapeutic agent.
60. The compound of claim 59, or a salt thereof, wherein the therapeutic agent comprises a chelating group sequestering a radionuclide.
61. The compound of claim 60, or a salt thereof, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 157Gd, 64Cu, 67Cu, 186Re, 188Re, 90Y, 111In, and 177Lu.
62. The compound of claim 61, or a salt thereof, wherein the chelating group is DOTA or DPTA.
63. A pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one compound of claim 47, or a salt thereof, and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient.
64. A unit dose or unit dosage form composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of claim 47, optionally in combination with one or more carrier, diluent, or excipient, or a combination thereof.
65. A method of treating cancer in a patient, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of claim 47, or a salt thereof.
66. A compound of the formula

B-L(D)x
or a salt thereof, wherein
B is a binding ligand of the formula
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00197
wherein * represents the point of attachment of B to L;
L is a linker comprising one or more unnatural amino acids, wherein at least one unnatural amino acid has the D-configuration;
D is a diagnostic agent; and
x is 1.
67. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein at least one unnatural amino acid is selected from the group consisting of D-alanine, D-aspartic acid, D-asparagine, D-cysteine, D-glutamic acid, D-phenylalanine, D-histidine, D-isoleucine, D-lysine, D-leucine, D-methionine, D-proline, D-glutamine, D-arginine, D-serine, D-threonine, D-valine, D-tryptophan, D-tyrosine, and D-ornithine.
68. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises two or more unnatural amino acids.
69. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises three or more unnatural amino acids.
70. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises four or more unnatural amino acids.
71. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises a plurality of spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids and stereoisomers thereof.
72. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises a plurality of spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids selected from the group consisting of asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, and ornithine.
73. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises at least one naturally occurring amino acid.
74. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises at least one hydrophilic spacer linker.
75. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein the hydrophilic spacer linker includes a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups.
76. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein L comprises one or more of the following fragments:
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00198
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00199
Figure US20200121801A1-20200423-C00200
wherein each * represents a covalent bond to B, D, or another linker portion.
77. The compound of claim 66, or a salt thereof, wherein the diagnostic agent comprises a chelating agent coordinated to a superparamagnetic metal, a paramagnetic metal, a ferrimagnetic metal, ferromagnetic metal, a radioactive gamma-emitting metal, a positron-emitting or photon-emitting metal, or a radionuclide.
78. The compound of claim 77, or a salt thereof, wherein the metal is selected from the group consisting of Cr(III), Mn(II), Fe(II), Fe(III), and Ni(II).
79. The compound of claim 77, or a salt thereof, wherein the metal is selected from the group consisting of 99mTc, 51Cr, 67Ga, 68Ga, 103Ru, 211Bi, 64Cu and 111In.
80. The compound of claim 79, or a salt thereof, wherein the chelating agent is DOTA or DPTA.
US16/549,247 2012-10-16 2019-08-23 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using Abandoned US20200121801A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/549,247 US20200121801A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2019-08-23 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201261714565P 2012-10-16 2012-10-16
US201361790234P 2013-03-15 2013-03-15
US201361865382P 2013-08-13 2013-08-13
US201361877317P 2013-09-13 2013-09-13
PCT/US2013/065079 WO2014062697A2 (en) 2012-10-16 2013-10-15 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US201514435919A 2015-04-15 2015-04-15
US15/454,109 US20170360950A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2017-03-09 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US16/549,247 US20200121801A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2019-08-23 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/454,109 Continuation US20170360950A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2017-03-09 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20200121801A1 true US20200121801A1 (en) 2020-04-23

Family

ID=50488881

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/435,919 Active US9662402B2 (en) 2012-10-16 2013-10-15 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US15/454,109 Abandoned US20170360950A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2017-03-09 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US16/549,247 Abandoned US20200121801A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2019-08-23 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/435,919 Active US9662402B2 (en) 2012-10-16 2013-10-15 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US15/454,109 Abandoned US20170360950A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2017-03-09 Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using

Country Status (17)

Country Link
US (3) US9662402B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2908818A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2015536323A (en)
KR (1) KR20150070318A (en)
CN (1) CN104869998A (en)
AR (1) AR093038A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2013331440A1 (en)
BR (1) BR112015008365A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2887727A1 (en)
EA (1) EA201590622A1 (en)
HK (1) HK1212618A1 (en)
IL (1) IL238301A0 (en)
IN (1) IN2015DN04147A (en)
MX (1) MX2015004757A (en)
SG (1) SG11201502896XA (en)
TW (1) TW201417833A (en)
WO (1) WO2014062697A2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022219569A1 (en) * 2021-04-16 2022-10-20 Novartis Ag Folate receptor-targeted radiotherapeutic agents and their use

Families Citing this family (64)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8288557B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2012-10-16 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
EP2481427A1 (en) 2007-03-14 2012-08-01 Endocyte, Inc. Folate-Tubulysin conjugates
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
CN101784565B (en) 2007-06-25 2014-12-10 恩多塞特公司 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US9193763B2 (en) 2007-08-17 2015-11-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
US9951324B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2018-04-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
EP2600901B1 (en) 2010-08-06 2019-03-27 ModernaTX, Inc. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising engineered nucleic acids and medical use thereof
HRP20220796T1 (en) 2010-10-01 2022-10-14 ModernaTX, Inc. Ribonucleic acids containing n1-methyl-pseudouracils and uses thereof
CA2831613A1 (en) 2011-03-31 2012-10-04 Moderna Therapeutics, Inc. Delivery and formulation of engineered nucleic acids
US9464124B2 (en) 2011-09-12 2016-10-11 Moderna Therapeutics, Inc. Engineered nucleic acids and methods of use thereof
EP3492109B1 (en) 2011-10-03 2020-03-04 ModernaTX, Inc. Modified nucleosides, nucleotides, and nucleic acids, and uses thereof
RS63244B1 (en) 2011-12-16 2022-06-30 Modernatx Inc Modified mrna compositions
US10080805B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2018-09-25 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US20140080175A1 (en) 2012-03-29 2014-03-20 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
US9303079B2 (en) 2012-04-02 2016-04-05 Moderna Therapeutics, Inc. Modified polynucleotides for the production of cytoplasmic and cytoskeletal proteins
WO2013151664A1 (en) 2012-04-02 2013-10-10 modeRNA Therapeutics Modified polynucleotides for the production of proteins
US9283287B2 (en) 2012-04-02 2016-03-15 Moderna Therapeutics, Inc. Modified polynucleotides for the production of nuclear proteins
US9572897B2 (en) 2012-04-02 2017-02-21 Modernatx, Inc. Modified polynucleotides for the production of cytoplasmic and cytoskeletal proteins
AU2013331440A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2015-04-30 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US9636413B2 (en) 2012-11-15 2017-05-02 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates for treating diseases caused by PSMA expressing cells
PL2922554T3 (en) 2012-11-26 2022-06-20 Modernatx, Inc. Terminally modified rna
US8980864B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-03-17 Moderna Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods of altering cholesterol levels
EP3052106A4 (en) 2013-09-30 2017-07-19 ModernaTX, Inc. Polynucleotides encoding immune modulating polypeptides
SG11201602503TA (en) 2013-10-03 2016-04-28 Moderna Therapeutics Inc Polynucleotides encoding low density lipoprotein receptor
MX2016005013A (en) 2013-10-18 2017-02-28 Deutsches Krebsforsch Labeled inhibitors of prostate specific membrane antigen (psma), their use as imaging agents and pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of prostate cancer.
KR102457827B1 (en) * 2013-11-14 2022-10-24 엔도사이트, 인코포레이티드 Compounds for positron emission tomography
MX371092B (en) * 2013-12-16 2020-01-16 Genentech Inc Peptidomimetic compounds and antibody-drug conjugates thereof.
AU2015247806A1 (en) * 2014-04-14 2016-10-27 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates for treating resistant cancer and for use in combination therapy
EP3197502A1 (en) * 2014-09-25 2017-08-02 Endocyte, Inc. Methods of treating cancer with tubulysin conjugates
EP3223860A4 (en) * 2014-11-25 2018-08-01 Endocyte, Inc. Methods of treating cancer by targeting tumor-associated macrophages
US10188759B2 (en) 2015-01-07 2019-01-29 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates for imaging
CA2979527A1 (en) * 2015-03-13 2016-09-22 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates of pyrrolobenzodiazepine (pbd) prodrugs for treating disease
US20180110871A1 (en) * 2015-04-17 2018-04-26 Endocyte, Inc. Dual disulfide drug conjugates
US20180280528A1 (en) * 2015-05-01 2018-10-04 Endocyte, Inc. Antifolate conjugates for treating inflammation
AU2016363013B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2022-03-10 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds
US11793880B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2023-10-24 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds
MX2018011627A (en) * 2016-03-24 2019-01-10 Bayer Pharma AG Prodrugs of cytotoxic active agents having enzymatically cleavable groups.
WO2017172930A1 (en) * 2016-03-29 2017-10-05 Endocyte, Inc. Pbd conjugates for treating diseases
WO2018182776A1 (en) * 2016-03-29 2018-10-04 Endocyte, Inc. Folate conjugate for use in targeting tumor associated macrophages
CN114903890A (en) * 2016-05-25 2022-08-16 普渡研究基金会 Methods of treating cancer by targeting bone marrow-derived suppressor cells
US10181526B2 (en) 2016-06-02 2019-01-15 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Field effect transistor including multiple aspect ratio trapping structures
WO2017219029A2 (en) 2016-06-17 2017-12-21 Magenta Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for the depletion of cd117+cells
US10711032B2 (en) 2016-11-08 2020-07-14 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Steroids and protein-conjugates thereof
US11135307B2 (en) 2016-11-23 2021-10-05 Mersana Therapeutics, Inc. Peptide-containing linkers for antibody-drug conjugates
GB2557931A (en) * 2016-12-16 2018-07-04 Univ Bristol Unnatural amino acids
CN106632341A (en) * 2016-12-27 2017-05-10 天津阿尔塔科技有限公司 Method for synthesizing D-folic acid
EP3565603B1 (en) 2017-01-09 2022-12-07 Aposense Ltd. Compounds and methods for trans-membrane delivery of molecules
WO2018136620A2 (en) * 2017-01-18 2018-07-26 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Endosomal cleavable linkers
SG10202102897PA (en) 2017-01-20 2021-04-29 Magenta Therapeutics Inc Compositions and methods for the depletion of cd137+ cells
AU2018270784B2 (en) 2017-05-18 2024-05-16 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclodextrin protein drug conjugates
EP3638215A4 (en) 2017-06-15 2021-03-24 Modernatx, Inc. Rna formulations
AU2018326799A1 (en) 2017-08-31 2020-02-27 Modernatx, Inc. Methods of making lipid nanoparticles
WO2019104289A1 (en) 2017-11-27 2019-05-31 Mersana Therapeutics, Inc. Pyrrolobenzodiazepine antibody conjugates
TW201929908A (en) 2017-12-21 2019-08-01 美商梅爾莎納醫療公司 Pyrrolobenzodiazepine antibody conjugates
SG11202006510XA (en) 2018-01-08 2020-08-28 Regeneron Pharma Steroids and antibody-conjugates thereof
KR20210008008A (en) 2018-05-09 2021-01-20 리제너론 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Anti-MSR1 antibodies and methods of use thereof
CN113271926A (en) 2018-09-20 2021-08-17 摩登纳特斯有限公司 Preparation of lipid nanoparticles and methods of administration thereof
EP3873534A1 (en) 2018-10-29 2021-09-08 Mersana Therapeutics, Inc. Cysteine engineered antibody-drug conjugates with peptide-containing linkers
US11786605B2 (en) 2020-01-09 2023-10-17 Mersana Therapeutics, Inc. Site specific antibody-drug conjugates with peptide-containing linkers
JP2020117509A (en) * 2020-03-12 2020-08-06 エンドサイト・インコーポレイテッドＥｎｄｏｃｙｔｅ， Ｉｎｃ． Conjugates for treating diseases
US20220378749A1 (en) 2020-04-02 2022-12-01 Mersana Therapeutics, Inc. Antibody drug conjugates comprising sting agonists
WO2022136234A1 (en) * 2020-12-22 2022-06-30 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Method for detecting an analyte of interest in a sample
EP4308170A1 (en) 2021-03-18 2024-01-24 Seagen Inc. Selective drug release from internalized conjugates of biologically active compounds
WO2024025845A1 (en) * 2022-07-25 2024-02-01 Sorrento Therapeutics, Inc. Folate-conjugated drugs and uses thereof

Family Cites Families (215)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2515483A (en) 1946-08-10 1950-07-18 Merck & Co Inc Diacylated pteroic acid and process for preparing same
US2816110A (en) 1956-11-23 1957-12-10 Merck & Co Inc Methods for the production of substituted pteridines
US3392173A (en) 1964-03-09 1968-07-09 Lilly Co Eli Novel acyl derivatives of desacetyl-vincaleukoblastine and processes for their preparation
US3387001A (en) 1964-10-19 1968-06-04 Lilly Co Eli Novel aminoacyl esters of desacetyl vincaleukoblastine
US3641109A (en) 1968-09-04 1972-02-08 Carl D Emerson Alkyl and aryl esters of polyhalo-dithio alcohols
US3632622A (en) 1969-04-01 1972-01-04 Chevron Res Polyhaloalkylpolythioalkyl sulfite esters
US4203898A (en) 1977-08-29 1980-05-20 Eli Lilly And Company Amide derivatives of VLB, leurosidine, leurocristine and related dimeric alkaloids
US4166810A (en) 1978-04-20 1979-09-04 Eli Lilly And Company Derivatives of 4-desacetyl VLB C-3 carboxyhydrazide
US4337339A (en) 1979-04-30 1982-06-29 Baker Instruments Corp. Process for preparation of folic acid derivatives
US4639456A (en) 1980-06-10 1987-01-27 Omnichem S.A. Vinblastin-23-oyl amino acid derivatives
US4316885A (en) 1980-08-25 1982-02-23 Ayerst, Mckenna And Harrison, Inc. Acyl derivatives of rapamycin
US4713249A (en) 1981-11-12 1987-12-15 Schroeder Ulf Crystallized carbohydrate matrix for biologically active substances, a process of preparing said matrix, and the use thereof
US5140104A (en) 1982-03-09 1992-08-18 Cytogen Corporation Amine derivatives of folic acid analogs
DE3376114D1 (en) 1982-12-07 1988-05-05 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Kk Mitomycin analogues
JPS59175493A (en) 1983-03-25 1984-10-04 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Mitomycin derivative and its preparation
GR81790B (en) 1983-04-29 1984-12-12 Omnichem Sa
US4866180A (en) 1984-02-24 1989-09-12 Bristol-Myers Company Amino disulfide thiol exchange products
GB8413849D0 (en) 1984-05-31 1984-07-04 Amersham Int Plc Nmr contrast agents
JPS60255789A (en) 1984-06-01 1985-12-17 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Mitomycin derivative, its preparation, and antitumor agent
US5266333A (en) 1985-03-06 1993-11-30 American Cyanamid Company Water dispersible and water soluble carbohydrate polymer compositions for parenteral administration of growth hormone
US4650803A (en) 1985-12-06 1987-03-17 University Of Kansas Prodrugs of rapamycin
ZA873600B (en) 1986-05-27 1988-12-28 Lilly Co Eli Immunoglobulin conjugates
US4801688A (en) 1986-05-27 1989-01-31 Eli Lilly And Company Hydrazone immunoglobulin conjugates
EP0280741B1 (en) 1986-08-29 1994-12-07 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Mitomycin derivatives
US5006652A (en) 1988-08-08 1991-04-09 Eli Lilly And Company Intermediates for antibody-vinca drug conjugates
US5094849A (en) 1988-08-08 1992-03-10 Eli Lilly And Company Cytotoxic antibody conjugates of hydrazide derivatized vinca analogs via simple organic linkers
US5108921A (en) 1989-04-03 1992-04-28 Purdue Research Foundation Method for enhanced transmembrane transport of exogenous molecules
US5688488A (en) 1989-04-03 1997-11-18 Purdue Research Foundation Composition and method for tumor imaging
AU634314B2 (en) 1989-11-13 1993-02-18 Green Cross Corporation, The Chimeric mouse-human a10 antibody with specificity to a human tumor cell antigen
US5627165A (en) 1990-06-13 1997-05-06 Drug Innovation & Design, Inc. Phosphorous prodrugs and therapeutic delivery systems using same
US5998603A (en) 1994-09-29 1999-12-07 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analogs, and oligomers thereof
EP0547163B1 (en) 1990-08-29 2002-02-06 Centre Hospitalier Regional De Nantes Protein polyligands joined to a stable protein core
US5378696A (en) 1990-09-19 1995-01-03 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin esters
US5130307A (en) 1990-09-28 1992-07-14 American Home Products Corporation Aminoesters of rapamycin
US5221670A (en) 1990-09-19 1993-06-22 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin esters
US5233036A (en) 1990-10-16 1993-08-03 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin alkoxyesters
US5120842A (en) 1991-04-01 1992-06-09 American Home Products Corporation Silyl ethers of rapamycin
US5100883A (en) 1991-04-08 1992-03-31 American Home Products Corporation Fluorinated esters of rapamycin
US5118678A (en) 1991-04-17 1992-06-02 American Home Products Corporation Carbamates of rapamycin
US5194447A (en) 1992-02-18 1993-03-16 American Home Products Corporation Sulfonylcarbamates of rapamycin
US5138051A (en) 1991-08-07 1992-08-11 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin analogs as immunosuppressants and antifungals
US5118677A (en) 1991-05-20 1992-06-02 American Home Products Corporation Amide esters of rapamycin
US5169851A (en) 1991-08-07 1992-12-08 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin analog as immunosuppressants and antifungals
US6335434B1 (en) 1998-06-16 2002-01-01 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Nucleosidic and non-nucleosidic folate conjugates
US5151413A (en) 1991-11-06 1992-09-29 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin acetals as immunosuppressant and antifungal agents
US5159079A (en) 1991-12-20 1992-10-27 Eli Lilly And Company 2-piperidones as intermediates for 5-deaza-10-oxo- and 5-deaza-10-thio-5,6,7,8-tetrahydrofolic acids
US6004555A (en) 1992-03-05 1999-12-21 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods for the specific coagulation of vasculature
US6022966A (en) 1993-11-22 2000-02-08 Neorx Corporation Pretargeting methods and compounds
US5302584A (en) 1992-10-13 1994-04-12 American Home Products Corporation Carbamates of rapamycin
US5258389A (en) 1992-11-09 1993-11-02 Merck & Co., Inc. O-aryl, O-alkyl, O-alkenyl and O-alkynylrapamycin derivatives
US5260300A (en) 1992-11-19 1993-11-09 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin carbonate esters as immuno-suppressant agents
US5583020A (en) 1992-11-24 1996-12-10 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Permeability enhancers for negatively charged polynucleotides
DE69435044T2 (en) 1993-04-23 2008-09-18 Wyeth Rapamycin conjugates and antibodies
US7279561B1 (en) 1993-04-23 2007-10-09 Wyeth Anti-rapamycin monoclonal antibodies
US5562907A (en) 1993-05-14 1996-10-08 Arnon; Stephen S. Method to prevent side-effects and insensitivity to the therapeutic uses of toxins
US5391730A (en) 1993-10-08 1995-02-21 American Home Products Corporation Phosphorylcarbamates of rapamycin and oxime derivatives thereof
US5385909A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Heterocyclic esters of rapamycin
US5385910A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Gem-distributed esters of rapamycin
US5385908A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Hindered esters of rapamycin
US5389639A (en) 1993-12-29 1995-02-14 American Home Products Company Amino alkanoic esters of rapamycin
US5417982A (en) 1994-02-17 1995-05-23 Modi; Pankaj Controlled release of drugs or hormones in biodegradable polymer microspheres
IL112873A (en) 1994-03-08 2005-03-20 Wyeth Corp Rapamycin-fkbp12 binding proteins, their isolation and their use
US6171859B1 (en) 1994-03-30 2001-01-09 Mitokor Method of targeting conjugate molecules to mitochondria
US5362718A (en) 1994-04-18 1994-11-08 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin hydroxyesters
US5463048A (en) 1994-06-14 1995-10-31 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin amidino carbamates
US5491231A (en) 1994-11-28 1996-02-13 American Home Products Corporation Hindered N-oxide esters of rapamycin
US5547668A (en) 1995-05-05 1996-08-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Conjugates of folate anti-effector cell antibodies
AUPN449295A0 (en) 1995-07-28 1995-08-24 Inner And Eastern Health Care Network, The Radioprotectors
US6207157B1 (en) 1996-04-23 2001-03-27 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Conjugate vaccine for nontypeable Haemophilus influenzae
US6030941A (en) 1996-05-01 2000-02-29 Avi Biopharma, Inc. Polymer composition for delivering substances in living organisms
DE69737867T2 (en) 1996-05-03 2007-10-18 Immunomedics, Inc. TARGETED COMBINATION IMMUNOTHERAPY FOR CANCER
DE19621133A1 (en) 1996-05-24 1997-11-27 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Determination method with oligomerized receptors
PT1007533E (en) 1996-08-27 2005-09-30 Univ Utah Res Found BIOCONJUGADOS AND ADMINISTRATION OF BIOACTIVE AGENTS
JP2000516961A (en) * 1996-08-30 2000-12-19 イーライ・リリー・アンド・カンパニー Nonclassical pyrrolo [2,3-D] pyrimidine antifolates
JP2001501601A (en) 1996-09-12 2001-02-06 メルク エンド カンパニー インコーポレーテッド Conjugates useful in treating prostate cancer
US6056973A (en) 1996-10-11 2000-05-02 Sequus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic liposome composition and method of preparation
US6177404B1 (en) 1996-10-15 2001-01-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Conjugates useful in the treatment of benign prostatic hyperplasia
US6071532A (en) 1996-10-15 2000-06-06 Emory University Synthesis of glycophospholipid and peptide-phospholipid conjugates and uses thereof
AU1095799A (en) 1997-10-17 1999-05-10 Philip L. Fuchs Folic acid derivatives
GB9723669D0 (en) 1997-11-07 1998-01-07 Univ Aberdeen Skin penetration enhancing components
US6399638B1 (en) 1998-04-21 2002-06-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 12,13-modified epothilone derivatives
US6093382A (en) 1998-05-16 2000-07-25 Bracco Research Usa Inc. Metal complexes derivatized with folate for use in diagnostic and therapeutic applications
ATE473759T1 (en) 1998-05-22 2010-07-15 Univ Leland Stanford Junior BIFUNCTIONAL MOLECULES AND THERAPIES BASED THERAPIES.
US6589503B1 (en) * 1998-06-20 2003-07-08 Washington University Membrane-permeant peptide complexes for medical imaging, diagnostics, and pharmaceutical therapy
CA2353593A1 (en) 1998-12-18 2000-06-22 Hadasit Medical Research Services & Development Ltd. Method of administering a compound to multi-drug resistant cells
US6291684B1 (en) 1999-03-29 2001-09-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for the preparation of aziridinyl epothilones from oxiranyl epothilones
EP1880736A1 (en) 1999-04-23 2008-01-23 Alza Corporation Releasable linkage and composition containing same
US7238368B2 (en) 1999-04-23 2007-07-03 Alza Corporation Releasable linkage and compositions containing same
AUPQ014799A0 (en) 1999-05-04 1999-05-27 Access Pharmaceuticals Australia Pty Limited Amplification of folate-mediated targeting to tumor cells using polymers
AUPQ071299A0 (en) 1999-06-02 1999-06-24 Access Pharmaceuticals Australia Pty Limited Vitamin directed dual targeting therapy
US6822086B1 (en) 1999-08-09 2004-11-23 The General Hospital Corporation Drug-carrier complexes and methods of use thereof
US6669951B2 (en) * 1999-08-24 2003-12-30 Cellgate, Inc. Compositions and methods for enhancing drug delivery across and into epithelial tissues
US6593292B1 (en) 1999-08-24 2003-07-15 Cellgate, Inc. Compositions and methods for enhancing drug delivery across and into epithelial tissues
WO2001028592A1 (en) 1999-10-15 2001-04-26 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Cobalamin conjugates useful as imaging agents and as antitumor agents
US7067111B1 (en) 1999-10-25 2006-06-27 Board Of Regents, University Of Texas System Ethylenedicysteine (EC)-drug conjugates, compositions and methods for tissue specific disease imaging
ATE349438T1 (en) 1999-11-24 2007-01-15 Immunogen Inc CYTOTOXIC ACTIVE INGREDIENTS CONTAINING TAXANES AND THEIR THERAPEUTIC USE
HUP0300421A2 (en) 2000-03-31 2003-06-28 Purdue Research Foundation Method of treatment using ligand-immunogen conjugates
US6670355B2 (en) 2000-06-16 2003-12-30 Wyeth Method of treating cardiovascular disease
US6290929B1 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-09-18 The Procter & Gamble Company Cancer treatment
PT1318837E (en) 2000-08-11 2004-12-31 Wyeth Corp METHOD OF TREATMENT OF CARCINOMA POSITIVE TO ESTROGENE RECEPTOR
JP2004509898A (en) 2000-09-19 2004-04-02 ワイス Water-soluble rapamycin ester
US6399625B1 (en) 2000-09-27 2002-06-04 Wyeth 1-oxorapamycins
US6399626B1 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-06-04 Wyeth Hydroxyesters of 7-desmethylrapamycin
US6440991B1 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-08-27 Wyeth Ethers of 7-desmethlrapamycin
WO2002044418A2 (en) 2000-11-28 2002-06-06 Wyeth Expression analysis of fkbp nucleic acids and polypeptides useful in the diagnosis and treatment of prostate cancer
US20020168737A1 (en) 2001-01-24 2002-11-14 Cornish Virginia W. Binding and catalysis screen for high throughput determination of protein function using chemical inducers of dimerization
AR036993A1 (en) 2001-04-02 2004-10-20 Wyeth Corp USE OF AGENTS THAT MODULATE THE INTERACTION BETWEEN PD-1 AND ITS LINKS IN THE SUBMODULATION OF IMMUNOLOGICAL ANSWERS
CA2442066C (en) 2001-04-02 2005-11-01 Wyeth Pd-1, a receptor for b7-4, and uses therefor
ATE427948T1 (en) 2001-04-24 2009-04-15 Purdue Research Foundation FOLATE MIMETICS AND THEIR FOLATE RECEPTOR-BINDING CONJUGATES
CN101979095A (en) 2001-05-02 2011-02-23 普渡研究基金会 Treatment and diagnosis of macrophage mediated disease
US7109165B2 (en) 2001-05-18 2006-09-19 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. Conjugates and compositions for cellular delivery
JP2004532888A (en) 2001-06-01 2004-10-28 ブリストル−マイヤーズ　スクイブ　カンパニー Epothilone derivative
US20040018203A1 (en) 2001-06-08 2004-01-29 Ira Pastan Pegylation of linkers improves antitumor activity and reduces toxicity of immunoconjugates
UA77200C2 (en) 2001-08-07 2006-11-15 Wyeth Corp Antineoplastic combination of cci-779 and bkb-569
MXPA04001524A (en) 2001-08-22 2004-05-31 Wyeth Corp Rapamycin 29-enols.
WO2003018574A1 (en) 2001-08-22 2003-03-06 Wyeth Rapamycin dialdehydes
JP2005523878A (en) 2001-09-28 2005-08-11 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション Treatment method using ligand / immunogen complex
GR1004163B (en) 2001-11-01 2003-02-21 Polycarbocyclic derivatives for modification of resist, optical and etch resistance properties
JP2005520795A (en) 2001-12-12 2005-07-14 コンフォーマ・セラピューティクス・コーポレイション Purine analogs having HSP90 inhibitory activity
US20030194409A1 (en) 2002-01-17 2003-10-16 Rothman James E. Conjugate heat shock protein-binding peptides
US8043602B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2011-10-25 Endocyte, Inc. Folate targeted enhanced tumor and folate receptor positive tissue optical imaging technology
US7000695B2 (en) 2002-05-02 2006-02-21 Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. Expanding wellbore junction
ATE448799T1 (en) 2002-05-06 2009-12-15 Endocyte Inc FOLATE RECEPTOR TARGETED IMAGING CONJUGATES
US6596757B1 (en) 2002-05-14 2003-07-22 Immunogen Inc. Cytotoxic agents comprising polyethylene glycol-containing taxanes and their therapeutic use
KR20040106547A (en) 2002-05-15 2004-12-17 엔도사이트, 인코포레이티드 Vitamin-mitomycin conjugates
WO2004005326A2 (en) 2002-07-09 2004-01-15 Morphochem Aktiengellschaft Fu Tubulysin conjugates
DK1523493T3 (en) 2002-07-09 2013-12-02 Alexander Doemling New tubulysine analogues
US7659241B2 (en) * 2002-07-31 2010-02-09 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Drug conjugates and their use for treating cancer, an autoimmune disease or an infectious disease
JP2006505627A (en) 2002-07-31 2006-02-16 シエーリング アクチエンゲゼルシャフト Novel effector conjugates, methods for their production and their pharmaceutical use
DE10241152A1 (en) 2002-09-05 2004-03-18 GESELLSCHAFT FüR BIOTECHNOLOGISCHE FORSCHUNG MBH (GBF) Tubulysin biosynthesis genes
US20040047917A1 (en) 2002-09-06 2004-03-11 Stephen Wilson Drug delivery and targeting with vitamin B12 conjugates
CN102516417B (en) 2002-09-06 2014-12-10 天蓝制药公司 Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
WO2004032877A2 (en) 2002-10-10 2004-04-22 Wyeth Compositions, organisms and methodologies employing a novel human kinase
WO2004037210A2 (en) 2002-10-24 2004-05-06 Research Corporation Technologies Functional mri agents for cancer imaging
DE10254439A1 (en) 2002-11-21 2004-06-03 GESELLSCHAFT FüR BIOTECHNOLOGISCHE FORSCHUNG MBH (GBF) Tubulysins, manufacturing processes and tubulysin agents
EP1578197A4 (en) 2002-11-21 2006-05-17 Wyeth Corp Composition and method for treating lupus nephritis
WO2004054622A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2004-07-01 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunoconjugates with an intracellularly-cleavable linkage
EP2517730A3 (en) 2003-01-27 2013-01-02 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugates
AR042938A1 (en) 2003-02-06 2005-07-06 Wyeth Corp USE OF CCI-779 IN THE TREATMENT OF HEPATIC FIBROSIS
ES2702942T3 (en) 2003-04-17 2019-03-06 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc Modified RNAi agents
CA2524441C (en) 2003-05-06 2012-03-20 Purdue Research Foundation Treatment of lupus targeting the macrophages or the folate receptor
WO2004101803A2 (en) 2003-05-12 2004-11-25 Wyeth Holdings Corporation Process for producing anticancer agent ll-d45042
WO2005010010A1 (en) 2003-07-16 2005-02-03 Wyeth Cci-779 isomer c
RU2339639C2 (en) 2003-08-07 2008-11-27 Уайт Regioselective cci-779 synthesis
DE602005003453T2 (en) 2004-01-30 2008-09-25 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft NEW EFFECTOR CONJUGATES, PROCESS FOR THEIR MANUFACTURE AND THEIR PHARMACEUTICAL USE
WO2005111238A2 (en) 2004-04-19 2005-11-24 Archemix Corporation Aptamer-mediated intracellular delivery of therapeutic oligonucleotides
JP4806680B2 (en) 2004-05-19 2011-11-02 メダレックス インコーポレイテッド Self-sacrificing linker and drug conjugate
WO2005115912A1 (en) 2004-05-25 2005-12-08 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Hydrogen production apparatus and fuel cell system using the same
US8288557B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2012-10-16 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
JP5192234B2 (en) 2004-08-10 2013-05-08 アルナイラム ファーマシューティカルズ， インコーポレイテッド Chemically modified oligonucleotide
TW200616604A (en) 2004-08-26 2006-06-01 Nicholas Piramal India Ltd Nitric oxide releasing prodrugs containing bio-cleavable linker
AU2005294214A1 (en) 2004-10-07 2006-04-20 Emory University Multifunctional nanoparticles conjugates and their use
US20060222653A1 (en) 2004-11-12 2006-10-05 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies operably linked to selected chemoattractants
US20110166319A1 (en) 2005-02-11 2011-07-07 Immunogen, Inc. Process for preparing purified drug conjugates
TW200640493A (en) 2005-02-16 2006-12-01 Insert Therapeutics Inc Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
US7312217B2 (en) 2005-03-11 2007-12-25 Syntrix Biosystems, Inc. Aminopterin dosage forms and methods for inflammatory disorders
US8044200B2 (en) 2005-03-16 2011-10-25 Endocyte, Inc. Synthesis and purification of pteroic acid and conjugates thereof
US20090081710A1 (en) 2005-03-30 2009-03-26 Purdue Research Foundation Method for Cancer Prognosis Using Cellular Folate Vitamin Receptor Quantification
DK1912677T3 (en) 2005-06-20 2014-01-13 Psma Dev Company L L C PSMA antibody-drug conjugates
EP1904183B1 (en) 2005-07-05 2014-10-15 Purdue Research Foundation Pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of osteoarthritis
JP2009504783A (en) * 2005-08-19 2009-02-05 エンドサイト，インコーポレイテッド Ligand conjugates of vinca alkaloids, analogues and derivatives
ES2468240T3 (en) 2005-08-19 2014-06-16 Endocyte, Inc. Multiple drug ligand conjugates
CN102719508A (en) 2005-08-19 2012-10-10 诺和诺德公司 Glycopegylated factor VII and factor VIIA
SI1928503T1 (en) 2005-08-24 2012-11-30 Immunogen Inc Process for preparing maytansinoid antibody conjugates
EP1957113A4 (en) 2005-11-21 2011-11-09 Medivas Llc Polymer particles for delivery of macromolecules and methods of use
PE20080102A1 (en) 2006-05-25 2008-02-11 Bristol Myers Squibb Co AZIRIDINYL-EPOTILONE CONJUGATES AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS INCLUDING THE SAME
US8685752B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2014-04-01 Purdue Research Foundation Ex vivo flow cytometry method and device
US20080176958A1 (en) 2007-01-24 2008-07-24 Insert Therapeutics, Inc. Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
US8664181B2 (en) * 2007-02-16 2014-03-04 Ktb Tumorforschungsgesellschaft Mbh Dual acting prodrugs
WO2008101231A2 (en) 2007-02-16 2008-08-21 Endocyte, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating and diagnosing kidney disease
EP2481427A1 (en) * 2007-03-14 2012-08-01 Endocyte, Inc. Folate-Tubulysin conjugates
ES2463693T3 (en) 2007-05-10 2014-05-29 R & D Biopharmaceuticals Gmbh Tubulisin derivatives
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
CN101784565B (en) 2007-06-25 2014-12-10 恩多塞特公司 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US8476451B2 (en) 2007-07-20 2013-07-02 The Regents Of The University Of California Tubulysin D analogues
US9193763B2 (en) 2007-08-17 2015-11-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
CA2703491C (en) 2007-10-25 2017-06-13 Endocyte, Inc. Tubulysins and processes for preparing
EP2231194B1 (en) 2007-12-04 2017-02-22 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Folate-irna conjugates
US8609105B2 (en) * 2008-03-18 2013-12-17 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Auristatin drug linker conjugates
EP2276506A4 (en) 2008-04-30 2014-05-07 Immunogen Inc Potent conjugates and hydrophilic linkers
US20100040669A1 (en) 2008-08-12 2010-02-18 Higuchi John W Non-Invasive Ocular Delivery of Rapamycin
WO2010033733A1 (en) 2008-09-17 2010-03-25 Endocyte, Inc. Folate receptor binding conjugates of antifolates
US20100074863A1 (en) 2008-09-17 2010-03-25 Yat Sun Or Anti-infective pyrrolidine derivatives and analogs
EP2174947A1 (en) 2008-09-25 2010-04-14 Universität des Saarlandes Bioactive pre-tubulysins and use thereof
WO2010045598A2 (en) 2008-10-17 2010-04-22 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
IT1394860B1 (en) 2009-07-22 2012-07-20 Kemotech S R L PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOUNDS
US8394922B2 (en) 2009-08-03 2013-03-12 Medarex, Inc. Antiproliferative compounds, conjugates thereof, methods therefor, and uses thereof
EP2322537A1 (en) 2009-11-12 2011-05-18 R & D Biopharmaceuticals Gmbh Tubulin inhibitors
CN102648208B (en) 2009-11-12 2016-04-27 R&D生技药品有限责任公司 Antitubulin
WO2011069116A1 (en) 2009-12-04 2011-06-09 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
CA2785373A1 (en) 2009-12-23 2011-06-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US20120322741A1 (en) 2010-02-25 2012-12-20 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
EP2409983A1 (en) 2010-07-19 2012-01-25 Leibniz-Institut für Pflanzenbiochemie (IPB) Tubulysin analogues
US8889880B2 (en) 2010-08-06 2014-11-18 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins
WO2012047525A2 (en) 2010-09-27 2012-04-12 Endocyte, Inc. Folate conjugates for treating inflammation of the eye
WO2012090104A1 (en) * 2010-12-31 2012-07-05 Kareus Therapeutics, Sa Methods and compositions for designing novel conjugate therapeutics
EP2691117A2 (en) 2011-03-29 2014-02-05 Immunogen, Inc. Process for manufacturing conjugates of improved homogeneity
KR102272828B1 (en) 2011-03-29 2021-07-05 이뮤노젠 아이엔씨 Preparation of maytansinoid antibody conjugates by a one-step process
EA029797B1 (en) 2011-06-21 2018-05-31 Иммуноджен, Инк. Novel maytansinoid derivatives with peptide linker and conjugates thereof
MX2014006739A (en) 2011-12-05 2015-06-05 Igenica Biotherapeutics Inc Antibody-drug conjugates and related compounds, compositions, and methods.
US10080805B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2018-09-25 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US9629918B2 (en) 2012-02-29 2017-04-25 Purdue Research Foundation Folate receptor alpha binding ligands
US20140080175A1 (en) 2012-03-29 2014-03-20 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
CA2873112A1 (en) 2012-05-11 2013-11-14 Alexander Krantz Site-specific labeling and targeted delivery of proteins for the treatment of cancer
CN104640572B (en) 2012-05-15 2018-04-27 索伦托医疗有限公司 Drug conjugates, coupling method, and application thereof
PL2872157T3 (en) 2012-07-12 2020-07-13 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co., Ltd Conjugates of cell binding molecules with cytotoxic agents
EP2708243A1 (en) 2012-09-17 2014-03-19 OntoChem GmbH Receptor ligand linked cytotoxic molecules
AU2013331440A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2015-04-30 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US20140107316A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2014-04-17 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US9636413B2 (en) 2012-11-15 2017-05-02 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates for treating diseases caused by PSMA expressing cells
WO2014080251A1 (en) 2012-11-24 2014-05-30 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co., Ltd. Hydrophilic linkers and their uses for conjugation of drugs to cell binding molecules
US20140154702A1 (en) 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 Endocyte, Inc. Methods For Treating Cancer Using Combination Therapies
SG10201705150RA (en) 2012-12-21 2017-07-28 Bioalliance Cv Hydrophilic self-immolative linkers and conjugates thereof
EA030830B1 (en) 2013-02-14 2018-10-31 Бристол-Майерс Сквибб Компани Tubulysin compounds, methods of making and use thereof
US20140249315A1 (en) 2013-03-01 2014-09-04 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022219569A1 (en) * 2021-04-16 2022-10-20 Novartis Ag Folate receptor-targeted radiotherapeutic agents and their use

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2013331440A1 (en) 2015-04-30
EP2908818A2 (en) 2015-08-26
KR20150070318A (en) 2015-06-24
US9662402B2 (en) 2017-05-30
MX2015004757A (en) 2015-07-17
EP2908818A4 (en) 2016-07-13
IN2015DN04147A (en) 2015-10-16
US20150258203A1 (en) 2015-09-17
BR112015008365A2 (en) 2017-07-04
US20170360950A1 (en) 2017-12-21
TW201417833A (en) 2014-05-16
WO2014062697A2 (en) 2014-04-24
WO2014062697A3 (en) 2014-06-26
AR093038A1 (en) 2015-05-13
JP2015536323A (en) 2015-12-21
HK1212618A1 (en) 2016-06-17
CN104869998A (en) 2015-08-26
EA201590622A1 (en) 2015-10-30
SG11201502896XA (en) 2015-05-28
IL238301A0 (en) 2015-06-30
CA2887727A1 (en) 2014-04-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20200121801A1 (en) Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US20210154312A1 (en) Conjugates for treating diseases caused by psma expressing cells
US11344623B2 (en) Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US20140107316A1 (en) Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION